MF 1533-1540

General
TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
Model/Serial Numbers
FIG. 1: Chassis number (1) is stamped in right side of
frontframe.
FIG. 1
FIG. 2: Engine model number (1) is cast on right side of
engine block, below the injection pump.
Engine serial number (2) is stamped into cylinder block,
below engine model number.
Engine Serial Number
13034
FIG. 2
FIG. 3: The tractor identification plate (1) is located
below the operator's seat.
i-9064
FIG. 3
01-2 4283359M1
General
FIGS. 4-6: The identification plate contains model
number and traclor serial number.
AG.4
AG.5
AG.6
4283359M1 01-3
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACmES
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
o.n..JDtl,. . . . .
0-0II HiIIlihl (1)••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••_ ••.••.••.•••.••.••_ 2201 .... tp ~
0-0II ~ (2J•••••_ •••••_ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••_ •••••_...................... Ill7lI om (121 ~

M1_ _ l3l
(Ag lhs) ••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_.............................. 1_.... (II.1 ~
{I\I~lhs) .•.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••.•••.•••.••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ 15411 .. m (C1 ~
WI_(oll
" 1101_ .•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••.•••.•••.••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ 1711) mm (70 ~
01(11101_ .•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••.•••.•••.••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ 1711) mm {70 ~
---
_ CIoInNo (Au lhs) ••.••.••...••.••.•••.••_ ••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_. *'0 mm (1' ~
2WD .••_ ••.••_ ••.••...••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.••_...................... 1120 mm (44..1 ~

331101_ ~ .•.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.••...••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••• 11311'" 1271 om ~lIilU ~
00
-- 4Cl11ol 1 _ ~ .•.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.••...••.••.•••.••.•••.••. mn 11311'" 1271 om ~lIilU ~
_ _...••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••_ ••.••.••.•••.••.••_ 2100 mm \II h)
-- W!I'Mlul _
331""
4Cl1,,"
•••••••••••••••••••••••••_ •••••••••••••••••••_.............................. 11m om (122 h)
!4odI•.•••.••.••...••.••.•••.••_............................................
!4odI•.•••.••.••...••.••.•••.••_............................................
1:m11og (lI03111)
13lCl1og (IllIiI1I)
• IM1
Specifications And Capacities
,~ ~
,1 ..
' ",'
. . "
"
t
" .
0 -.. . .
i-9561d
FIG. 8
FIG. 8: CabTractor General Dimensions.

Overall Height (1) (AgTires).................................................................................................................... 2220 mm (87.4 in)
Overall Length (2) 3070 mm (121 in)
Minimum Width (3)
Ag Tires 1565mm (62 in)
Turf Tires 1530mm (60 in)
Wheelbase (4)
33 Horsepower 1770mm (70 in)
40 Horsepower 1930mm (76 in)
Ground Clearance (AgTires) 360 mm (14 in)
Weight
33 Horsepower 1535kg (3384 Ib)
40 Horsepower 1823kg (4023 Ib)
Front Wheel Tread 1130to 1271 mm (44to 50 in)
RearWheel Tread 1190to 1495mm (47to 59 in)
Turning Radius With Brake 2500 mm (98 in)
01-6 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor
WORKSHOP SERVICE MANUAL

4283359M1
02 - Engine
Contents
COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator Location ......................................................................................................................................... 02b-1
Fan Belt ................................................................................................................................................. 02b-2
Thermostat ............................................................................................................................................ 02b-2
Radiator ....................................................................................................................................................... 02b-3
Reserve Tank System ................................................................................................................................. 02b-4
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 02b-7
Fuel Filter .............................................................................................................................................. 02b-7
Fuel Pump ............................................................................................................................................. 02b-8
Air-Bleeding Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 02b-9
Throttle Lever ........................................................................................................................................ 02b-9
Fuel System ............................................................................................................................................... 02b-10
AIR SYSTEM
Engine Air Cleaner ..................................................................................................................................... 02b-11
INDEX .......................................................................................................................................................... 02B-13
4283359M1 02b-i
Contents
NOTES
02b-ii 4283359M1
Cooling System
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR LOCATION
m
CAUTION: DO NOT remove radiator cap
when engine is hot. Rotate cap slowly to
release pressure. Then cap can be safely
removed.
FIG. 1: Cooling system is filled at factory with anti-freeze

solution to protect engine and radiator to -34 degrees C
(-29 degrees F). Cooling level must be maintained to 12
mm (0.50 in) below the filler neck opening (1).
Make sure the radiator, radiator screen and grill screens 1
are clean to permit maximum cooling. Use compressed
air or water to clean, but use care when cleaning the
radiator to prevent cooling fin damage.
i-9694
FIG. 1
FIG. 2: Drain cock (1) will drain coolant from cylinder
block and radiator. Drain cock is located on right side of
engine. Coolant must be replaced if the coolant becomes
contaminated with rust or sludge. Loosening radiator cap
will assist draining.
NOTE: Flush inside of radiator and engine block prior to
replacing coolant.
Check condition of hoses, belt and clamps and replace as 1
necessary.
I3188
FIG. 2
4283359M1 02b-1
Cooling System
Fan Belt
FIG. 3: Correct fan belt tension helps to insure adequate
coolant flow through cylinder block and radiator. Belt is
correctly tensioned when belt deflection is approximately
12 mm (0.50 in) as shown at (1) when thumb pressure is
exerted at center of belt span.
m
CAUTION: Due to muffler position, allow to
cool before checking or adjusting fan belt
tension.
1
I3121
FIG. 3
FIG. 4: To adjust belt tension, loosen alternator pivot bolt

and nut (1) and tensioning bracket bolt (2). Pull outward
on top of alternator to correctly tension belt and tighten
bolt first and then tighten pivot bolt.
IMPORTANT: Do not pry against alternator housing or 2
pulley. Carefully pry against alternator mounting
flange to prevent damage.
1
I3189
FIG. 4
Thermostat
FIG. 5: The thermostat is rated at 75 to 78 degrees C
(167 to 172 degrees F).
(1) Water Outlet Pipe 1
4
(2) Thermostat
2
(3) Housing Gasket 5
(4) O-ring
(5) Thermostat Housing 6
(6) Flange Bolt
3
MFC8490
FIG. 5
02b-2 4283359M1
Cooling System
RADIATOR
I-10721
FIG. 6
FIG. 6: Radiator Components

(1) Radiator
(2) Upper Hose of Radiator
(3) Drain Cock
(4) Lower Hose of Radiator
4283359M1 02b-3
Cooling System
RESERVE TANK SYSTEM
I-10722
FIG. 7
FIG. 7: Reserve Tank Components

(1) Radiator
(2) Reserve Tank (Capacity 1.1 liter (0.30 gal)
(3) Overflow Hose
02b-4 4283359M1
Cooling System
FIG. 8: Reserve Tank Description
(1) When water temperature rises
1
(2) When water temperature drops
Reserve tank play a role to keep quantity of coolant of the
main radiator be always filled up
1. When water temperature rises
When water temperature rises, internal pressure of
the radiator rises.
Coolant water flows out into reserve tank by the
pressure.
Coolant water flows out from the overflow hose when
water temperature rises.
2. When water temperature drops
When water temperature drops, internal pressure of
the radiator drops.
The internal of radiator main body become negative
pressure and coolant is drawn up from reserve tank
and comes back to the radiator main body.
3. Fill the coolant water
There is a surface between LOW and FULL of
reserve tank when it is low temperature. 2
When quantity of coolant water is lower than LOW
remarkably, confirm quantity of coolant water of
radiator.
I-10723
FIG. 8
4283359M1 02b-5
Cooling System
NOTES
02b-6 4283359M1
Fuel System
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TYPE
Use only clean diesel fuel of correct grade. Introduction of
water or dirt into fuel tank or other portion of fuel system
can cause repeated plugging of fuel filter and possible
injection pump and injector damage.
NOTE: Refer to the fuel injection system for more
detailed information on servicing the fuel system.
Fuel Filter
FIGS. 9–10: Fuel filter assembly (1) is located at right
side of engine, and is used to strain impurities from fuel
before fuel reaches injection pump. Fuel filter incorporates
valve (2) to aid in filter servicing.
Check filter bowl for accumulation of sediment or water
and clean as required.
To replace fuel filter element or clean sediment, turn fuel
valve to OFF position (handle to front).
Carefully loosen spanner nut (1). Remove nut, sediment
2 1
bowl (6) and O-ring (4). Sediment bowl can be cleaned at
this time. Pull downward on filter element (3) and discard. I3192
Examine small O-ring (5) in filter head and replace as
necessary. Install new element, pushing upward until FIG. 9
seated.
Install sediment bowl O-ring, and nut. Tighten nut and
wipe up spilled fuel.
5 4
3
6
1 I3193
FIG. 10
4283359M1 02b-7
Fuel System
Fuel Pump
9
2
3
8
6
7 4
5 MFC8507
FIG. 11
FIG. 11: Fuel Pump Components

(1) Lever
(2) Fuel Tank
(3) Fuel Pump Assembly
(4) Hose 110
(5) Ring Nut
(6) O-ring
(7) Cup
(8) Element
(9) Fuel Filter Assembly
Fuel Pump Specifications
Rated Voltage ....................................................................................................................................................................12V
Operating Current.........................................................................................................................................1.5 Amps or less
Delivery .......................................................................................................................................400 cu cm/min (0.1 gal/min)
Cutt off pressure ...........................................................................................................................................0.37 bar (5.4 psi)
02b-8 4283359M1
Fuel System
Air-Bleeding Procedure
FIGS. 12–13: Fuel system must be bled of air after the
following:
• Emptied fuel tank.
5
• Removal of fuel filter or fuel piping. 1
• Engine has not run for extended period of time, or,
engine starts and stops (or fails to start) after short
period of operation.
To bleed air from fuel systems using following procedure:
2
If engine still fails to start, pressure injection lines, 5, can
be loosened where they attach to injectors. Turn engine I3194
over several times, until fuel spurts, out then tighten lines
and stop engine. FIG. 12
• Fill fuel tank (1) until full.

• Turn fuel filter valve (2) to OPEN or ON position. 4
• Loosen filter air-bleeding screw (3) and let air bubbles
out.
• Loosen air-bleeding screw (4) for fuel injection pump 3
and let air bubbles out of the pump.
m
CAUTION: CAUTION: Fuel emitted from 2
injection lines is high pressure. Keep hands
and face away when engine is cranked.
Clean all spilled fuel following air-bleeding I3195
procedure(s). FIG. 13
Throttle Lever
FIG. 14: Hand throttle lever should remain in position
selected by operator. Through normal use, friction against
lever may decrease, causing lever to move out of selected
position. Turn adjusting nut (1) as required to retain
throttle lever in position selected.
NOTE: Throttle lever friction adjustment is accessed by
removing steering column cover and instrument
panel.
1
I3196
FIG. 14
4283359M1 02b-9
Fuel System
FUEL SYSTEM
6
5
7
2
1
d-12850
FIG. 15
FIG. 15: Fuel System

(1) Fuel filter
(2) Fuel Pump
(3) Injection Pump
(4) Fuel Return Hose
(5) Fuel Tank
(6) Fuel Cap
(7) Overflow
(8) Fuel Gage
02b-10 4283359M1
Air System
AIR SYSTEM
ENGINE AIR CLEANER

IMPORTANT: Never operate engine with air filter
removed.
FIGS. 16–18: The engine air cleaner, is located above
engine. To gain access remove right side panel.
The dust ejector (2) should be squeezed to open and 1
allow dust to drop out daily. This will reduce amount of
material which collects on main filter.
To service main filter, release retaining band (1) over air
cleaner and pull air cleaner inlet tube to rear to release it
from retaining hooks. Then turn the air cleaner out for 2
servicing.
Release clips (3) and remove element (4). Examine
element and seals for damage and brittleness. If element I3190
is damaged in any way it must be replaced.
FIG. 16
NOTE: Engine air filter has a seal ring. Fit it correctly
when installing.
Air Filter element (4) may be cleaned (if in serviceable
condition) using following procedures:
Using compressed air not to exceed 2 bar (30 psi) from
inside element, remove loose dirt, grass, chaff, etc. Be
careful not to damage element pleats with air flow.
If outer element is coated with oil or soot:
4 3
• Prepare solution of warm water and non-foaming
detergent.
I3191
• Soak element for thirty minutes.
FIG. 17
• Agitate element in solution until oil and soot are
loosened.
4
• Rinse element until rinse water is clear.
• Allow element to completely dry. Do not dry by using
compressed air or heat.
• After cleaning (or washing) element examine for pin
holes, punctures, or tears. If element paper, canister
or seal show any signs of physical damage, element
must be replaced.
NOTE: Replace element which has already been
washed five times. I3125
FIG. 18
4283359M1 02b-11
Air System
NOTES
02b-12 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Cooling System .................................................. 02b-1

Fan Belt .......................................................... 02b-2
Radiator Location ............................................ 02b-1
Thermostat ...................................................... 02b-2
Engine Air Cleaner ........................................... 02b-11
Fan Belt .............................................................. 02b-2

Fuel System
Air-Bleeding Procedure ................................... 02b-9
Fuel Filter ........................................................ 02b-7
Fuel Pump ...................................................... 02b-8
Fuel Type ........................................................ 02b-7
Throttle Lever .................................................. 02b-9
Fuel Type ........................................................... 02b-7
Reserve Tank System ........................................ 02b-4
Thermostat ......................................................... 02b-2

Throttle Lever ..................................................... 02b-9
4283359M1 02b-13
Index
02b-14 4283359M1
Contents
SERVICE MANUAL
79028571 A
03 - Major Components
OPERATION CHART
Disassembly and Assembly of Major Components ....................................................................................... 03-1
SERVICE ACCESS
Component Access ........................................................................................................................................ 03-3
Opening/Closing Hood/Side Covers ........................................................................................................ 03-3
Removing/Installing Side Covers ............................................................................................................ 03-3
REMOVAL OF FRONT AXLE

Removal of Front Axle ................................................................................................................................... 03-5
SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE FROM THE FRONT TRANSMISSION HOUSING

Separation of the Engine From the Front Transmission Housing .................................................................. 03-9
ENGINE REMOVAL
Engine Removal .......................................................................................................................................... 03-13
SEPARATION OF BELL HOUSING FROM THE FRONT TRANSMISSION HOUSING-HST ONLY

Separation of the Bell Housing From the Front Transmission Housing (Hydro Only) ................................. 03-17
SEPARATION OF FRONT TRANSMISSION CASE FROM REAR TRANSMISSION CASE

Separation of Front Transmission Case From Rear Transmission Case .................................................... 03-21
Installation of Front Transmission Case ................................................................................................ 03-29
REMOVAL OF LIFT CYLINDER CASE

Removal of Lift Cylinder Case ..................................................................................................................... 03-31
SEPARATION OF REAR AXLE FROM REAR TRANSMISSION CASE

Separation of Rear Axle From Rear Transmission Case ............................................................................. 03-35
PLATFORM
Platform Removal ........................................................................................................................................ 03-39
Platform Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 03-56
CAB
Cab Removal ............................................................................................................................................... 03-69
Cab Roof Removal ...................................................................................................................................... 03-79
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 03-80
FUEL TANK
Fuel Tank ..................................................................................................................................................... 03-81
REMOVAL OF RADIATOR
Removal of Radiator .................................................................................................................................... 03-85
CHASSIS COMPONENTS
79028571 A Rev. 03-i

Contents
Fender (Platform) ......................................................................................................................................... 03-87
Floor Mat, Steps and Floor (Platform) ................................................................................................... 03-88
Hood ...................................................................................................................................................... 03-89
Seat ....................................................................................................................................................... 03-89
Console ................................................................................................................................................. 03-90
Instrument Panel ................................................................................................................................... 03-92
ROPS .................................................................................................................................................... 03-94
Steering Column .................................................................................................................................... 03-95
Steering Wheel ...................................................................................................................................... 03-95
Three Point Linkage .............................................................................................................................. 03-96
Drawbar ....................................................................................................................................................... 03-99
Drawbar Components ......................................................................................................................... 03-100
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................... 03-101
03-ii 79028571 A Rev.

Operation Chart
OPERATION CHART
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF

MAJOR COMPONENTS
Separate At To Service
Axle Bracket Front Axle
4WD Differential Gears
4WD Final Case
Engine Flywheel
Clutch
Clutch Input Shaft
4WD Drive Shaft
Hydrostat Unit
Front Transmission Mid-PTO System
NOTE: Requires removing cab or platform. PTO Change System
Input Gears
Main Shift Gears
Range Shift Gears
4WD Shift Gears
PTO Shift Gears
Drive Pinion
Rear Transmission PTO Shaft
NOTE: Does not require removing cab or platform. Ring Gear (Differential System)
Rear Axle Differential Lock (Right Hand)
Axles
Final Reduction Gears
Brake System
Cylinder Case Control Valve
Rear PTO Shaft
Lift Arms
79028571 A Rev. 03-1

Operation Chart
NOTES
03-2 79028571 A Rev.

Service Access
SERVICE ACCESS
COMPONENT ACCESS
Opening/Closing Hood/Side Covers

FIG. 1: To release the hood, move the open/close lever
(1) in the direction shown by the arrow.’
Open the hood by lifting up the front of the hood (2).
2
1 i-9695
FIG. 1
FIG. 2: Support the hood with the stand (1).
To close, lift the hood, disengage the pin from the stand
and lower the hood. The hood is locked in place when the
lever is pressed. 1
m
CAUTION: Make sure the lock pin of the 2
stand is placed in notch (2) when opening
the hood. If the pin is not placed in notch,
hood may fall down suddenly.
i-9549
FIG. 2
Removing/Installing Side Covers

FIG. 3: The hood must be open to open a side cover (1).
Open a side cover by pulling out the upper portion. Once
a cover is open, the hood may be lowered. Open the hood
to close the cover.
Remove a side cover by slipping the cover off the two
hinges on the bottom.
When installing a side cover, place the cover on the
hinges at the bottom, and push on the top. 1
The muffler is adjacent to the left side cover. Make sure to
allow the muffler to cool before removing the side cover.
i-9545
FIG. 3
79028571 A Rev. 03-3

Service Access
NOTES
03-4 79028571 A Rev.

Removal of Front Axle

FIGS. 4–5: 4 wheel drive only - Remove bolt,(1) from the
4wd shaft shield. Loosen clamp,(2) holding telescoping
driveshaft shield tubes. Slide tubes together to expose 3
couplers and snap rings. Move snap rings and couplers
(3) towards the center of the shaft. Remove the 4wd shaft. 3
1
MFC7679
FIG. 4
I3420
FIG. 5
79028571 A Rev. 03-5

FIGS. 6–7: Raise the front of the tractor slightly with an
overhead hoist and support the front of the tractor frame
with a suitable jack stand. Put a floor jack or suitable jack
stands under the front axle. Remove the rear axle pivot
(1) and front axle pivot (2) from the front frame.
MVC-0407F
FIG. 6
MVC-0409F
FIG. 7
FIGS. 8–9: Lower the front axle enough to disconnect the
power steering lines at either the cylinders or the steering
orbitrol. Raise the front of the tractor or lower the front axle
and roll the axle out from under the tractor.
MFC7675
FIG. 8
MVC-0412F
FIG. 9
03-6 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 10: Reassembly
Install the front axle with the following precautions.
NOTE: Do not stretch the steering cylinder hoses.
Use loctite on the front axle pivot hardware and torque to
118 to 137 Nm (88 to 101 lbf ft).
Adjust front axle endplay from 0 to 0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in).
MVC-0808F
FIG. 10
79028571 A Rev. 03-7

NOTES
03-8 79028571 A Rev.

Separation of the Engine From the Front Transmission Housing
SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE FROM THE FRONT
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE FROM THE

FRONT TRANSMISSION HOUSING
FIG. 11: Remove bolt (1) from the four wheel drive shaft
shield. Loosen clamp (2) holding telescoping driveshaft
shield tubes. Slide tube together to expose couplers and
snap rings.
MFC7679
FIG. 11
FIG. 12: Move snap rings and couplers towards the
center of the shaft. Remove the four wheel drive shaft.
I3420
FIG. 12
FIG. 13: Disconnect the battery. Disconnect the light
harness. Disconnect the hood support rod assembly.(1)
Remove the cotter pins from the hinges and slide the
hood to the right.
1
N229004
FIG. 13
79028571 A Rev. 03-9

FIG. 14: Disconnect the wire harness connectors at the
engine and on the right-hand side of the fire wall.
Disconnect the mechanical or electrical tachometer cable
Turn off the fuel at the fuel filter assembly. Remove and
cap the fuel supply and fuel return lines from the injection
pump.
NOTE: The fuel tank can be removed to improve access
to the bolts at the rear of the engine, but it is not
required. See FUEL TANK in this chapter for
information on removing the fuel tank.
MVC-002F
FIG. 14
FIG. 15: Unbolt the fuel filter bracket (1) from the hood
support and lay the filter assembly to one side. The rear
hood frame (2) can be removed from both sides of the
tractor with out removing the fuel tank to improved access
if desired.
2
MVC-002F
FIG. 15
FIG. 16: Disconnect the hand throttle cable (1) and foot
throttle cable (2) from the injection pump.
MVC-005Fa
FIG. 16
FIG. 17: Drain transmission oil. Separate the hydraulic
suction line and pressure line below the main pump. 1
Remove the PTO line (not used on synchro shuttle
models) (1).
MVC-001F
FIG. 17
03-10 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 18: Hydro Only - Separate the oil cooler lines at the
fitting (1) between the front and rear lines.
1
MFC7700
FIG. 18
FIG. 19: Cab Only - Evacuate the Air Conditioning
system with an approved recovery system.
MVC-0022
FIG. 19
FIG. 20: . Separate the air conditioning lines at the
compressor, and receiver drier.
MVC-016F
FIG. 20
FIG. 21: Cab Only - It is possible to split the tractor at
the engine and front transmission with out opening up the
air conditioning system. Remove air intake tube and air
cleaner assembly. Remove radiator overflow reservoir.
Without opening the A/C lines or loosening any fittings,
remove the condenser with condenser brackets, the
receiver drier with receiver drier brackets and the
compressor with compressor brackets. Once removed, all
the components can be placed on the floor or in the cab.
006
FIG. 21
79028571 A Rev. 03-11

FIG. 22: Insert wooden wedges between the front axle
and the front frame to keep the tractor from tipping.
N229020
FIG. 22
FIG. 23: Put splitting stands under the tractor. Support
the transmission case with a suitable floor jack and the
engine with a suitable overhead hoist. Remove all the
bolts securing the engine to the front transmission.
Separate the engine from the front transmission housing
carefully.
077
FIG. 23
03-12 79028571 A Rev.

Engine Removal
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENGINE REMOVAL
FIG. 24: Drain the coolant and remove the upper and
lower radiator hoses.
N830445
FIG. 24
FIG. 25: Remove air cleaner and air cleaner intake
assembly.
N830468
FIG. 25
FIG. 26: Remove the fuel tank assembly and separate
the engine from the front transmission housing as outlined
in this section.
N830011
FIG. 26
79028571 A Rev. 03-13

Engine Removal
FIG. 27: Remove the hydraulic pump pressure lines,
suction lines, and power steering lines from both hydraulic
pumps on the right hand side of the engine.
Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the reducing valve (if
equipped) located on top of the front pump.
N830402
FIG. 27
FIG. 28: Disconnect the engine ground harness on the
front right hand side of the engine.
N830457
FIG. 28
FIG. 29: Attach a chain or straps to existing lifting
bracket (1) or other suitable lifting point to the engine.
1
N830414
FIG. 29
03-14 79028571 A Rev.

Engine Removal
FIG. 30: Remove the bolts securing the front frame to
the engine.
Slowly remove the engine.
Reassemble in reverse order with the following
precautions:
Make sure no wires or fuel lines are pinched or chaffing.
Use Loctite® on the bolts attaching the front frame to the
engine.
N830405
FIG. 30
79028571 A Rev. 03-15

Engine Removal
NOTES
03-16 79028571 A Rev.

Separation of Bell Housing From the Front Transmission Housing-HST Only
SEPARATION OF BELL HOUSING FROM THE FRONT
TRANSMISSION HOUSING-HST ONLY
SEPARATION OF THE BELL HOUSING

FROM THE FRONT TRANSMISSION
HOUSING (HYDRO ONLY)
FIG. 31: This procedure is only required on tractors
equipped with hydro transmission. Remove the cab or
platform and split the tractor behind the engine as outlined
in this section.
N229053
FIG. 31
FIG. 32: Disconnect the left-hand and right-hand brake
rods at the front brake arms, (1).
MFC7668
FIG. 32
FIG. 33: Remove the nut from the spring hook (1).
Remove the bolt (2) from the trunnion arm. Remove the
bolts (3) securing the pedal housing to the transmission
case. Rotate the pedal linkage downwards to access the 3
trunnion housing bolts.
2
1
MFC7739
FIG. 33
79028571 A Rev. 03-17

FIG. 34: Remove the trunnion housing, (1) from the
right-hand side of the transmission. 1
Remove the bolt, (2) securing the trunnion shaft to the
hydro.
2
Remove the trunnion shaft.
MFC7649
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Remove the hydrostat filter line (1) at the filter
head.
NOTE: The hydraulic lines for the optional factory
installed valve can be removed for easier access
if desired.
MFC7700
FIG. 35
FIG. 36: Disconnect the line between the bell housing
and filter and head.
NOTE: The hydro assembly will come off with the front
bell housing.
MFC7700
FIG. 36
03-18 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 37: Make sure the front transmission housing is
supported by a suitable jack stand.
Remove the hardware securing the bell housing from the
front transmission case.
Support the bell housing with a suitable lifting device and
remove the bell housing.
NOTE: The hydro assembly will come off with the bell
housing.
Assembly
Reassembly procedure for the assembly with the
following precautions: MFC7639
Install a new seal on the trunnion shaft if required. FIG. 37

Use Loctite® on the bolt securing the trunnion shaft arm.
Use Loctite® on the bolt securing the trunnion are to the
hydro.
Apply sealant between the trunnion shaft housing and
front transmission housing.
Apply sealant between the bell housing and front
transmission housing.
79028571 A Rev. 03-19

NOTES
03-20 79028571 A Rev.

Separation of Front Transmission Case From Rear Transmission Case
SEPARATION OF FRONT TRANSMISSION CASE FROM
REAR TRANSMISSION CASE
SEPARATION OF FRONT TRANSMISSION

CASE FROM REAR TRANSMISSION CASE
Cab or platform removal is not necessary to split the
tractor between the front and rear transmission cases.
Disconnect the battery and drain the transmission oil prior
to disassembly.
FIGS. 38–39: Four wheel drive only - Remove the bolt (1)
from the four wheel drive shaft shield. Loosen clamp
holding the telescoping drive shaft shield tubes. Slide 2
tubes together to expose couplers (2) and snap rings (3).
Moves snap rings and couplers towards the center of the
shaft.
Remove the four wheel drive shaft. 3
1
MFC7679
FIG. 38
I3420
FIG. 39
FIG. 40: Flip the seat forward and unhook the harness,
(1) for the seat switch. Remove the hinge pin, (2) at the
front of the seat and remove the seat.
2
MVC-9003F
FIG. 40
79028571 A Rev. 03-21

FIG. 41: Remove the bolts holding the seat pan, 1.
Remove the seat pan and seat suspension as an
assembly.
MFC7728
FIG. 41
FIG. 42: Remove the slow return knob (1).
MVC-9010F
FIG. 42
FIG. 43: Remove the slow return tube (1).
1
MVC-9007F
FIG. 43
FIG. 44: Jack up the rear of the tractor. Place both rear
axles on suitable jack stands. Remove the left-hand and
right-hand rear tires. Remove the inner fender panels.
N229022
FIG. 44
03-22 79028571 A Rev.

FIGS. 45–46: Remove the upper half of the three point
control lever. Remove the upper half of the optional rear
remote levers (if equipped) and draft control lever (if
equipped).
MVC-9008F
FIG. 45
DSC00441
FIG. 46
FIG. 47: Disconnect the joystick linkage (if equipped).
321
FIG. 47
FIG. 48: Disconnect the hoses (1) from the rear remote
valves (if equipped).
1
MVC-9007F
FIG. 48
79028571 A Rev. 03-23

FIG. 49: Remove the hydraulic suction line behind the
hydraulic filter head assembly. Remove the mid hydraulic
coupler lines (1) from the joystick valve and mid coupler
bracket (if equipped).
NOTE: Label the lines prior to disassembly to aid in
assembly.
1
MVC-009F
FIG. 49
FIG. 50: Disconnect the spring from the three point
linkage.
MVC-9016F
FIG. 50
FIG. 51: Remove the nut (1) and two bolts (2) retaining
the three point linkage bracket to the cylinder case
housing. 1
2
MVC-9016F
FIG. 51
FIG. 52: Remove the three point linkage control bracket,
(1) as an assembly.
1
MFC7686
FIG. 52
03-24 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 53: Disconnect all wire harness connections to
switches and sensors located on the rear transmission
housing.
NOTE: It is recommended that all wire harness
connections requiring separation be labeled prior
to disassembly. This will helpful during assembly.
DSC00447
FIG. 53
FIG. 54: Remove the upper half of the PTO shift lever,
range shift lever and four wheel drive shift lever (if
equipped).
DSC00433
FIG. 54
FIG. 55: Remove the lower range shift lever (1)
connected to the range shift arm. 1
MFC7659
FIG. 55
79028571 A Rev. 03-25

FIG. 56: Remove the lower PTO lever (1) connected to
the PTO shift arm.
MFC7662
FIG. 56
FIG. 57: Remove the lower four wheel drive shift lever,
(1), connected to the four wheel drive shift arm (if
equipped).
MFC7661
FIG. 57
FIG. 58: Remove the range lever, PTO lever and four
wheel drive lever support bracket (1) and remaining shift
linkage as an assembly
1
MFC7662
FIG. 58
FIG. 59: Powershuttle and synchro shuttle only -
Remove the bolts securing the main transmission lever
housing to the rear transmission. Remove the lever and
housing as an assembly.
MFC7658
FIG. 59
03-26 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 60: On HST models only, remove the upper portion
of the hydro pedal (1).
1
MFC7739
FIG. 60
FIG. 61: On the HST models only, Disconnect the cruise
control cables (1).
1
MFC7740
FIG. 61
FIG. 62: Disconnect the left-hand and right-hand brake
rods at the rear brake arms.
MVC-7010F
FIG. 62
FIG. 63: Also disconnect the linkage (1) to the diff lock
engagement arm.
MVC-7011F
FIG. 63
79028571 A Rev. 03-27

FIG. 64: Loosen the bolt (1) in the center of the front cab
mount or platform mount bolts until only a few threads are
engaging the nut.
NOTE: Cab models - Lift up the floor mat to expose the
front cab mount bolts.
mfc7011
MVC-7009F
FIG. 64
FIG. 65: Remove the bolt (1) in the center of the rear cab
mounts or platform mounts. On platform tractors, insert
lifting straps through the handrails located on the fenders.
On cab tractors insert lifting strap through the hooks at the
rear upper corners of the cab. Use an overhead hoist to
support the rear of the platform or cab.
DSCN4294
DSCN4294
FIG. 65
FIG. 66: Insert wooden wedges between the front axle
and the front frame to keep the tractor from tipping. Use
splitting stands to support the front and rear transmission
housings. Remove all the bolts securing the front
transmission housing to the rear transmission housing
and carefully separate the housings.
N229020
FIG. 66
FIG. 67: Four wheel drive only - After separating the rear
transmission, remove the seal, snap ring and bearing, (1),
from the front transmission housing. This will aid in
reassembly. Install them after the transmission is bottleed
back together.
MFC7646
FIG. 67
03-28 79028571 A Rev.

Installation of Front Transmission Case

IMPORTANT: Before beginning the installation process
please read all of the following instructions.
Assemble in reverse order of assembly with the following
precauctions.
• Do not pinch any wires. Make sure the wires will not
chaff against other objects.
• Align the hydraulic control levers and all other shift
linkage while lowering the cab.
• Powershuttle and synchro shuttle only - Make sure
the main transmission shift lever engages the shift
forks.
• Apply sealant between all cast housings.
• Torque cab/platform mount bolts to 88 to 107 Nm (65
to 79 lbf ft).
• Replace any seals that have been removed with new
parts.
79028571 A Rev. 03-29

NOTES
03-30 79028571 A Rev.

Removal of Lift Cylinder Case

NOTE: The procedure to remove the cylinder case is the
same for cab and platform tractors.
FIG. 68: Remove SMV sign and top three point link from
the rear of the tractor.
MVC-9005F
FIG. 68
FIG. 69: Flip the seat forward and unhook the harness
for the seat switch.
Remove the hinge pin at the front of the seat and remove
the seat.
MVC-9003F
FIG. 69
FIG. 70: Remove the bolts holding the seat pan.
assembly.
MFC7728
FIG. 70
79028571 A Rev. 03-31

FIG. 71: Remove the slow return knob, (1) and slow
return knob tube, (2).
2
1
MVC-9010F
FIG. 71
FIG. 72: Jack up the rear of the tractor.
Place both rear axles on suitable jack stands.
Remove the left hand and right hand rear tires.
Remove the inner fender panels.
N229022
FIG. 72
FIG. 73: Remove the upper half of the three point control
lever.
Remove the upper half of the optional rear remote levers
and draft control lever (if equiped).
MVC-9008F
FIG. 73
FIG. 74: Disconnect the hoses (1) from the rear remote
valves (if equipped). 1
NOTE: Label the hoses prior to disassembly to aid in
assembly.
MVC-9007F
FIG. 74
03-32 79028571 A Rev.

FIG. 75: Disconnect the levers from the rear remote
valve slices (if equipped).
Remove the rear remote valve slices (if equipped).
MVC-9009F
FIG. 75
FIG. 76: Remove the rear remote coupler brackets and
remove the rear remote hoses (if equipped).
MVC-9011F
FIG. 76
FIG. 77: Remove the top link plate (1) and PTO shield.
1
MFC7709
FIG. 77
FIG. 78: Remove the three point supply line (1) and
auxillary lift cylinder supply hose (2).
Remove line clamp.
1
MVC-9007F
FIG. 78
79028571 A Rev. 03-33

FIG. 79: Remove the hardware securing the left hand
and right hand lift linkage (1) to the lift arms.
Remove the hardware upper and lower hardware
securing the auxillary lift cylinder and remove lift cylinder
(2).
1
2
MVC-9012F
FIG. 79
FIG. 80: Disconnect the spring from the three point
linkage.
MVC-9016F
FIG. 80
FIG. 81: Remove the nut (1) and two bolts (2)retaining
the three point linkage bracket to the cylinder case
housing.
Remove the three point linkage control assembly.
1
MVC-9016F
FIG. 81
FIG. 82: Remove the bolts retaining the cylinder case to
the rear housing. Remove the lift cylinder case assembly.
MFC7686
FIG. 82
03-34 79028571 A Rev.

Separation of Rear Axle From Rear Transmission Case
SEPARATION OF REAR AXLE FROM REAR
TRANSMISSION CASE
SEPARATION OF REAR AXLE FROM

REAR TRANSMISSION CASE
Cab or platform removal is not necessary to remove the
rear axle from the rear transmission. Disconnect the
battery and drain the transmission oil prior to disassembly.
FIG. 83: Remove the drain plug (1) and drain the oil out
of the axle housing to be removed.
1
MVC-1012F
FIG. 83
FIG. 84: Raise the rear of the tractor. Put the rear
transmission housing and remaining axle on suitable jack
stands. Remove the appropriate left-hand and right-hand
rear tire. Remove the inner fender panel.
N229022
FIG. 84
FIG. 85: Left-hand side only - Disconnect the brake rod
at the rear brake arm.
MVC-7010F
FIG. 85
79028571 A Rev. 03-35

FIG. 86: Right-hand side only - Disconnect the brake rod
at the rear brake arm. Also disconnect the linkage, (1), to
the diff lock engagement arm. 1
MVC-7011F
FIG. 86
FIG. 87: Remove the sway bar and the lower 3 point
arms.
NOTE: Left-hand side only - The retaining pin, (1), for the
lower 3 point arm also retains the bottom of the
lift assist cylinder.
1
MVC-1011F
FIG. 87
FIG. 88: Cab only - Remove the appropriate axle bracket
(1) from the axle housing.
NOTE: If both axles are being removed at the same time, 1
insert lifting straps at the rear upper corners of
the cab and support the rear of the cab with a
suitable overhead hoist.
MFC7730
FIG. 88
03-36 79028571 A Rev.

FIGS. 89–90: Platform only - Insert lifting straps thru the
handle on the fenders. Support the rear of the platform
with a suitable overhead hoist and remove the ROPS
structure from the rear axle housing.
MVC-1009F
FIG. 89
MFC7772
FIG. 90
FIG. 91: Remove the bolts securing the outer axle
housing to the inner axle housing. Remove the outer axle
housing and rear axle as an assembly.
N229087
FIG. 91
FIGS. 92–93: Remove the hardware supporting the inner
axle housing to the rear transmission. Some of the
retaining bolts (1) are located inside the inner housing.
N229089
FIG. 92
79028571 A Rev. 03-37

FIG. 93: Assembly
Install the axle housings in reverse order of disassembly
with the following precautions:
NOTE: Apply sealant between all cast housings.
NOTE: Torque cab/platform mount bolts to 88 to 107 Nm
(65 to 79 lbf ft).
N229091
FIG. 93
03-38 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
PLATFORM
PLATFORM REMOVAL
FIG. 94: Pull hood release latch
NOTE: Platform removal is only necessary to service the
contents located in the front transmission
housing or spacer housing (hydro only). It is not
required to remove the platform when servicing
the clutch, when splitting the tractor between the
front and the rear housing, when removing the
axle housing or when removing the lift arm
housing.
N229001
FIG. 94
FIG. 95: Disconnect the negative battery cable.
N229005
FIG. 95
FIG. 96: Open the hood and remove the engine side
panel.
N229002
FIG. 96
79028571 A Rev. 03-39

Platform
FIG. 97: Disconnect wiring harness from head lamp.
Disconnect the harness from the clamps.
N229003
FIG. 97
FIG. 98: Remove hood support and disconnect the clips
from hood hinge. Slide the hood to the right and remove
the hood.
N229004
FIG. 98
FIG. 99: Remove the slow return knob screw.
N229006
FIG. 99
FIG. 100: Remove the knob.
N229007
FIG. 100
03-40 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIGS. 101–102: Disconnect turnbuckle on the right-hand
brake rod.
N229008
FIG. 101
N229009
FIG. 102
79028571 A Rev. 03-41

Platform
FIGS. 103–104: Disconnect turnbuckle of the left-hand
brake and clutch rod.
N229010
FIG. 103
N229011
FIG. 104
03-42 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 105: Remove the seat assembly.
N229012
FIG. 105
FIGS. 106–107: Remove the upper half of the PTO,
4WD, and Range shift levers.
N229013
FIG. 106
N229014
FIG. 107
FIG. 108: Remove the bolt connecting the main gear
shift lever.
N229015
FIG. 108
79028571 A Rev. 03-43

Platform
FIG. 109: Remove the upper half of the position control,
factory joystick, draft control, and auxillary remote levers.
N229016
FIG. 109
FIG. 110: Disconnect tail light connectors
N229017
FIG. 110
FIGS. 111–112: Remove the bolts securing the ROPS.
Remove ROPS.
N229018
FIG. 111
N229019
FIG. 112
03-44 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 113: Support the rear axle.
Remove both rear tires.
N229021
FIG. 113
FIG. 114: Remove inner fender panels.
N229022
FIG. 114
FIGS. 115–116: Remove the cotter pin (1) at the end of
the diff lock pedal.
Disconnect linkage for the differential lock.
N229023
FIG. 115
N229024
FIG. 116
79028571 A Rev. 03-45

Platform
FIG. 117: Remove the cotter pin and disconnect
accelerator pedal from the linkage.
N229025
FIG. 117
FIG. 118: Remove the cotter pin and loosen nuts at the
end of the trhrottle cable.
Disconnect the throttle cable for the foot accelerator.
N229026
FIG. 118
03-46 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIGS. 119–120: Remove the bolts (1) from the hood
support.
N229027
FIG. 119
N229028
FIG. 120
79028571 A Rev. 03-47

Platform
FIGS. 121–122: Remove bolt for the fuel tank support.
N229029
FIG. 121
N229030
FIG. 122
FIG. 123: Remove the bolts for the front fuel tank
support.
N229031
FIG. 123
03-48 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIGS. 124–125: Remove the fuel tank bolts.
N229032
FIG. 124
N229033
FIG. 125
FIGS. 126–127: Disconnect fuel gauge sensor wires.
N229034
FIG. 126
N229035
FIG. 127
79028571 A Rev. 03-49

Platform
FIG. 128: Disconnect tachometer cable from the engine.
Remove cable from engine compartment.
N229036
FIG. 128
FIG. 129: Disconnect hand throttle cable (inner cable)
from the engine.
N229037
FIG. 129
FIG. 130: Remove the steering shaft bolt from the U
joint.
Disconnect the steering shaft (1).
NOTE: The steering shaft will separate from the U-joint
as the platform is removed. 1
N229038
FIG. 130
03-50 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIGS. 131–132: Disconnect the ground cable (1) from
the front of the tractor.
N229040
FIG. 131
N229041
FIG. 132
FIG. 133: Disconnect glow plug, engine shutoff solenoid,
oil pressure, coolant sensor, and fuel pump electrical
connectors.
N229042
FIG. 133
FIG. 134: Disconnect the nylon clamps (1) securing the
right hand wire harness to the rear fender.
1
1
N229043
FIG. 134
79028571 A Rev. 03-51

Platform
FIGS. 135–136: Hydro models only-Remove the upper
half of the HST pedal, (1), and disconnect the cruise
control cable, (2).
1
MFC7739
FIG. 135
1
MFC7740
FIG. 136
FIG. 137: Disconnect the nylon clamps (1) securing the
left hand wire harness to the rear fender.
N229044
FIG. 137
03-52 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 138: Disconnect the nylon clamps (1) under the
platform on the left hand side.
Pull harness through to the front of the platform and fold it
up on to the platform.
1 1
N229045
FIG. 138
FIG. 139: Disconnect the nylon clamp (1) under the
platform on the right hand side.
Pull harness through to the front of the platform and fold it
up on to the platform.
N229046
FIG. 139
FIG. 140: Remove retaining pin to disengage the
mechanical shuttle cable (Synchro shuttle only).
d-13067
FIG. 140
79028571 A Rev. 03-53

Platform
FIGS. 141–142: Disconnect the harness connectors for
the alternator.
N229047
FIG. 141
N229048
FIG. 142
FIG. 143: Disconnect the harness connectors for the
starter.
N229049
FIG. 143
FIG. 144: Route the starter wiring harness back and lay
the harness on top of the platform.
N229050
FIG. 144
03-54 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 145: Remove the front and rear platform isolator
bolts (1) and nuts (2).
2
N229051
FIG. 145
FIGS. 146–147: Attach a lifting strap to both fender
mounted handrails.
Raise the platform slowly, noting the wire harness will be
raising with the platform.
Keep the platform level and free from binding on the
transmission linkage. The fuel tank will have to be shifted
when first starting the lifting process.
N229052
FIG. 146
N229053
FIG. 147
FIG. 148: Place the platform assembly on the floor using
suitable jack stands for support at the rear.
N229054
FIG. 148
79028571 A Rev. 03-55

Platform
PLATFORM INSTALLATION
FIG. 149: Attach a lifting strap to both fender mounted
handrails.
Lift the platform off of the supports.
N229054
FIG. 149
FIGS. 150–151: Keep the platform level and free from
binding on the transmission linkage.
Lower the platform slowly, noting the wiring harness and
levers.
NOTE: Do NOT to pinch wires.
Do NOT pinch fuel lines.
Torque platform mounting bolts to 88 to 107 Nm
(65 to 79 lbf ft)
N229052
FIG. 150
N229053
FIG. 151
03-56 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 152: Install the front and rear platform isolator bolts
(1) and nuts (2).
2
N229051
FIG. 152
FIG. 153: Connect the connectors for the starter.
N229049
FIG. 153
FIGS. 154–155: Connect the connectors for the
alternator.
N229047
FIG. 154
N229048
FIG. 155
79028571 A Rev. 03-57

Platform
FIG. 156: Connect the nylon clamp (1) under the
platform on the right hand side.
N229046
FIG. 156
FIG. 157: Pull harness through to the front of the
platform and fold it up on to the platform.
Connect the nylon clamps (1) under the platform on the
left hand side.
1 1
N229045
FIG. 157
FIG. 158: Connect the nylon clamps (1) securing the left
hand wire harness to the rear fender.
1
1
N229044
FIG. 158
03-58 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 159: Connect the nylon clamps (1) securing the
right hand wire harness to the rear fender.
1
1
N229043
FIG. 159
FIG. 160: Connect glow plug, engine shutoff solenoid, oil
pressure, coolant sensor, and fuel pump electrical
connectors.
N229042
FIG. 160
FIG. 161: Connect the ground cable (1).
N229040
FIG. 161
FIG. 162: Align steering shaft while lowering platform
into position.
Install the steering shaft.
Install the steering shaft bolt.
1
N229038
FIG. 162
79028571 A Rev. 03-59

Platform
FIG. 163: Connect hand throttle cable (inner cable) to
the engine.
N229037
FIG. 163
FIG. 164: Install tachometer cable to engine
compartment.
Connect tachometer cable to the engine.
N229036
FIG. 164
FIG. 165: Connect fuel sensor wires.
N229034
FIG. 165
FIG. 166: Install the fuel tank bolts.
N229032
FIG. 166
03-60 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 167: Install the bolts for the front fuel tank support.
N229031
FIG. 167
FIG. 168: Install bolt for the fuel tank support.
N229029
FIG. 168
79028571 A Rev. 03-61

Platform
FIGS. 169–170: Install the bolts (1) from the hood
support.
N229027
FIG. 169
N229028
FIG. 170
03-62 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 171: Connect the throttle cable for the foot
accelerator.
Install the cotter pin and tighten nuts.
N229026
FIG. 171
FIG. 172: Install the accelerator pedal.
Install cotter pin.
N229025
FIG. 172
FIG. 173: Connect linkage for the differential lock.
Install the cotter pin (1).
N229023
FIG. 173
FIG. 174: Install inner fender panels.
N229022
FIG. 174
79028571 A Rev. 03-63

Platform
FIG. 175: Install rear tires.
N229021
FIG. 175
FIG. 177: Install the bolts securing the ROPS.
Torque the ROPS to 250 Nm (190 ft lbs).
N229018
FIG. 176
N229019
FIG. 177
FIG. 178: Connect tail light connectors.
N229017
FIG. 178
03-64 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 179: Install the position control, factory joystick,
draft control, and auxiliary remote levers.
N229016
FIG. 179
FIG. 180: Install the bolt connecting the main gear shift
lever.
N229015
FIG. 180
FIG. 181: Install the PTO, 4WD, and Range shift levers.
N229013
FIG. 181
FIG. 182: Install the seat assembly.
DSC_7007
FIG. 182
79028571 A Rev. 03-65

Platform
FIG. 183: Connect turnbuckle of the left-hand brake and
clutch rod.
N229011
FIG. 183
FIG. 184: Connect turnbuckle on the right-hand brake
rod.
Adjust clutch pedal and brake pedal freeplay.
N229008
FIG. 184
FIG. 185: Install the slow return knob screw.
N229006
FIG. 185
03-66 79028571 A Rev.

Platform
FIG. 186: Connect the negative battery cable.
N229005
FIG. 186
FIG. 187: Install hood support and connect the clips
from hood hinge.
N229004
FIG. 187
FIG. 188: Connect wiring harness from head lamp.
Connect the clamps.
N229003
FIG. 188
FIG. 189: Install the engine side panels.
N229002
FIG. 189
79028571 A Rev. 03-67

Platform
NOTES
03-68 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
CAB
CAB REMOVAL
Cab removal is only necessary to service the contents
located inside the front transmission housing or between
the spacer housing and front transmission (Hydro only). It
is not required to remove the cab when splitting between
the engine and front transmission, between the front
transmission and the rear housing, between the axle and
the rear housing or between the cylinder case housing
and the rear housing.
FIG. 190: Disconnect the battery. Drain engine coolant.
DSC00445
FIG. 190
FIG. 191: Raise hood and remove engine side panels.
Disconnect the light harness. Disconnect the hood
support rod assembly (1). Remove the cotter pins from
the hinges, (2) and slide the hood to the right. Remove 2
the hood. 1
N229004
FIG. 191
FIG. 192: Disconnect the foot throttle and hand throttle
cables from the injection pump.
DSC00452
DSC00452
FIG. 192
79028571 A Rev. 03-69

Cab
FIG. 193: Unbolt the fuel filter bracket (1) from the hood
support and lay the filter assembly to one side. Remove
the rear hood frame (2) with out removing the fuel tank.
2
MVC-002F
FIG. 193
FIG. 194: Jack up the rear of the tractor and support the
rear of the tractor with suitable jack stands. Remove both
rear tires.
N229021
FIG. 194
FIG. 195: Remove the inner fender panels.
N229022
FIG. 195
03-70 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
FIGS. 196–198: Disconnect the linkage for the diff lock
pedal (1). Remove the 3 point slow return knob and shaft
(2). Remove the locking bolt on the tube and tube to 1
remove shaft.
MVC-031F
FIG. 196
N229023
FIG. 197
321
I-12147
FIG. 198
79028571 A Rev. 03-71

Cab
FIGS. 199–200: Remove the upper half of the PTO shift
lever, range shift lever, transmission lever, 4 wheel drive
shift lever, 3 point lever, draft control lever (if equipped)
and hydraulic levers (if equipped).
DSC00433
FIG. 199
DSC00441
FIG. 200
FIG. 201: Remove the seals and seal plates at the base
of the levers on the left-hand side of the cab.
MVC-033F
FIG. 201
FIG. 202: Remove the foam seal and seal plate at base
of the hydraulic levers on the right-hand side of the cab.
The plate is held in place with plastic plugs which can
carefully be removed and reused.
MVC-035F
FIG. 202
03-72 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
FIG. 203: Disconnect the joystick linkage (if equipped).
321
FIG. 203
FIGS. 204–205: Separate the clutch pedal linkage at the
turnbuckle below the clutch pedal. Repeat the process for
the left-hand brake pedal linkage.
DSC00453
FIG. 204
N229011
FIG. 205
79028571 A Rev. 03-73

Cab
FIG. 206: Separate the right-hand brake pedal linkage
below the turnbuckle.
MVC-042F
FIG. 206
MFC7739
FIG. 207
FIG. 207: On HST models only, remove the upper

portion of the hydro pedal (1).
03-74 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
MFC7740
FIG. 208
FIG. 208: Remove the cruise control cable (1).

FIG. 209: Disconnect the wire harnesses below the cab
for the PTO, safety start switches, cab harness, power
shuttle (if equipped) and electronic transmission (if
equipped).
to disassembly. This will greatly reduce the
amount of time required for assembly.
DSC00448
FIG. 209
FIG. 210: Disconnect all engine wire harness
connections, including ground wires.
to disassembly. This will greatly reduce the
amount of time required for assembly.
DSC00469
FIG. 210
79028571 A Rev. 03-75

Cab
FIGS. 211–212: Evacuate the Air Conditioning system
with an approved recovery system. Separate the front air
conditioning line at the compressor, (1), and separate the
air conditioning line at the receiver drier, (2).
MVC-0022
FIG. 211
MVC-016F
FIG. 212
FIG. 213: It is possible to remove the cab with out
opening up the air conditioning system. Remove air intake
tube and air cleaner assembly. Remove radiator overflow
reservoir. Without opening the lines or loosening any
fittings, remove the condenser with condenser brackets,
the receiver drier with receiver drier brackets and the
compressor with compressor brackets. Once removed, all
the components can be placed on the floor or in the cab.
006
FIG. 213
03-76 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
FIGS. 214–215: Disconnect the steering column at the
U-joint, (1), by removing the bolt.
MVC-013F
FIG. 214
N229038
FIG. 215
FIG. 216: Remove the screws around the inside
perimeter of the cab roof.
DSC00411
FIG. 216
FIG. 217: Remove the screws from the hinged cab air
filter access panel at the rear of the cab. Disconnect the
cab light harnesses. Remove the cab roof.
NOTE: There is a replaceable adhesive strip in the
center of the roof.
MVC-019F
FIG. 217
79028571 A Rev. 03-77

Cab
FIGS. 218–219: Lift up the floor mat to expose the front
cab mount bolts. Remove the bolt from the center of the
front cab mounts.
DSC00464
FIG. 218
IMG_0013
FIG. 219
FIG. 220: Remove the bolt (1) in the center of the rear
cab mounts.
DSCN4294
FIG. 220
03-78 79028571 A Rev.

Cab
FIG. 221: Attach straps to each of the four corners of the
cab. Slowly raise the cab with a suitable overhead hoist
making sure all wire harnesses and linkages are free.
Reinstall the cab in reverse order of disassembly with the
following precautions:
IMPORTANT: Do not pinch any wires or fuel lines. Make
sure the wires and fuel lines will not chaff against
other objects.
IMPORTANT: Align the steering column, brake pedal
linkage, clutch linkage, hydraulic control levers
and all other shift linkage while lowering the cab.
IMPORTANT: Use Loctite on the steering column DSCN4273
retaining bolt. FIG. 221
IMPORTANT: Apply adhesive to the existing strip in the
center of the cab roof or replace the strip.
IMPORTANT: Adjust clutch pedal free play and brake
linkage.
IMPORTANT: Torque cab mount bolts to 88 to 107 Nm
(65 to 79 lbf ft).
CAB ROOF REMOVAL

Refer to the cab section of this manual for information on
removing the cab headliner and A/C and heater
assembly.
FIG. 222: Remove metal phillips head sheet metal
screws from inside the perimeter of the cab.
DSC00411
FIG. 222
FIG. 223: Remove the screws from the hinged cab air
filter access panel at the rear of the cab. Disconnect the
cab light harnesses. Remove the cab roof.
NOTE: The front of the cab roof can be propped in the
raised position, using the air filter panel as a
hinge as long as the air filter panel hardware is
not removed.
MVC-019F
FIG. 223
79028571 A Rev. 03-79

Cab
Assembly
Assemble in the reverse order.
NOTE: Install new two sided adhesive foam strip (p/n
6243329M1) to top of headliner or bottom of cab
roof. Press up on center of headliner after
installing roof to make sure the adhesive is
securely fastened to the headliner and roof.
03-80 79028571 A Rev.

Fuel Tank
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
FIG. 224: Disconnect the fuel hose at the electric fuel
pump and drain the fuel tank.
MVC-002F
FIG. 224
FIG. 225: Remove the muffler to access the fuel tank.
IMG_0281
FIG. 225
FIG. 226: Cab tractors only: remove bracket (1) in front
of the fuel tank heat shield.
IMG_0293
FIG. 226
79028571 A Rev. 03-81

Fuel Tank
FIG. 227: Platform tractors only: remove the support
bracket (1) in front of the fuel tank heat shield.
MVC-0028
FIG. 227
FIG. 228: Remove the bracket over the rear of the fuel
tank.
IMG_0277
FIG. 228
FIG. 229: Remove hardware securing the fuel tank.
IMG_0279
FIG. 229
FIG. 230: Disconnect wires going to the fuel tank
sending unit.
N229034
FIG. 230
03-82 79028571 A Rev.

Fuel Tank
FIGS. 231–232: Remove the fuel tank and heat shield as
an assembly.
007
FIG. 231
019
FIG. 232
79028571 A Rev. 03-83

Fuel Tank
NOTES
03-84 79028571 A Rev.

Removal of Radiator
REMOVAL OF RADIATOR
REMOVAL OF RADIATOR
FIG. 233: Drain coolant.
N830445
FIG. 233
FIG. 234: Remove the front bolt from the left hand and
right hand side bars (1).
Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses.
Disconnect the rain hose and overflow hose.
N830801
FIG. 234
FIG. 235: Remove the hardware (1) from the top and
bottom of the fan shroud.
Slide the shroud back.
N830803
FIG. 235
79028571 A Rev. 03-85

Removal of Radiator
FIG. 236: Remove the nuts (1) at the top of the radiator.
N830804
FIG. 236
FIG. 237: Lift the radiator off the supports at the bottom
of the radiator.
Reinstall the radiator in reverse order with the following
precautions:
Make sure all insulators and seals are in good condition.
Make sure hoses are in good condition and hose clamps
are tightened.
N830805
FIG. 237
03-86 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
CHASSIS COMPONENTS
FENDER (PLATFORM)
FIG. 238: Securely block the appropriate rear axle and
remove the wheel. Remove the inner fender panel.
N229022
FIG. 238
FIGS. 239–240: Remove the upper half of the shift levers
and/or hydraulic levers from the appropriate side.
N229014
FIG. 239
N229015
FIG. 240
79028571 A Rev. 03-87

Chassis Components
MFC7724
FIG. 241
FIG. 241: Remove hardware securing fender.

Assemble in reverse order to put the fender back together.
Floor Mat, Steps and Floor (Platform)
2
2
2
2
MFC7735
FIG. 242
FIG. 242: Remove screws securing floor mat (1) and

remove floor mat. Remove hardware securing left-hand or
right-hand platform (2) to platform frame.
In order to put the floor mat and steps back together,
assemble in reverse order.
03-88 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
Hood
FIG. 243: Raise hood and remove engine side panels.
Disconnect the head light harness. Disconnect the hood
support rod assembly. Remove the cotter pins from the
hinges and slide the hood to the right. Remove hood.
Assemble in Reverse Order.
N229004
FIG. 243
Seat
FIG. 244: Flip the seat forward and unhook the harness
for the seat switch. Remove the hinge pin at the front of
the seat and remove the seat.
MVC-9003F
FIG. 244
FIG. 245: Remove the bolts holding the seat pan, (1).
assembly.
Assemble in reverse order.
MFC7728
FIG. 245
79028571 A Rev. 03-89

Chassis Components
Console
1
1
MFC7734
FIG. 246
FIG. 246: Remove the screws securing the console to

the fire wall. To remove the plastic rivets (1) securing the
sides of the console to the fire wall. Press in on the center
of the rivet to remove rivets.
03-90 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
4
3
MFC7758
FIG. 247
FIG. 247: Once the outer console is removed, the inner

console (1) that supports the ignition switch (2) light
switch (3) and PTO switch (4) can be removed.
Assemble in reverse order.
79028571 A Rev. 03-91

Chassis Components
Instrument Panel
MFC7764
FIG. 248
FIG. 248: Cab tractors only - Remove the console.

Remove the hardware securing the instrument panel to
the fire wall. Disconnect the wire harnesses behind the
instrument panel.
03-92 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
MFC7763
FIG. 249
FIG. 249: Platform tractors only - Remove the console.

Remove the hardware securing the instrument panel and
spacer (1) to the fire wall. Disconnect the wire harnesses
and tachometer cable behind the instrument panel.
Assemble it in reverse order.
79028571 A Rev. 03-93

Chassis Components
ROPS
MFC7772
FIG. 250
FIG. 250: Remove hardware as required to assemble

the ROPS structure. Assemble in reverse order. Torque
value for the M14 bolts is 250 Nm (185 lbf ft). Adjust the
pivot bolt, (1), to reduce vibration when the ROPS is in the
upright position.
m
WARNING: Never weld on or drill into any
portion of the ROPS structure. This will
compromise the integrity of the ROPS.
03-94 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
Steering Column
FIGS. 251–252: Remove the front and rear steering
column covers. Remove the console. To remove the
column assembly, (1), remove the retaining plate, (2),
securing the column to the fire wall and the retaining bolt, 3
(3), from the upper u-joint. To separate the steering
shafts, remove the retaining bolts from the appropriate
u-joint.
Assemble in reverse order to put steering column back
together.
2
1
MFC7671
FIG. 251
MFC7672
FIG. 252
Steering Wheel
FIG. 253: Gently pry off the steering wheel cap (1) from
the steering wheel. Remove the cotter pin (2) castle nut
(3) and flat washer (4). Remove the steering wheel.
Assemble the steering wheel in the reverse order. 1
3 2
4
MFC7671
FIG. 253
79028571 A Rev. 03-95

Chassis Components
Three Point Linkage
1
3
I-6703
FIG. 254
FIG. 254: The lift linkage consists of several major

components.
(1) Lowing Links
(2) Lift Rods
(3) Stabilizer
(4) Top Link
03-96 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
MFC7705
FIG. 255
FIG. 255: Lift Linkage Parts
MFC7708
FIG. 256
FIG. 256: Lift rods
79028571 A Rev. 03-97

Chassis Components
FIG. 257: The linkage provides four positions of
adjustment. Select the top hole (1) for heavy implements.
For most implements, securing the top link to the second
hole (2) is satisfactory. The lower holes (3) and (4) are 1
selected for an implement that is used high off the ground.
2
3
i-9081
FIG. 257
i-9069a
FIG. 258
FIG. 258: The lift rods (1) also have multiple positions.
Normally the lower hole (2) is used. The upper hole (3)
will provide increased lift height and reduced depth.
03-98 79028571 A Rev.

Chassis Components
DRAWBAR
1 2
B A
3
E
I-10927
FIG. 259
FIG. 259: Drawbar

(1) Chain Hook (ASAE)
(2) Drawbar (ASAE)
(3) Drawbar Bracket
(A) 26 mm (1.02 in) Diameter
(B) 102 mm (4.02 in)
(C) 350 mm (13.8 in)
(D) 204 mm (8.03 in)
(E) Ground Clearance AG13.6-24 380mm (specified
value:330 ~500mm)
79028571 A Rev. 03-99

Chassis Components
Drawbar Components
1
2
MFC7710
FIG. 260
FIG. 260: Tighten bolt (1) and jam nut (2) to prevent
drawbar vibration.
03-100 79028571 A Rev.

Index
INDEX
Numerics Separation of Bell Housing From the

Front Transmission Housing-HST Only .............. 03-17
3 Point Linkage .................................................. 03-96 Separation of Front Transmission
Case From Rear Transmission Case ................ 03-21
Separation of rear Axle From Rear
C Transmission Case ............................................. 03-35
Separation of the Bell Housing From the Front
Cab removal ....................................................... 03-69 Transmission Housing (Hydro Only) .................. 03-17
Chassis Components ......................................... 03-87 Separation of the Engine from the Front
Component Access .............................................. 03-3 Transmission Housing .......................................... 03-9
Service Access ..................................................... 03-3
Opening/Closing Hood/Side Covers ................. 03-3
D Removing/Installing Side Covers ...................... 03-3
Steering Wheel ................................................... 03-95
Disassembly and Assembly of Major Components ......
03-1
Engine Removal ................................................. 03-13
Fender (Platform) ............................................... 03-87

Floor Mat, Steps and Floor (Platform) ................ 03-88
Fuel Tank ........................................................... 03-81
Installation of Front transmission Case .............. 03-29

Instrument Panel ................................................ 03-92
Opening/Closing Hood/Side Covers .................... 03-3

Operation Chart ................................................... 03-1
Platform Installation ........................................... 03-56

Platform Removal .............................................. 03-39
Removal of Front Axle ......................................... 03-5

Removal of Lift Cylinder Case ........................... 03-31
Removal of Radiator .......................................... 03-85
Removing/Installing Side Covers ......................... 03-3
ROPS ................................................................. 03-94
Seat .................................................................... 03-89
79028571 A Rev. 03-101

Index
NOTES
03-102 79028571 A Rev.

Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
04 - Clutch
Contents
CONSTRUCTION
Transmission Clutch ...................................................................................................................................... 04-1
Clutch System ................................................................................................................................................ 04-3
Clutch Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 04-3
Inspection of Clutch Disc ......................................................................................................................... 04-5
Inspection of Clutch Cover Assembly ...................................................................................................... 04-6
Precautions for Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 04-6
Clutch Assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 04-6
RELEASE BEARING
Release Bearing ............................................................................................................................................ 04-9
Removal .................................................................................................................................................. 04-9
Inspection ................................................................................................................................................ 04-9
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 04-9
CLUTCH CROSS SHAFT

Removal and Installation ............................................................................................................................. 04-11
Disassembly .......................................................................................................................................... 04-11
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 04-12
Clutch Free-Play Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 04-13
CLUTCH HOUSING PLUG

Removal ....................................................................................................................................................... 04-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................... 04-17
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 04-19
4283359M1 04-i
Contents
NOTES
04-ii 4283359M1
Construction
CONSTRUCTION
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH
A D
C E
D-14045
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: Clutch Demensions
Clutch Specifications
Clutch Thickness (A)............................................................................................................................. 8.0 mm (0.37 in)
Wear In (B)..................................................................................................................... 1.3 to 1.9 mm (0.05 to 0.07 in)
Clutch Release Lever Height (C) .............................................................................. 37.8 to 39.8 mm (1.49 to 1.57 in)
Max Lever Stroke (D)............................................................................................................................... 9 mm (0.35 in)
Throw out Bearing To Diagram Finger Clearance (E)........................................................................... 2.2 mm (.09 in)
Clutch Plate (F)................................................................................................................................... 240 mm (9.45 in)
Clutch Material.................................................................................................................................................... Organic
Pressure Plate Type ..................................................................................................................................... Diaphragm
Pressure Plate Clamp Load ............................................................................................................... 5688 N (1279 lbf)
Torque Specifications
Clutch Cover to Flywheel............................................................................................. 23.5 to 30.4 Nm (18 to 22 lbf ft)
Flywheel to Crankshaft.............................................................................................. 89.2 to 104.9 Nm (66 to 77 lbf ft)
4283359M1 04-1
Construction
Flywheel Dimensions
Flywheel Step Dimension................................................................................................................... 2.2 mm (0.087 in)
Palm to Friction Face ................................................................................................. 57.9 to 58.4 mm (2.28 to 2.30 in)
FIG. 2: Clutch Identification Colors
(1) Blue 1
(2) Spring - Orange / Yellow
(3) Spring - Red
2
3
D-14046
FIG. 2
04-2 4283359M1
Construction
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Clutch Removal
2 4
5 3
I-10503
FIG. 3
FIG. 3: Clutch removal

Disconnect the tension springs (2) from the clutch sleeve
(6).
Disconnect the clutch pedal linkage from the clutch pedal
linkage from the clutch shaft (4).
Rotate the clutch shaft and remove the tapered pin (5)
from the clutch fork (3).
Remove the clutch shaft.
Remove the bolts (1) securing the pressure plate to the
flywheel.
Remove the clutch cover together with the disk.
NOTE: When loosening bolts, loosen them gradually in
diagonal order. Make sure to keep the clutch disk
facings free of oil.
Two dowel pins are used to determine the
installed position of the clutch housing.
Separate the tractor as outlined in the major components
section.
4283359M1 04-3
Construction
FIG. 4: Use a long 6 mm bolt (2) and a weight (1) to
make a slide hammer.
Insert the bolt into the tapered pin (1).
I-10504
FIG. 4
FIG. 5: Remove the tapered pin, (1) using the slide
hammer.
N229098
FIG. 5
FIG. 6: Separate front transmission housing from engine
as outlined in the major components section of this
manual.
N41110F
FIG. 6
04-4 4283359M1
Construction
Inspection of Clutch Disc
FIG. 7: Check the clutch disc for wear or cracks on the
facing, loose rivets, broken torsion springs, or wear of the
hub springs.
Measure the suppression of the rivets. If the suppression
is 0.2 mm (.008 in) or less and cracks or burnt damage
are found on the surface, the disc must be replaced.
NOTE: Make sure to replace any clutch disc which has
0.2 mm (.008 inch) or less in rivet depression.
Use of a disc with insufficient rivet depression will
result in serious damage to flywheel and the
pressure plate.
I5501
Any oil-stained clutch disc must be replaced. However, a
very small oil stain may simply be removed by use of a FIG. 7
volatile solvent.
NOTE: The cause of oil stains must be located and
necessary corrective measures must be taken.
Hardened lining surfaces must be repaired by use of
sandpaper, or be replaced with new ones.
When loose rivets are found, replace the clutch disc
assembly. Rivets will loosen again, even if they are
tightened.
FIG. 8: Use Dial gauge (1) to measure deviations.
Install the disc on the input gear and inspect rotational 1
play. If the measurement is not 0.3 mm (0.012 in) replace
the disc.
Measure the deviations of the clutch disc. If the
measurements are beyond the usable limits, replace the
clutch disc assembly.
Usable limit
Surface deviation 0.4 mm (0.016 in) or less
I5502
Lateral run-out 1.0 mm (0.039 in) or less
FIG. 8
Vertical run-out 1.0 mm (0.039 in) or less
FIG. 9: Standard thickness 9.4 mm (0.37 in) and usable

limit of 7.2 mm (0.280 in) for the clutch disc. A disc
assembly with a thickness is or will be less than the
usable limit in a short period of use should be replaced
with a new one.
Check dampener springs for damage and fatigue. The
usable limit for the springs is 1.5 mm (0.06 in). A defective
one should be replaced with a new one.
Check the pressure plate's friction surface for
deformation, scratches, stepped wear, and oil stain. If it is
defective, replace the clutch cover assembly.
I5503
FIG. 9
4283359M1 04-5
Construction
Inspection of Clutch Cover Assembly
Standard Value Usable limit

less than 0.05 mm 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
(0.002 in.)
Check the clutch cover and diaphragm springs for

distortion, deformation, tension, and damage. If any
defective parts are found, replace the clutch cover
assembly.
Precautions for Assembly

FIG. 10: Keep oil from getting on the clutch disc,
pressure plate, and flywheel.
Install the clutch disc with the longer spline boss turned
towards the transmission.
When installing the clutch assembly on the flywheel, align
the clutch and the flywheel using the clutch centering tool
(ATP1011). Then tighten the clutch on the flywheel to a
torque of 23.5 to 30.4 Nm (18 to 22 lbf ft).
NOTE: At first align the clutch with the flywheel using the
two dowel bolts. Then install other bolts and
tighten them evenly to the specified torque.
I5505
Tighten yoke set bolt securely with adhesive applied. FIG. 10
Apply a thin coat of molybdenum disulfide based grease
to the spline parts of the input shaft and clutch disc in
advance.
Pack the inside of the sleeve with grease and apply
grease to the outer circumference of the sleeve guide in
advance. After installation, make sure they slide smoothly.
Use heat-resistant grease.
Apply in even coat of adhesive (THREE BOND TB 1215)
to the contact surfaces of the engine rear plate and clutch
housing before assembling them.
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
FIG. 11: Clutch Centering Tool
Center the clutch disk using the clutch center tool.
Mount the clutch cover using bolt.
Apply lubricant to the boss of the clutch disk and the input
shaft.
Apply heat resistant grease to the front mission case
bushing and the slide member of the bar.
Mount the yoke on the bar.
Hammer the bar with the taper pin.
Install the wire around the bar. I-10505
Apply heat resistant grease to the bore of the sleeve. FIG. 11

Install sleeve.
04-6 4283359M1
Construction
FIG. 12: Clutch Housing Vent Hose.
I-10506
FIG. 12
4283359M1 04-7
Construction
NOTES
04-8 4283359M1
Release Bearing
RELEASE BEARING
RELEASE BEARING
Removal
FIG. 13: Remove bearing (1) and sleeve (2).
2
1
I3597
FIG. 13
Inspection
The release bearing is grease-sealed, but when grease in
bearing reaches a low level or bearing does not turn
smoothly due to damage or seizure, replace bearing.
NOTE: Do not wash the release bearing.
Take note of bearing direction and remove it from sleeve.
Install new bearing making certain it is installed correctly
and pushed back to shoulder on sleeve.
Reverse procedures to install bearing with the following
additional information.
Ensure smooth movement of sleeve. If it does not move
smoothly, clean and grease it. Use heat-proof grease.
If tension springs on the sleeve are stretched or broken
they must be replaced. Inspect contact faces of fork and
sleeve. If there is abnormal wear, make repairs or replace
fork or sleeve.
Assembly
Coat each sliding part with heatproof grease.
Insert the spring into the sleeve with the bearing.
4283359M1 04-9
Release Bearing
NOTES
04-10 4283359M1
Clutch Cross Shaft
CLUTCH CROSS SHAFT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Separate the clutch housing from the engine.
Disassembly
4 7
1 2 6
3
5
8
11
10
12
9 13
MFC8511
FIG. 14
FIG. 14: Remove sleeve and throw out bearing (7) Coupling 16 x 27 x 62
assembly.
(8) Spring Pin (2)
Remove throw out bearing from the sleeve.
(9) Clutch Disk Assembly
(1) Clutch Cover Assembly
(10) Clutch Bearing
(2) Bolt (6)
(11) Release Fork
(3) Sleeve
(12) Oil Seal
(4) Bracket Assembly
(13) Clutch Assembly Housing
(5) Spring HC50
(6) Input Shaft
4283359M1 04-11
Clutch Cross Shaft
Assembly
8 3
9
5
6 4
10 7
MFC8513
FIG. 15
FIGS. 15: Clutch Pedal System

(1) Spring HC094
(2) Hook 11
(3) Shaft
(4) Grease Fitting
12
(5) Clutch Pedal Assembly
(6) Nut
(7) Turnbuckle
(8) Boot
(9) Clutch Arm
I3597
(10) Clutch Rod
FIG. 16
Assemble disassembled parts in reverse order of
disassembly, with the following additional information.
Each sliding part must be coated with heat proof grease.
Smooth movement of each part must be confirmed.
The release bearing (11) must be installed in correct
direction, on sleeve (12).
04-12 4283359M1
Clutch Cross Shaft
Clutch Free-Play Adjustment
Synchro Shuttle and Power Shuttle Tractors
FIG. 17: Check clutch pedal free-play regularly and
adjust as necessary. Correct clutch pedal free-play (A) is
20 to 30 mm (0.79 to 1.18 in) when measured at the end
of the pedal as shown.
NOTE: Through use, clutch free-play will be reduced.
IMPORTANT: Correct free-play must be maintained to A
reduce wear on the clutch and release bearing,
and allow complete disengagement when pedal
is depressed.
I-9023
FIG. 17
FIG. 18: To adjust the clutch pedal free-play, loosen the
lock nut (1) (right-hand thread) and lock nut (2) (left-hand
thread). Adjust the turn buckle (3) on the linkage until
free-play is correct. Lengthening linkage will increase 2
free-play, shortening linkage will reduce free-play.
Secure by tightening the lock nuts. 3
i-9047
FIG. 18
4283359M1 04-13
Clutch Cross Shaft
NOTES
04-14 4283359M1
Clutch Housing Plug
CLUTCH HOUSING PLUG
REMOVAL
FIG. 19: Pipe plug (1) must be removed from bottom of
clutch housing of standard transmission models once a
year or when clutch slopping is apparent. Any oil leakage
from engine rear crankshaft seal and/or transmission
input will be indicated by oil draining through hole.
I3203
FIG. 19
4283359M1 04-15
Clutch Housing Plug
NOTES
04-16 4283359M1
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch slippage that is not repaired will result in serious
damage such as excessive wear of the clutch facing, the
clutch cover, and even flywheel or clutch seizures.
Problem: Clutch Slippage
The initial stage of clutch slippage is very hard to notice,
but the following symptoms are noticeable.
The tractor is not generating adequate power when
performing heavy duty operations.
Output is not equal to an increase in engine speed when
the engine is accelerated suddenly during operation.
Increased fuel consumption.
When the clutch does not disengage properly, the
transmission gears make noise when shifted or shifting of
the gears is difficult.
Test Method:
If the parking brakes are applied and the transmission
gears shifted to top speed and the engine stops, then the
clutch is normal. But if the engine does not stop, it shows
that the clutch is slipping.
Probable causes Countermeasures

No play in the release bearing Adjust
Broken or fatigued diaphragm Replace
spring
Excessive wear of clutch facing Replace
Oil stained or hardened clutch Repair or replace
facing
Deviation of flywheel or Repair or replace
pressure plate
4283359M1 04-17
Troubleshooting
NOTES
04-18 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Clutch Cross Shaft ............................................. 04-11

Removal and Installation ................................ 04-11
Clutch Housing Plug .......................................... 04-15
Clutch Pedal System .......................................... 04-12
Construction ......................................................... 04-1
Release Bearing
Inspection ......................................................... 04-9
Removal ............................................................ 04-9
Releasing Bearing ................................................ 04-9
Transmission Clutch ............................................ 04-1

Troubleshooting ................................................. 04-17
4283359M1 04-19
Index
NOTES
04-20 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
05 - Transmission
Contents
TRANSMISSION
Standard Transmission .................................................................................................................................. 05-1
Power Shuttle Transmission .......................................................................................................................... 05-2
HST ................................................................................................................................................................ 05-3
POWERTRAIN
PowerTrain .................................................................................................................................................... 05-5
Transmission ........................................................................................................................................... 05-7
Gear Ratios .................................................................................................................................................... 05-8
Assembly of Power Train ...................................................................................................................... 05-11
SHUTTLE CLUTCH
Shuttle Clutch .............................................................................................................................................. 05-15
Synchro Shuttle ..................................................................................................................................... 05-15
Power Shuttle and Power Shift .............................................................................................................. 05-17
Precautions for Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 05-18
Clutch Pack ........................................................................................................................................... 05-20
Disassembly of Reverse Clutch ............................................................................................................ 05-21
INPUT GEARS
Input Gear Disassembly .............................................................................................................................. 05-23
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 05-29
Input Housing ........................................................................................................................................ 05-30
TRANSMISSION MAIN CHANGE GEARS

Main Gear Shift ............................................................................................................................................ 05-33
Precautions for Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 05-35
Main Shift Lever ........................................................................................................................................... 05-37
TRANSMISSION RANGE CHANGE GEARS

Range Gear Shift ......................................................................................................................................... 05-39
Installation of Range Gear Shift ................................................................................................................... 05-41
Range Shift Linkage .................................................................................................................................... 05-45
Range Lever ................................................................................................................................................ 05-46
REAR PTO
Rear PTO ..................................................................................................................................................... 05-47
PTO Clutch .................................................................................................................................................. 05-49
MID PTO
Mid PTO ....................................................................................................................................................... 05-55
Mid PTO construction .................................................................................................................................. 05-56
4283359M1 05-i
Contents
Mid-PTO Linkage ......................................................................................................................................... 05-57
4WD GEARS
4WD Shift ..................................................................................................................................................... 05-63
Precautions for Assembly - 4WD ................................................................................................................. 05-63
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 05-67
05-ii 4283359M1
Transmission
TRANSMISSION
STANDARD TRANSMISSION
D-14050
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: Synchro Shuttle (Type S)
4283359M1 05-1
Transmission
POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
D-14048
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Powershuttle (Type P)
05-2 4283359M1
Transmission
HST
I-10469
FIG. 3
FIG. 3: Hydrostat (Type H)
4283359M1 05-3
Transmission
NOTES
05-4 4283359M1
Powertrain
POWERTRAIN
POWERTRAIN
1 6
7
5
2 4
3
9
8
I-10475
FIG. 4
FIG. 4: Synchro shuttle 4WD

(1) Front Transmission Case
(2) Reverser Clutch
(3) PTO Clutch
(4) Main Shift Gear
(5) Rear Transmission Case
(6) Range Shift Gear
(7) Rear PTO Shift Gear
(8) Mid PTO Shift Gear
(9) 4WD Shift Gear
4283359M1 05-5
Powertrain
1 6
7
5
2 4
3
9
8
I-10474
FIG. 5
FIG. 5: Power shuttle transmission

(2) Reverse Clutch
(3) PTO Clutch
(4) Main Shift Gear
(9) 4WD Shift Gear
05-6 4283359M1
Powertrain
Transmission
1
6
2
3 4
5
9
8 7
I-10473
FIG. 6
FIG. 6: HST transmission

(2) Mid Transmission Case
(3) HST Unit (Pump/Motor: 29.5/30.2)
(8) PTO Gear Shift Section
(9) 4WD Shift Gear
4283359M1 05-7
Powertrain
GEAR RATIOS
D-14051
FIG. 7
FIG. 7: Model S- Synchro Shuttle
05-8 4283359M1
Powertrain
D-14052
FIG. 8
FIG. 8: Model P Power Shuttle
4283359M1 05-9
Powertrain
D-14049
FIG. 9
FIG. 9: Model H - Hydro
05-10 4283359M1
Powertrain
Assembly of Power Train
(1) Clean and degrease
(2) Apply grease to the seal lips and install in proper
direction.
(3) Install washer in proper direction
(4) Starting Torque: 0.78 to 1.18 Nm (0.60 to 0.90 lbf ft).
Tightening torque to 98 Nm (72.3 lbf ft) Drive end of nut
into the groove of the driving pinion after the starting
torque setup.
(5) Stake nut securely after setting rolling torque.
(6) Make sure to assemble collar
(7) Backlash 0.15 to 0.25 mm (0.006 to 0.010 in)
(8) Make sure to follow the assembling direction: It is
impossible to assemble from the front after installing the
gear.
(9) Punch fracture side
(10) Apply Adhesive
(11) Apply the grease to seal ring.
(12) Make sure to install the O-ring and apply grease.
(13) Make sure to assemble the collars.
(14) Grooved for discrimination.
(15) Clutch PTO assembly: handle with care due to
aluminum.
(16) Align the PTO clutch brake tab with the groove in
housing.
(17) Make sure to assemble CAP/BLANK(Reverse left
side of FM Case.
(18) Apply three bond 1901.
(19) Apply three bond TB1207B
(20) Take out the clutch disk with jig.
(21) Make sure to assemble the washer.
(22) Apply adhesive L324
(23) Make sure to install collars.
(24) A (Stop rust) spray must cover the surrounding
sleeve.
(25) Apply grease that is heat-resistant.
(26) Make sure to read the directions carefully.
NOTE: Make sure to check by hand the rotation at sub
assembly and also check for unusual waving of
the shaft rotation.
NOTE: Make sure to assemble washer, seal, and wheel
to avoid waving.
NOTE: Make sure to assemble the correct RBB.
4283359M1 05-11
Powertrain
05-12 4283359M1
Powertrain
Transmission Assembly
3
1 2
25
24
2
22
21
4 6
20
23
7
19 18
17
13 8
10
14
15
11
26
2
16 10
12 9
FIG. 10
4283359M1 05–13
Powertrain
This Page Intentionally Blank
05–14 4283359M1
Shuttle Clutch
SHUTTLE CLUTCH
SHUTTLE CLUTCH
Synchro Shuttle
6
2
1
5
4
D-14037
FIG. 11
FIG. 11: Synchro Shuttle

Shuttle shift allows the operator to change forward and
reverse for each speed with a single shift lever. The
synchro shuttle uses a synchromesh type gear shift.
(1) Transmission Input Gear
(2) Reverse Idler Gear
(3) Reverse Gear
(4) Counter Gear
(5) Forward Gear
(6) Synchromesh Unit
4283359M1 05-15
Shuttle Clutch
9 8
10 28
4
3
7
6 13 27
5 26
11
22
12 25
2 11 24
23
18
20
21 29
20
30
19
18 31
17
1 16
15
14
N229102
FIG. 12
FIG. 12: Reverse Gear System (Synchro Shuttle (16) Needle Bearing
Illustrated)
(17) Gear
(1) Bolt
(18) Synchronizer Ring
(2) Input Cover
(19) Sleeve
(3) Oil Seal
(20) Spring
(4) Snap Ring
(21) Synchronizer Assembly
(5) Bearing
(22) Pin
(6) Collar
(23) Snap Ring
(7) Bearing
(24) Gear
(8) Gear Shaft
(25) Needle Bearing
(9) Bolt
(26) Washer
(10) Plate
(27) Bearing
(11) Bearing
(28) Bolt
(12) Gear
(29) Bearing
(13) Snap Ring
(30) Gear
(14) Bearing
(31) Bearing
(15) Reverse Shaft
05-16 4283359M1
Shuttle Clutch
Power Shuttle and Power Shift
1
2
3
4
I-10625
FIG. 13
FIG. 13: Power Shuttle

Shuttle shift allows the operator to change forward and
reverse for each speed with a single shift lever. The
shuttle shift uses a hydraulic clutch type gear shift.
(1) Transmission Input Gear
(2) Reverse Idler Gear
(3) Reverse Gear
(4) Counter Gear
(5) Forward Gear
(6) Reverser Clutch Assembly (3 friction)
4283359M1 05-17
Shuttle Clutch
2
3
4
5
I-10626
FIG. 14:
FIG. 14: Synchro Shift Assembly Precautions

(1) Apply grease
(2) Attention to direction of oil seal
(3) Apply loctite to the bolt
(4) Apply liquid gasket (TB1208E) to metal cover
(5) Oil application
05-18 4283359M1
Shuttle Clutch
I-10625
FIG. 15
FIG. 15: Power Shuttle Assembly Precautions

Seal Ring check for any unlinked parts and damages.
Apply grease.
O-ring check for any unlinked parts and damages. Apply
grease.
Attention: Direction of washer
The clutch case is made of die-cast aluminum. Handle
the clutch case with care and do not to damage or deform
it.
4283359M1 05-19
Shuttle Clutch
Clutch Pack
5 6
3 7
1
8
D-14039
FIG. 16
FIG. 16: Reverse Clutch Pack Components

(1) Housing
(2) Back Plate
(3) Spring
(4) Friction Plate
(5) Ring
(6) Piston
(7) Ring
(8) Separator Plate
05-20 4283359M1
Shuttle Clutch
Disassembly of Reverse Clutch
3
2
I-10630
FIG. 17
FIG. 17: Removal and installation of spring of reverse

clutch
Remove snap ring of clutch disk.
Take out friction plate and separate plate.
Install collar (53 x 61 x 32) on setting gap of collar and
snap ring.
Screw handle and compress spring.
Remove snap ring by snap ring plier.
(1) Collar (53 x 61 x 32)
(2) Plate
(3) Handle Comp
(4) Base Comp
(5) Collar
(6) Simple Jig
4283359M1 05-21
Shuttle Clutch
NOTES
05-22 4283359M1
Input Gears
INPUT GEARS
INPUT GEAR DISASSEMBLY

FIGS. 18–19: Separate the tractor between the front and
rear transmission housing.
Remove the gear shift lever and metal cover.
N229075
FIG. 18
N229076
FIG. 19
4283359M1 05-23
Input Gears
FIGS. 20–21: Remove the four wheel drive shifter.
N229077
FIG. 20
N229078
FIG. 21
FIG. 22: Remove bolts and metal support from the front
transmission case.
N229103
FIG. 22
FIG. 23: Remove main change gear clusters as an
assembly.
N229104
FIG. 23
05-24 4283359M1
Input Gears
FIG. 24: Remove the bolts from the PTO support.
N229105
FIG. 24
FIG. 25: Remove the PTO support and PTO clutch pack
as an assembly.
NOTE: The PTO brake tab (1) must be inserted into the
locking groove in the support metal.
1
N229106
FIG. 25
4283359M1 05-25
Input Gears
2
7 11
1 10
6 9
5 8
4
18
17
3 16
15
19
14
13
12
N229107
FIG. 26
FIG. 26: Front PTO gear system (10) Bearing

(1) Shaft (11) Bearing and Shaft Support
(2) Oil Seal (12) Bearing
(3) Bearing and Shaft Support (13) Collar
(4) Snap Ring (14) Bearing
(5) Bearing (15) Gear
(6) Snap Ring (16) Bearing
(7) Shaft (17) PTO Clutch
(8) Bearing (18) Bearing
(9) Gear (19) Shaft
05-26 4283359M1
Input Gears
FIG. 27: Remove the input gears and support metal as
an assembly.
N229108
FIG. 27
FIG. 28: Remove reverse gear, synchronizer, and shift
fork.
N229101
FIG. 28
FIG. 29: Remove the reverse gear, synchronizer, and
shift fork.
N229109
FIG. 29
4283359M1 05-27
Input Gears
7 22
6 21
4 5 20
23
3 24
2 19 25
18
1
17
26
16
15
13 14
12
11 29
30
31
33 32
27
28
10
8 9
N229110
FIG. 30
FIG. 30: Main gear assembly (17) Coupling

(1) Bearing (18) Gear
(2) Gear (19) Needle Bearing
(3) Gear (20) Main Shaft
(4) Gear (21) Needle Bearing
(5) Snap Ring (22) Gear
(6) Gear (23) Snap Ring
(7) Bearing (24) Needle Bearing
(8) Collar (25) Gear
(9) Support (26) Support
(10) Bolt (27) Bearing
(11) Bearing (28) Washer
(12) Washer (29) Needle Bearing
(13) Gear (30) Gear
(14) Needle Bearing (31) Snap Ring
(15) Snap Ring (32) Hub
(16) Hub (33) Coupling
05-28 4283359M1
Input Gears
Assembly
FIG. 31: Install the input gear assembly with the support
metal.
N229108
FIG. 31
FIG. 32: Install the PTO clutch assembly and PTO
support.
NOTE: Make sure the PTO clutch brake tab is aligned
inside the groove in the support housing.
N229105
FIG. 32
4283359M1 05-29
Input Gears
FIGS. 33–34: Install the main change gear clusters and
rear support as an assembly.
N229104
FIG. 33
N229103
FIG. 34
Input Housing
FIG. 35: Separate transmission between the engine and
the front housing. 2
Remove the wire (1).
Thread a bolt into the pin (2) and attach a slide hammer to
the bolt.
Remove the pin.
1
N229098
FIG. 35
05-30 4283359M1
Input Gears
FIGS. 36–37: Thread two bolts into the input cover and
remove the input cover.
N229100
FIG. 36
N229101
FIG. 37
4283359M1 05-31
Input Gears
NOTES
05-32 4283359M1
Transmission Main Change Gears
TRANSMISSION MAIN CHANGE GEARS
MAIN GEAR SHIFT
2 7
4
9 10
12
3
6 8 11
I-10535
FIG. 38
FIG. 38: Type S Synchro Shuttle

(1) Main Shaft
(2) 4th Change Gear (39T) (40T)
(3) 4th Counter Gear (24T) (23T)
(4) Synchromesh
(5) 3rd Change Gear (33T)
(6) 3rd Counter Gear (30T)
(7) 2nd Change Gear (26T)
(9) Synchromesh
(10) 1st Change Gear (20T)
(11) 1st Counter Gear (43T)
(12) Counter Shaft (16T)
The main gear shift uses a constant mesh type
transmission.
4283359M1 05-33
2 5
4
9
7
10
12
3
6 8
11
I-10534
FIG. 39
FIG. 39: Type P Power Shuttle

(1) Main Shaft
(2) 4th Change Gear (39T) (40T)
(3) 4th Counter Gear (24T) (23T)
(4) Synchromesh
(5) 3rd Change Gear (33T)
(6) 3rd Counter Gear (30T)
(9) Synchromesh
(10) 1st Change Gear (20T)
(11) 1st Counter Gear (43T)
(12) Counter Shaft (16T)
The main gear shift uses a synchromesh type
transmission.
05-34 4283359M1
PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY
I-10539 I-10538 I-10537

FIG. 40
FIG. 40: Precautions for assembly - Synchro Shuttle

(1) Installed direction of washer
(2) Installed direction of Gear
4283359M1 05-35
I-10538 I-10536
FIG. 41
FIG. 41: Precautions for assembly - Power Shuttle

(1) Apply Oil to Synchro Mesh
(2) Installed Direction of Washer
05-36 4283359M1
MAIN SHIFT LEVER
1 2 5 8 11
10
4
6 7
3
9
I-10540
FIG. 42
FIG. 42: Synchro Shuttle and Power Shuttle Shift Lever

(1) Shift Rod (1-2)
(2) Shift Fork (1-2)
(3) Shift Rod (3-4)
(4) Shift Fork (3-4)
(5) Shift Arm (1-2)
(6) Shift Arm (3-4)
(7) Bolt
(8) Lever
(9) Guide
(10) Shift Housing
(11) Spring
4283359M1 05-37
3
2
1 4
4
I-10542
FIG. 43
FIG. 43: Precautions for assembly of main shift lever.

Wire rubber cover
(1) Apply grease
(2) Apply silicone to the shift housing
(3) Apply bond to rubber
(4) Apply loctite (chemiseal L324) to the bolt
(5) Apply sealant to the bolt
FIG. 44: Apply loctite to the bolts (5), and (6)
I-10541
FIG. 44
05-38 4283359M1
Transmission Range Change Gears
TRANSMISSION RANGE CHANGE GEARS
RANGE GEAR SHIFT

FIG. 45: Synchr Shuttle Components
H L
(1) Main Counter Gear (16T)
4 5
(2) Hub
3
(3) Change Gear (34T)
1 2
(4) Gear (17-35T)
(5) Counter Gear (6-17T)
(L) Low range
(H) High Range
I-10545
FIG. 45
FIG. 46: Power Shuttle Components
H 5 M
(1) Main Counter Gear (16T)
(2) Hub 2 3
1
4
(4) Gear (17-35T)
(5) Counter Gear (36-17T)
(6) Cleap Gear (15-32T)
(H) Hi Range
(M) Mid Range L
I-10546
(L) Low Range
FIG. 46
4283359M1 05-39
4 H 6 M
L
5
7
8 10
3 9
I-10547
FIG. 47
FIG. 47: Hydrostat Components

(1) HST Output Shaft
(2) Gear (20T)
(3) Idler Gear (26T)
(4) Gear (24T)
(5) Coupling
(6) Range Counter Gear
(7) Gear (21T)
(9) Hub
(10) Gear (32T)
(H) Hi Range
(M) Mid Range
(L) Lo Range
05-40 4283359M1
INSTALLATION OF RANGE GEAR
SHIFT
FIG. 48: Synchro Shuttle Assembly
Assemble range change gear (1) so that groove of shifter
is to front side. 1
Assemble the shift fork and shift rail of range shift. Then
assemble the counter gear (2).
2
I-10549
FIG. 48
FIG. 49: Installed direction of range change gear (1).
1
I-10548
FIG. 49
4283359M1 05-41
6 7
5
4
3
2
11
10
N229111
FIG. 50
FIG. 50: Synchro shuttle Range Gears

(1) Gear Support
(2) Shaft
(3) Snap Ring
(4) Collar
(5) Sleeve
(6) Gear
(7) Needle Bearing
(8) Gear
(9) Bearing
(10) Gear Shaft
(11) Bearing
05-42 4283359M1
3
4
1 1
I-10550
FIG. 51
FIG. 51: Power Shuttle Assembly

Install the bearing (1) to Counter Gear (2). Assemble gear
(3). The assemble Counter Gear (2) with bearing (1).
Assemble change gear (4) so that groove of shifter faces
to front side.
Assemble the shift fork and shift rail. Then assemble the
counter gear (5).
4283359M1 05-43
4
I-10552
FIG. 52
FIG. 52: Hydrostat Assembly

Install bearing to Gears (1), (2) and (3). Then assemble
the gears with careful attention to the position.
Assemble bearing and PTO idle gear to Gear (4). Then
assemble the PTO clutch ASSY and Gear (4) to the
support metal (6), and assemble them to the mid case.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to disengage the PTO
clutch brake tab from the groove in the housing.
FIG. 53: Assemble change gear (2) so the groove of
shifter turns to front side. 2
First assemble Drive Pinion Assembly and Lead Gear
Assembly, then assemble Counter Gear (1).
I-10551
FIG. 53
05-44 4283359M1
RANGE SHIFT LINKAGE
7
3 5 8
6
2
1
I-10553
FIG. 54
FIG. 54: Power Shuttle Range Shift, linkage shift

(1) Shift Rail
(2) Shift Fork
(3) Steal Rail
(4) Spring
(5) Shift Arm
(6) Shift Lever
(7) O-ring
(8) Spring Pin
FIG. 55: Synchro Shuttle range shift linkage
(1) Shift Rail
(2) Shift Fork
(3) Shift Arm
(4) Shift Lever 2
1 3
4 I-10554
FIG. 55
4283359M1 05-45
RANGE LEVER
Shift Pattern
N
S
N N
P
N N
H
3
1
D-14035
FIG. 56
FIG. 56: Range Lever Linkage

(1) Set linkage to lower hole
(2) S/P/H
(3) Shorter linkage is for the range shift. Longer linkage
is for the PTO shift
05-46 4283359M1
Rear PTO
REAR PTO
REAR PTO
8
1
9
2
3 6
4
7
I-10525
FIG. 57
FIG. 57: Synchro shuttle, and power shuttle, PTO

assembly
(1) PTO Input Shaft
(2) PTO Idler Gear
(3) PTO Clutch Gear
(4) PTO Clutch
(5) PTO Drive Shaft
(6) Coupling
(7) PTO Counter Gear
(8) PTO Change Gear
(9) PTO Shaft
4283359M1 05-47
Rear PTO
2 4
1 3
11
12
5
6 8
10
7
I-10526
FIG. 58
FIG. 58: Hydrostat PTO assembly

(1) Input Shaft
(2) HST unit
(3) Coupling
(4) PTO Input Gear
(5) PTO Idler Gear
(6) PTO Clutch Gear
(7) PTO Clutch
(8) PTO Drive Shaft
(9) Coupling
(10) PTO Counter Gear
(11) PTO Change Gear
(12) PTO Shaft
05-48 4283359M1
Rear PTO
PTO CLUTCH
10 2
11
9
8 1
3 6
D-14041
FIG. 59
FIG. 59: PTO clutch pack

(1) Clutch Case
(2) Piston
(3) Separate Plate
(4) Spring
(5) Friction Plate Qty-5
(6) Brake Disk
(7) Brake Pressure
(8) Back Plate
(9) Wave Spring
The clutch cases have the following identification
markings:
The PTO clutch case is made of die-cast aluminum.
Make sure to take caution in handling the clutch case and
do not damage or deform it.
Remove snap ring (10) and take out the back up plate,
separator plates and disc. While holding spring (4)
compressed with jig, remove snap ring (11).
4283359M1 05-49
Rear PTO
FIG. 60: PTO clutch snap ring Jig to compress the PTO
clutch can be fabricated.
I3634
FIG. 60
05-50 4283359M1
Rear PTO
I-10529
FIG. 61
FIG. 61: Assembly precautions - PTO

Apply grease to seal (1). Check for any damages.
Make sure that the brake disk tab (2) is inserted firmly into
the metal groove in support housing.
Apply grease to O-ring (3).
4283359M1 05-51
Rear PTO
1 2
I-10530
FIG. 62
FIG. 62: Assembly precautions PTO Shaft

Check the oil seal (1) and the sleeve.
Fabricate slide hammer jig (2) to help remove and install
540 PTO shaft.
05-52 4283359M1
Rear PTO
FIG. 63: HST only
Apply Loctite (1)
1
I-10531
FIG. 63
FIG. 64: all versions
Punched Fracture Side of the coupler (1) goes to the rear.
I-10533
FIG. 64
4283359M1 05-53
Rear PTO
NOTES
05-54 4283359M1
Mid PTO
MID PTO
MID PTO
8
9
26 9
11 29
21
20
6
10 1
12 27
14 28
19
22
16 15
18
2 13 7
23 3
24
25 17
4
d-12918
FIG. 65
Exploded view of Mid PTO set (15) Ball

(1) PTO Case (16) O-Ring
(2) Snap Ring (17) PTO Shaft
(3) Flange Bolt (18) Ball Bearing
(4) Bolt (19) Ball Bearing
(5) Lock Washer (20) Collar
(6) Pin (21) Snap Ring
(7) Plug (22) Seal Assembly
(8) Spur Gear-40 (23) Seal
(9) Bearing (24) PTO Shaft Cap
(10) Shaft (25) Flange Bolt
(11) Plate 25 x 68 (26) MID Shift Arm assembly
(12) Flange Bolt (27) Plate 30 x 50
(13) Spur Gear-19 (28) Flange Bolt
(14) Shifter Spring (29) O-Ring
4283359M1 05-55
Mid PTO
MID PTO CONSTRUCTION
D-14064
FIG. 66
FIG. 66: Dimensions of the mid-PTO
05-56 4283359M1
Mid PTO
MID-PTO LINKAGE
1
D-13147
FIG. 67
FIG. 67: When assembling the linkage for the MID PTO
linkage, make sure that the larger hole (1) 19 mm (0.75 in)
of linkage is located on the lower side.
(2) Bracket / Sensor - HST and power shift
(3) Switch and Plate - power shift
4283359M1 05-57
Mid PTO
FIG. 68: Mid PTO switch - power shift
D-13148
FIG. 68
05-58 4283359M1
Mid PTO
FIGS. 69–70: Construction of the mid PTO
(1) PTO Case
(2) Snap Ring
(3) Flange Bolt
(4) Bolt
(5) Washer Lock
(6) Pin
(7) Plug / Screw / Seal
(8) Gear Spur (40)
(9) Bearing
(10) Shaft
(11) Plate /l/30 x 50
(12) Flange Bolt
(13) Gear Spur (19)
(14) Shift Spring
(15) Ball
(16) O-Ring
(17) PTO Shaft (E3)
(18) Bearing Ball
(19) Bearing Ball
(20) Sleeve
(22) Metal Seal
(23) PTO Shaft Cap
(24) Flange Bolt
(25) Mid Shift Arm
(26) Plate /l/30 x 50
(27) Flange Bolt
(28) O-Ring
(29) Mid Shift Arm
(30) Spring Pin
(31) Wire
4283359M1 05-59
Mid PTO
11
9
12
10
3
24
17
23 20
2
22 16 1 18
19
22 13
D-13150
FIG. 69
05-60 4283359M1
Mid PTO
29
30
26
31
28 5
27
25 14 15 4
7
D-13150
FIG. 70
4283359M1 05-61
Mid PTO
1 2
7 6
8 5
4
9
3
D-14065
FIG. 71
FIG. 71: Precautions of assembly - mid PTO

Apply anti-corrosion oil to each part.
(1) Apply the screw lock use chemical seal.
(2) Make sure the chamfer is installed in the correct
direction.
(3) Apply grease to the O-ring.
(4) Apply oil when assembling.
(5) Assemble this part first.
(6) After this part is assembled make sure gears
change smoothly.
(7) Spring Pin: Make sure of the direction
(8) Sleeve: When inserting this part, apply the grease
to the inside.
(9) Oil Seal: Make sure the direction of the part is
correct, and apply grease.
05-62 4283359M1
4WD Gears
4WD GEARS
4WD SHIFT
FIGS. 72–73: Construction
To service 4WD shift gears, split the tractor between the
front and rear transmission sections as outlined in the
major components section of this manual.
(1) Gear (32T)
(2) 4WD Lead Gear (36-31T)
2 1
(3) 4WD Shift Gear (26T)
(4) 4WD Drive Shaft
3
NOTE: : Sliding mechanism of 4WD shift gear moves
forward in 4WD and rearward in 2WD. 4 I-10557
FIG. 72
I-10558
FIG. 73
PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY - 4WD

FIG. 74:
IMPORTANT: When installing 4WD shift gear, make sure 2
to put the shift fork into the groove of shift collar.
Make sure not to come off the detent assembly
(1) in the shift housing (2).
I-10560
FIG. 74
4283359M1 05-63
4WD Gears
FIG. 75: Apply grease to (1) O-ring
Apply silicone (2) between shift housing and
transmission.
2
I-10561
FIG. 75
05-64 4283359M1
4WD Gears
5
1 6
4
I-10559
FIG. 76
FIG. 76: The shift lever is connect directly to the shift

fork.
(1) 4WD Shift Lever
(2) Main Shift Lever
(3) 2WD
(4) 4WD
(5) Range Shift Lever
(6) PTO Shift Lever
4283359M1 05-65
4WD Gears
NOTES
05-66 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Numerics T
4WD Gears ........................................................ 05-63 Transmission ........................................................ 05-1

Transmission Main Change
Precautions for Assembly ............................... 05-35
A Transmission Main Change Gears ..................... 05-33
Transmission Range Change Gears .................. 05-39
Assembly of Power Train ................................... 05-11
Clutch Pack ........................................................ 05-20
HST ...................................................................... 05-3
Input Gear .......................................................... 05-23

Input Gear Disassembly ..................................... 05-23
Installation of Range Gear Shift ......................... 05-41
Main Gear Shift .................................................. 05-33

Mid PTO ............................................................. 05-55
Power Shift
Power Shuttle
Disassembly of Reverse Clutch ...................... 05-21
Power Shuttle and Power Shift .......................... 05-17
Power Shuttle Transmission ................................ 05-2
Power Train .......................................................... 05-5
Range Gear Shift ............................................... 05-39

Range Shift Linkage ........................................... 05-45
Rear PTO ........................................................... 05-47
PTO Clutch ..................................................... 05-49
Shuttle Clutch ..................................................... 05-15

Disassembly of Reverse Clutch ...................... 05-21
Shuttle Shift
Standard Transmission ........................................ 05-1
4283359M1 05-67
Index
NOTES
05-68 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
06 - Hydrostatic Transmission
Contents
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
Operation of Hydrostat Unit ........................................................................................................................... 06-1
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 06-2
Specifications of Hydrostat Unit .............................................................................................................. 06-2
HST Test Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 06-3
Disassembly, Inspection, and Assembly ....................................................................................................... 06-7
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................................ 06-7
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 06-12
Installation of HST Unit .......................................................................................................................... 06-15
Criteria For Replacing Worn Parts ........................................................................................................ 06-17
HST Cooler ............................................................................................................................................ 06-18
HST Filter .............................................................................................................................................. 06-19
HST Single Pedal Mechanism ..................................................................................................................... 06-24
Pedal Components ................................................................................................................................ 06-24
Link Movement During Forward Pedal Operation ................................................................................. 06-27
Link Movement During Reverse Pedal Operation ................................................................................. 06-29
Adjustment of HST Pedal ...................................................................................................................... 06-31
Adjustment of Single Pedal Release Mechanism of Cruise Control Lever .................................................. 06-32
Adjusting the Single Pedal Cruise Control Lever .................................................................................. 06-33
Adjustment of Single Pedal Auto Acceleration Pedal ............................................................................ 06-33
HST Two Pedal Linkage Mechanism ........................................................................................................... 06-34
Adjustment of the HST Pedals .............................................................................................................. 06-35
Adjustment of Cruise Control - Two Pedal ............................................................................................ 06-36
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 06-39
4283359M1 06-i
Contents
NOTES
06-ii 4283359M1
Hydrostatic Transmission
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
OPERATION OF HYDROSTAT UNIT
4
6
3 5
7
2
1
8
d-12838
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: Oil Flow Diagram
(1) HST Relief Valve

(2) Sub Pump
(3) Orbit Roll Assembly
(4) Power Steering Cylinder
(5) HST Oil Cooler
(6) HST Charge Filter
(7) HST Unit
(8) Suction Filter
4283359M1 06-1
Operation
Oil Flow from the tank port of orbit roll to the oil cooler. Oil
is cooled down in the oil cooler will flow to the HST charge
valve through the filter. If the pressure exceeds the relief
valve setting pressure, oil flow will return to the tank.
8 4 5
8
8
1
3
d-12810
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Diagram of the Hydrostatic Unit

(1) Input Shaft
(2) PTO Shaft
(3) Output Shaft
(4) Neutral
(5) Gauge Port (Forward Pressure) B Side
(6) Gauge Port (Reverse Pressure) A Side
(7) T-Port
(8) Trunnion Shaft
Specifications of Hydrostat Unit

Pump Side ...................................................................................................................................................... 0 to 29.5 cc/rev
Motor Side ......................................................................................................................................................... 30.2 cc/rev
Charge Circuit:
Set Pressure .....................................................................................386 to 586 kPa (56 to 85 psi) @ 15 l/min (3.9 gal/min)
High Pressure Relief:
Set Pressure ................................................................................................................. 36.8 to 38.0 mPa (5338 to 5480 psi)
06-2 4283359M1
FIG. 3: Hydraulic Schematic of HST Unit
d-12812
FIG. 3
HST Test Procedures

High Pressure Relief
FIG. 4: Remove the cover from the top of the platform to
get access to the test port plugs. The plug on the
left-hand side is for reverse pressure, the plug on the
right-hand side is for forward pressure. Remove the
appropriate test port plug from the top of the HST unit.
Obtain adaptor fitting from tool kit ATP3031 and insert it
into the test port along with the test hose included in the
kit. Install a 689 kPa (100 psi) gauge. Place the tractor in
high range and engage the parking brake. Turn the
engine ON and press forward (or reverse) on the HST
pedal. The number on the gauge will be the Hi Pressure
Relief.
P101020
FIG. 4
FIG. 5: Remove the cover from the top of the platform to
get access to the test port plugs. The plug on the
Left-hand side is for reverse pressure, the plug on the
right-hand side is for forward pressure. Remove the
reverse test port plug from the top of the HST unit. Obtain
adaptor fitting from tool kit ATP3031 and insert it into the
test port along with the test hose included in the kit. Install
a 689 kPa (100 psi) gauge. Place the tractor in high
range and engage the parking brake. Turn the engine ON
and press forward on the HST pedal. The number on the
gauge will be the Charge Pressure.
m
WARNING: Do not press the reverse on the
Hydro pedal or the gauge will be destroyed.
P101020
FIG. 5
4283359M1 06-3
HST high pressure relief valve replacement
FIG. 6: The high pressure relief valves can be replaced
with out splitting the tractor. Remove the frost plugs, (1),
from the side of the transmission housing to expose the
high pressure relief valves. Use a hex wrench to remove
the relief plug.
1
MFC7839
FIG. 6
d-13155
FIG. 7
FIG. 7: Fabricate and insert a thin wall tube cut to length

into the front transmission housing prior to removing the
relief valve. This will reduce the likelihood of the relief
valve falling into the housing.
06-4 4283359M1
9
5 8
7
2
3
4
d-12814a
FIG. 8
FIG. 8: Construction
(1) Input Shaft
(2) PTO Output Shaft
(3) Main Output Shaft
(4) Pump Group
(5) Motor Group
(6) Trunnion Shaft
(7) High Pressure Valve (FWD)
(8) High Pressure Valve (REV)
(9) Charge Pressure Valve
4283359M1 06-5
1
6
A
28 15
23 B
19
35
38 36
A 24
7 44
40 6 16
B 30 31 26
33 3 42 18
20 32 46
9
22
1 17
1
36 29
37
32 3
34 33
4 14
39 42 11
D-12837
FIG. 9
FIG. 9: Exploded View of HST Unit (24) Seal Case

(25) Valve
(1) Seal Set (26) Spring
(2) Gasket (27) Socket Screw
(3) O-Ring (28) Socket Screw
(4) Plug (29) Flat Screw
(5) Oil Seal (30) Ball Bearing
(6) Oil Seal (31) Needle Bearing
(7) O-Ring (32) Relief Valve Assembly
(8) O-Ring (33) Plug
(9) O-Ring (34) Spring
(10) O-Ring (35) Thrust Plate
(11) O-Ring (36) Pin
(12) Cylinder Block Assembly (37) Pin
(13) HST Case (38) Snap Ring
(14) Block Port (39) Snap Ring
(15) Swash Plate (40) Snap Ring
(16) Valve Plate (41) Plug
(17) Valve Plate (42) Plug
(18) Thrust Plate (43) Collar
(19) Pump Shaft (44) Pin
(20) Motor Shaft (45) Shipping Plug
(21) Cover (46) Bush
(22) Cover (47) Shipping Plug
(23) Cover
06-6 4283359M1
DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION, AND
ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
NOTE: Clean the exterior of the case completely, taking
care to cover all the ports.
NOTE: Select a clean, dust free area to work to avoid
contaminating the parts.
Drain the oil out of the case.
Separate the tractor between the bell housing and the
front transmission as outlined in the Major Components
section of the manual.
FIG. 10: Remove the four socket bolts.
Remove the cover from the case, and remove the two
pins, o-ring, and collar.
I-10724
FIG. 10
FIG. 11: Remove the oil seal (1) from the cover (2). The
oil seal should be removed using a jig (3) and a hand
press (4).
2 4
I-6103a
FIG. 11
FIG. 12: Remove the eight socket head bolts.
Remove the port block from the case.
Remove the valve and the spring.
NOTE: Do not allow the valve plate to fall.
Do not allow the cylinder block to rise together
with the port block.
Use a plastic mallet to separate the cylinder
block.
I-10725
FIG. 12
4283359M1 06-7
FIG. 13: Remove the valve plates.
Remove the gasket and two pins.
NOTE: Insert the screwdriver in the groove and lift up the
valve plate.
I-10726
FIG. 13
FIG. 14: Remove the pump side of the cylinder block
assembly.
NOTE: Remove the three pins.
I-10727
FIG. 14
FIG. 15: Remove the thrust plate of the pump side.
Remove the thrust plate of the motor side.
I-10731
FIG. 15
FIG. 16: Remove the snap ring from the case and then
remove the bore plug. After removing the bore plug
remove the snap ring installed behind the plug. Remove
the shaft from the case by driving the shaft end (1) with a
plastic mallet. 1
I-6110a
FIG. 16
06-8 4283359M1
FIG. 17: Remove the pump side shaft by hitting the shaft
with a plastic mallet.
I-10732
FIG. 17
FIG. 18: Remove the snap ring on the motor side shaft.
I-10733
FIG. 18
FIG. 19: Separate the oil seal case from the case by
hitting the motor side shaft on the end with a plastic
headed mallet.
Remove the oil seal from the case.
Remove the motor side shaft from the case.
I-10734
FIG. 19
4283359M1 06-9
FIG. 20: Listed are parts relevant to the pistons and
cylinder block.
(1) Slant Board (pump)
(2) Cylinder Block
(3) Piston
(4) Valve Plate (pump)
(5) Valve Plate (motor) 2
6 4
(6) Thrust Bearing 1 8
(7) Spring 7
(8) Spring Holder
NOTE: The friction parts for the pump and for the motor
should be kept separately. 7
6 2 5
8
I-6116
FIG. 20
FIG. 21: Remove the six screws from the cover around
the swash plate.
I-10735
FIG. 21
FIG. 22: Separate the cover from the case by driving the
trunnion on the end with a plastic mallet and remove the
cover from the case.
I-10736
FIG. 22
06-10 4283359M1
FIG. 23: Remove the other cover by driving the trunnion
on the end with a plastic mallet and remove the cover
from the case.
I-10737
FIG. 23
FIG. 24: Remove the swash plate from the case.
Remove the pin from the swash plate.
I-10738
FIG. 24
FIG. 25: Remove the check and high pressure relief
valve.
Remove the plug, the spring, and the valve assembly.
I-10739
FIG. 25
FIG. 26: Disassemble the relief valve. Remove the relief
valve. Disassemble the check valve. Remove the plug
and then spring and poppet. Removal of the neutral valve.
Remove the plug and then remove the shims. After that,
remove the spring and piston assembly.
I-6115
FIG. 26
4283359M1 06-11
Assembly
NOTE: Before assembly wash parts with cleansing oil
and blow dry with compressed air.
Install all sealing parts with new ones.
Apply lithium based grease to oil seals and
o-rings.
FIG. 27: Insert two pins onto the swash plates.
Set the swash plates into the case.
NOTE: Make sure the direction of the trunnion shaft is
correct.
Install the covers onto the case. Tightening the six screws
to a torque of 6.3 to 7.5 Nm (4.66 to 5.54 lbf ft).
I-10743
FIG. 27
FIG. 28: Assemble the pump side shaft assembly into
the case.
I-10744
FIG. 28
FIG. 29: Install the collar, o-ring, and two pins onto the
case.
I-10745
FIG. 29
06-12 4283359M1
FIG. 30: Install the cover assembly and tighten the four
socket head bolts to 17.0 to 18.4 Nm (12.5 to 13.5 lbf ft).
I-10746
FIG. 30
FIG. 31: Assemble the motor side shaft, consisting of the
shaft, ball bearing, and snap ring onto the case.
I-10747
FIG. 31
FIG. 32: Assemble the oil seal onto the case.
Install the outer snap ring.
I-10748
FIG. 32
FIG. 33: Insert the motor side thrust plate.
NOTE: Align the groove of the case and the lug of the
thrust plate.
I-10749
FIG. 33
4283359M1 06-13
FIG. 34: Install the thrust plate onto the swash plate.
NOTE: Apply hydraulic fluid on the sliding surfaces of the
thrust plates, before installing the cylinder block
assembly. Take care not to allow the pin to fall off.
I-10750
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Install the cylinder block assembly.
NOTE: Apply hydraulic fluid on the sliding surfaces of the
thrust plates, before installing the cylinder block.
I-10752
FIG. 35
FIG. 36: Install the two pins onto the case on the port
block side.
Position the spring into the case.
NOTE: Apply grease to the spring before assembly.
Apply grease to the surface of the case contacting the
gasket, and install the gasket.
NOTE: Apply grease to the surface of the case before
assembling the valve plates.
The surface with the V-notch should face the
engine side.
I-10753
FIG. 36
FIG. 37: Install the valves onto the port blocks.
NOTE: Apply grease to the valve before assembling.
Install the port block so that the pin of the case side fits
into the hole of the port block side.
NOTE: Install the spring and the valve.
Apply hydraulic fluid sufficiently on the sliding
surfaces of the cylinder block, before installing
the cylinder block.
I-10754
FIG. 37
06-14 4283359M1
FIG. 38: Install the eight socket bolts to a torque of 63.6
to 77.6 Nm (47.1 to 57.1 lbf ft).
I-10755
FIG. 38
FIG. 39: After assembling, make sure that the shafts
rotate smoothly by turning them with an adjustable
wrench.
I-10756
FIG. 39
Installation of HST Unit

FIG. 40: Attach the input shaft (7) to the HST unit (1).
Install an O-ring (10) to the HST input shaft and apply
grease on it.
9
Apply Loctite to the HST input shaft and the spline of the 7
input shaft.
Adjust the HST input shaft to coincide with the roll pin hole
of the pinput shaft.
Use the wire (9) to lock the roll pin. Double wire the wire. 10
1
I-10512
FIG. 40
4283359M1 06-15
FIG. 41: Bolt together the front transmission case and
bell housing case.
Use bolts (SM/M10X23) to install the shaft trunnion (5).
1
Apply screw locks and tighten them to a tightness of 56.9
to 68.7 Nm (42 to 51 lbf ft). 5
Drive the bush (35x39x20) (2) into the metal trunnion.
Install the oil seal (3) and apply the sealant to the contact 3
surface of the oil seal. 2
Apply silicone between the trunnion housing, (1) and the
transmission case.
I-10513
FIG. 41
06-16 4283359M1
Criteria For Replacing Worn Parts
Friction parts which have worn and exceed the specified
limit must be replaced with a new one.
Name Inspection Items Criteria for Correction or Replacement

When flaws, dents, or damage are found on
such surfaces, it is impossible to correct
these corresponding parts, so replace them
with new ones.
Friction surfaces of pistons and cylinder
The maximum clearance of the piston in the
block.
Piston cylinder bore is set at 0.025 mm (0.0010 in)
when shipped.
If the clearance exceeds 0.035 mm (0.0014
in), replace the piston set with a new one.
Piston sphere. When flaws, dents, or damage are found,
replace the piston with a new one.
When the stepped difference between the
friction surface and non-friction surface is in a
range of 0.005 to 0.010 mm, correct the
difference by lapping.
Cylinder Block Friction surface against valve plate. When the flaws, dents, or damage are found,
correct them by lapping.
If 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) of lapping cannot
correct the damage, replace the cylinder
block with a new one.
When the stepped difference between the
friction surface and non-friction surface is in a
range of 0.005 to 0.010 mm, correct the
difference by lapping.
Valve Plate Friction surface against cylinder block. When the flaws, dents, or damage are found,
correct them by lapping.
If 0.01 mm of lapping cannot correct the
damage, replace the cylinder block with a
new one.
Thrust Bearing Friction surface against piston. When pitting or flaking is found, replace the
bearing with a new one.
4283359M1 06-17
HST Cooler
FIG. 42: Detailed View of HST Oil Cooler
The HST oil cooler is located in front of the radiator.
(1) Out
1 2
(2) In
Cooling Surface Area: 0.5969 sq m (6.42 sq ft)
Cooling Efficiency: 2.44 Kw (3.27 hp/h)
Cooling performance: approximately 10 degrees C (50
degrees F)
d-12839
FIG. 42
06-18 4283359M1
HST Filter
4
3
1
2
d-12841
FIG. 43
FIG. 43: HST filter construction

(1) Bypass Valve
(2) In
(3) Out
(4) Filter
Filter Specifications
Filtration Area: 2300 sq cm (356.5 sq in)
Filtration Size: 10 micron
Opening Pressure of Bypass Valve: 0.17 mPa (24.7 psi)
If extreme pressure between IN and OUT is exceeds
more than 0.17 mPa (24.7 psi) by clogging, the bypass
valve will open and protect the filter.
NOTE: The HST filter is located on the left-hand side of
the tractor. Make sure not to confuse it with the
suction filter located on the right-hand side of the
tractor.
4283359M1 06-19
1 4
2 3
d-12843
FIG. 44
FIG. 44: HST Relief Valve

(1) Out
(2) Spring
(3) Popet
(4) In
Specifications:
Relief Pressure: Less than 1.76 MPa (255 psi) at 20 L/min
(5.3 gal/min) More than 1.27 MPa (184 psi) at 5 L/min (1.3
gal/min) at 50 degrees C (122 degrees F).
Operation Mechanism:
If a malfunction occurs in the HST charge circuit and the
pressure in the return circuit from the orbit roll exceeds
the setting pressure, the circuit is protected by the relief
valve. If the relief valve works, oil will push the popet up
and allow flow to the suction pipe
06-20 4283359M1
d-12842
FIG. 45
FIG. 45: Location of Relief Valve on the engine

(1) Sub Pump
(2) Return Circuit From the Orbit Roll
(3) Steering Orbit Roll Assembly
(5) Suction Pipe
4283359M1 06-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Counter
Measures
System will not Check Input Shaft not turn Repair or
operate in Replace
either direction
turn low
Vibration and Check oil level Fit to proper level
noise
turn low
Loss of power Check oil level Fit to proper level
good
Check linkage (HST defective Repair or
pedal to neutral holder) Replace
good low below
minimum allowable
limit
Check charge pressure Replace oil filter
cartridge
good high above defective
maximum
allowable limit
Check charge pressure Inspect charge Repair
relief (Flush)
good low below good
minimum allowable
limit
Check high relief Replace check Replace
pressure and high HST unit
pressure relief
valve
good good
Check high relief Replace HST unit
pressure
good no good good defective
Oil heat over Check oil level Inspect radiator net Reduce machine Check linkage Repair or
load (HST Pedal to replace
neutral holder)
good low below
minimum allowable
limit
Check charge pressure Replace oil filter
cartridge
good high above defective
maximum
allowable limit
Check charge pressure Inspect charge Repair
relief (Flush)
06-22 4283359M1
Problem Counter
Measures
good low below good
minimum allowable
limit
Check high relief Replace check Replace
pressure and high HST unit
pressure relief
valve
good good
Check high relief Replace HST unit
pressure
good good Defective
Oil heat over Check oil level inspect radiator net clean up or flush
good low
Oil heat over Check oil level Fit to proper level
defective
System Check HST pedal Repair or replace
operates in linkage
one direction
only
good defective
System Check HST pedal Replace check
operates in linkage and high
one direction pressure relief
only valve
4283359M1 06-23
HST SINGLE PEDAL MECHANISM
Pedal Components
d-13094
FIG. 46
FIG. 46: HST Pedal Components
06-24 4283359M1
d-13095
FIG. 47
FIG. 47: Cruise Control Components
4283359M1 06-25
d-13096
FIG. 48
FIG. 48: Cables
06-26 4283359M1
Link Movement During Forward Pedal
Operation
8
A
5
7
4
I-10514
FIG. 49
FIG. 49:
Step on the forward pedal (1).
During this time, the pedal shaft (to which the forward and
reverse pedals are attached and which has been forced to
the neutral position by its neutral cam (2) and the roller of
its neutral arm) overcomes the pushing force of the roller
and begins to turn clockwise.
This in turn causes the neutral spring (4) to stretch.
The action of the forward pedal shaft pulls rod A (which is
connected to the trunnion arm) (5), and through contact
with the trunnion arm, this action causes the trunnion
shaft (6) to turn clockwise.
During this time, the damper (7) shortens. (That is, the
tractor begins to move forward.)
When the forward pedal is depressed, this action turns
the reverse pedal (which is coupled to the forward pedal)
clockwise around the pedal shaft to raise the same pedal
(8).
4283359M1 06-27
14
15
10
13
I-10515
FIG. 50
FIG. 50: When the forward pedal is released, the action

of the neutral spring causes the neutral arm roller to push
the neutral cam (9) and thus the pedal shaft begins to turn
counterclockwise (10). As a result, rod A is pushed and
the trunnion shaft is pushed back to its neutral position
(12). The damper (13) secured by the trunnion shaft
stretches and this action prevents the sudden return of
the trunnion shaft and the forward pedal.
The counterclockwise rotation of the forward pedal shaft
(10) sets the forward pedal back to its neutral position
(14). At the same time, the reverse pedal which is coupled
to the forward pedal is also pushed back to its neutral
position (15).
06-28 4283359M1
FIG. 51: When the forward pedal is depressed to a
certain position and the cruise lever beside the operator 1
seat is locked, the brake connected to the lever begins to
operate to lock the counter shaft.
Rods A, B and C then lock the forward and reverse pedals
and the trunnion shaft to their predetermined positions.
The release of the lever causes the release of the forward 2
and reverse pedals.
(1) Cruise ON
(2) Cruise OFF
I-10516
FIG. 51
Link Movement During Reverse Pedal

Operation
FIG. 52: Step on the reverse pedal (1).
During this time, the pedal shaft (which the forward and 1
reverse pedals are attached and which has been forced to
the neutral position by its neutral cam (2) and the roller of
the neutral arm) overcomes the pushing force of the roller 6
and begins to turn counterclockwise. This in turn causes
the neutral spring to stretch (4)
A
The action of the reverse pedal shaft pushes rod A
(connected to the trunnion arm) (5) and through contact
with the trunnion arm, this action causes the trunnion
shaft (6) to turn counterclockwise. During this time, the 5
damper (7) elongates (That is, the tractor begins to move
backward).
When the reverse pedal is depressed, this action turns
7
2
the forward pedal (which is coupled to the reverse pedal)
counterclockwise around the pedal shaft and raises the
same pedal (8). 4 I-10514
FIG. 52
FIG. 53: When the reverse pedal is released, the action
of the neutral spring causes the neutral arm roller to push
the neutral cam (9) and thus the pedal shaft begins to turn
clockwise. As a result, rod A is pulled and the trunnion
shaft returns to its neutral position. The damper (13) A
secured by the counter shaft shortens and this action
prevents the sudden return of the trunnion shaft and the
reverse pedal.
Because the pedal shaft returns to its neutral position, the
reverse pedal also returns to its neutral position. At the
13
same time, the forward pedal which is coupled to the
reverse pedal is also set back to its neutral position. 9
I-10515
FIG. 53
4283359M1 06-29
FIG. 54: When the reverse pedal is depressed to a
certain position and the cruise lever beside the operator 1
seat is locked, the brake connected to the lever begins to
operate to lock the counter shaft.
Rods A and B then lock the forward and reverse pedals
and the trunnion shaft to their predetermined positions.
The release of the lever causes the release of the forward 2
and reverse pedals.
(1) Cruise ON
(2) Cruise OFF
I-10516
FIG. 54
06-30 4283359M1
Adjustment of HST Pedal
D B A
F C
I-10518
FIG. 55
FIG. 55: Adjust and install rod A to be 101.3 Nm (3.99

in).
Adjust and install rod B to be 101.3 Nm (3.99 in).
Install the reverse stopper bolt E to be 34.1 mm (1.34 in).
Adjust the forward stopper bolt D so that it makes contact
with the reverse stopper bolt at the maximum depression
position of the forward pedal. Half-turn the stopper bolt to
tighten it and lock the bolt with a nut.
Adjust rod C to a spring length of 135 to 140 mm (5.31 to
5.51 in).
HST Neutral Adjustment
When moving forward loosen bolt F and rotate the adjust
pin counterclockwise. Adjust the neutral position and then
lock bolt F.
When moving backwards loosen bolt F and rotate the
adjust pin clockwise.
Adjust the neutral position and then lock bolt F.
Adjust rod C again to a spring length of 135 to 140 mm
(5.31 to 5.51 in).
4283359M1 06-31
ADJUSTMENT OF SINGLE PEDAL
RELEASE MECHANISM OF CRUISE
CONTROL LEVER
42
D
A
C
G
F
H
E
I-10519
FIG. 56
FIG. 56: Adjust the cruise control lever first, then adjust
and lock the left and right brake pedal wires (D) at the
brake pedal side so both have a length of 13 mm (0.51 in).
Distance measured is bottom of nut to end of threads on
the cable side.
Adjust the F brake wire so that the E unit arm (cruise
left-hand and right-hand arms) is at the lower end.
Adjust the G wire of the cruise cable so that its length is
set to 0 mm.
Lower the pin H part of the arm (cruise right-hand). Adjust
the wire (I) so that the auto cruise lever has free play of 1
to 3 mm (0.040 to 0.12 in).
Check if the auto cruise lever returns to the OFF position
when both brake pedals are depressed.
06-32 4283359M1
When the auto cruise is OFF, adjust the height of the
cushion stopper (42) to be 25 mm (0.98 in).
NOTE: Cable (C) engages cruise control, cable (G)
disengages cruise control. Both brake pedals
have cruise control cable. Both brakes must be
pressed to disengage the cruise control.
Adjusting the Single Pedal Cruise Control

Lever
Lock using a disc spring bolt.
Set the length of the auto-cruise brake side wire (A) to be
10 mm (0.40 in).
Adjust and lock the C unit wire so that space of the lever
side B unit is set to 70 to 80 mm (2.75 to 3.15 in).
Adjustment of Single Pedal Auto

Acceleration Pedal
FIG. 57: Set the A unit of the cable (pedal/HST) to be 0
mm.
Adjust the wire so that the engine throttle unit makes
contact with the full throttle stopper when the HST forward
pedal is depressed to its maximum.
Check if the engine throttle unit makes contact with the
idling stopper when the HST pedal is in the neutral
position.
A
I-10520
FIG. 57
4283359M1 06-33
HST TWO PEDAL LINKAGE MECHANISM
1 2
3
4
12
5
6
11
10
8
7
9
d-13085
FIG. 58
FIG. 58: Dimensions of the HST Pedals

(1) Counter Shaft
(2) 100.3 to 102.3 mm (3.95 to 4.03 in)
Rod B
(3) Rod A 100.3 to 102.3 mm (3.95 to 4.03 in)
(4) HST Arm (Forward)
(5) HST Arm (Reverse)
(6) Trunnion Arm
(7) Rod C
(8) Rod D
(9) Bolt A
(10) Adjustment Pin
(11) Reverse Stopper Bolt
(12) Forward Stopper Bolt
06-34 4283359M1
Adjustment of the HST Pedals
Refer to Fig. 58
1) Adjust and install Rod A that connects trunnion arm
and arm (HST/ Forward)
Rod A Dimensions
100.3 to 102.3 mm (3.95
to 4.03 in)
2) Adjust and install Rod B that connects arm (HST/

Forward) and the counter shaft.
Rod B Dimensions
100.3 to 102.3 mm (3.95
to 4.03 in)
3) Install the stopper bolt/reverse so that the length is 32.1

mm (1.26 in)
Adjust the length of stopper bolt/forward so it is hit at the
maximum depression position of the forward pedal.
(Linkage hit stopper inside HST.)
Half-turn stopper bolt to tighten it and lock bolt with a nut.
4) Adjust rod D so that the spring length is 135 mm (5.31
in)
HST neutral adjustment
When moving forward.
Loosen bolt A and rotate the adjustment pin counter
clockwise.
Adjust the neutral position and then lock bolt A
When moving backwards
Loosen bolt A and rotate the adjustment pin clockwise.
Adjust the neutral position and then lock Bolt A
6) Adjust rod D again so that the spring length is 135 mm
(5.31 in).
7) Adjust rod C so that the positions of the arm
(HST/Forward) and arm (HST/Reverse) are the same at
neutral position.
8) Install pedal in arm (HST/Forward) and adjust it to the
upper part of elongated hole.
9) Install pedal in the arm (HST/Reverse) so that the
positions of both forward and reverse pedals are the
same.
4283359M1 06-35
Adjustment of Cruise Control - Two Pedal
FIG. 59: Adjust cruise control lever.
When the cruise control lever is in the OFF position, 1
adjust so that height of cushion rubber is 25 mm (0.98 in).
Tighten the lock nut after adjusting the height.
4
Adjust cable C so that the free play is 60 to 70 mm (2.40
to 2.75 in).
(1) Rubber Cushion
(2) Lock Nut 2
(3) Cable C 3
(4) Free Play: 60 to 70 mm (2.40 to 2.75 in) d-13086
FIG. 59
FIG. 60: Adjust the cable so that the length A is 10 mm
(0.40 in).
(1) Length Cable A: 10 mm (0.40 in)
(2) Cable D
1 2
d-13087
FIG. 60
06-36 4283359M1
4 5
6
d-13088
FIG. 61
FIG. 61: Adjust release system for cruise control lever.

Adjust the left-hand and right-hand side cable so that
cable D is 13 mm (0.51 in).
Adjust cable F so that arm E left-hand and right-hand is at
the lower end.
Adjust cable so that length G is 0 mm (0 in).
Lower pin H (right-hand) and adjust cable I so that cruise
control lever moves forward no further than 1 to 3 mm
(0.040 to 0.12 in).
Make sure that cruise control lever returns to the OFF
position when depressing brake pedal (coupled to the
left-hand and right-hand brake pedals.)
(1) 1 to 3 mm (0.040 to 0.12 in)
(2) Cable I
(3) Cable F
(4) Arm E
(5) Pin H
(6) G: 0 mm (0 in)
4283359M1 06-37
Adjustment of Two Pedal Auto Acceleration System
2
1
3
5
d-13089
FIG. 62
FIG. 62: Adjust cable so that length A is 0 mm (0 in).
Adjust cable so that the engine throttle unit makes contact
with stopper (Hi-idle) when HST forward pedal is
depressed to it’s maximum.
Make sure that the engine throttle unit makes contact with
stopper (Low-idle) when HST pedal is in the neutral
position.
(1) Idle (Low)
(2) Idle (High)
(3) Stopper (High Idle)
(4) Stopper (Low Idle)
(5) A: 0 mm (0 in)
06-38 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Adjusting the Cruise Control Lever .................... 06-33

Adjustment of Auto Gas Pedal ........................... 06-33
Adjustment of Cruise Control - 2 Pedal .............. 06-36
Adjustment of HST Pedal ................................... 06-31
Adjustment of Release
Mechanism of Cruise Control Lever .................. 06-32
Adjustment of the HST Pedals ........................... 06-35
Cruise Control Lever .......................................... 06-36
HST Single Pedal Mechanism ........................... 06-24

HST Test Procedures .......................................... 06-3
HST Two Pedal Linkage Mechanism ................. 06-34
Hydrostat
Assembly ........................................................ 06-12
Criteria For Replacing Worn Parts .................. 06-17
Disassembly ..................................................... 06-7
Hydrostatic Transmission ..................................... 06-1
Disassembly, Inspection, and Assembly .......... 06-7
Installation of HST Unit ...................................... 06-15
Link Movement during

Forward Pedal Operation ................................... 06-27
Link Movement during
Reverse Pedal Operation ................................... 06-29
Operation of Hydrostat Unit ................................. 06-1
Specifications of Hydrostat Unit ........................... 06-2
4283359M1 06-39
Index
NOTES
06-40 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
07 - Rear Axle and Brakes

Contents
REAR AXLE AND BRAKES
General Information ....................................................................................................................................... 07-1
Precautions for Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 07-3
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................................. 07-4
Brake ............................................................................................................................................................. 07-5
Brake Adjustment .................................................................................................................................... 07-6
Differential Lock ............................................................................................................................................. 07-7
Rear Axle Differential lock And Brake Disassembly ...................................................................................... 07-9
Trouble Shooting - Brakes ..................................................................................................................... 07-14
Rear Differential .................................................................................................................................... 07-15
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 07-17
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 07-17
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 07-21
4283359M1 07-i
Contents
07-ii 4283359M1
Rear Axle And Brakes
REAR AXLE AND BRAKES
GENERAL INFORMATION
The rear axle system is of the central axle type, which
contains the final reduction gears, differential gears,
differential-lock, and wet-type brakes.
The power from the engine is transmitted to the right and
left wheel pinions through the differential gears, and to the
rear wheels.
The differential-lock mechanism is housed in the
right-hand axle housing
The differential lock locks the differential gears by
depressing the differential-lock pedal and equalizing the
rotational speeds of both wheels.
4283359M1 07-1
17
1
16 1
12
15
11
14
7
9
13 8
4
5
3 10
6
I-10569
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: Rear Axle and Brakes (8) Wheel Gear

(1) Spiral Bevel Gear (10) Differential Lock Shifter
(2) Ring Gear (11) Differential Lock Shift Fork
(3) Differential Case Cover (12) Differential Lock Shaft
(4) Differential Case (13) Brake Disk
(5) Differential Pinion (14) Brake Plate
(6) Differential Side Gear (15) Brake Pressure Plate
(7) Wheel Pinion (16) Brake Cam
(9) Wheel Shaft (17) Brake Arm
07-2 4283359M1
8
7
9 10
1
6
2 11
4 9
I-10613
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Assembly precautions - rear axle. (6) Use driver to install the oil seal. Only apply pressure to
outer diameter of seal.
(1) Make sure to assemble the collar
(7) Use silicone between meeting surface of house.
(2) Tightening torque of nut: 78.5 to 98.0 Nm (57.9 to 72.3
lbf ft). (8) Set starting torque to 1.01 to 1.13 Nm (9 to 10 lbf in)
and stake pinion nut.
(3) Knock in edge of the nut to groove of the thread parts
and stake nut in place. (9) Grease seal lips.
(4) Tightening torque: 98.9 to 107.9 Nm (73 to 79 lbf ft) (10) Torque 8 mm bolts to 29.8 to 33.8 Nm (22 to 25 lbf ft)
with loctite. Torque 10 mm bolts to 69.1 to 77.3 Nm (51 to
(5) Location of assembling the spring plate is identical on 57 lbf ft) with loctite.
both sides.
(11) Set backlash to 0.15 to 0.25 mm (0.0060 to 0.010 in)
4283359M1 07-3
Special Tool
Rear Wheel Shaft Oil Seal
FIG. 3: Oil seal driver
I-10615
FIG. 3
Wheel Shaft Nut

FIG. 4: Tool/Adapter/Nut
I-10616
FIG. 4
Wheel Shaft Nut

FIG. 5: Tool/Nut/Wheel
I-10617
FIG. 5
07-4 4283359M1
BRAKE
I-10619
FIG. 6
I-10620
FIG. 7
FIGS. 6–7: Apply loctite® to bolt, (1). Left-hand and
right-hand actuators (2) are not interchangeable.
When installing brake disks, align holes and carved seals
on brake disks.
4283359M1 07-5
Brake Adjustment
FIG. 8: Unlatch pedals and check free-play of each
brake pedal. Correct free play (A) of each individual brake
pedal is 30 to 40 mm (1.18 to 1.60 in).
NOTE: Through use, free-play will increase and brake
balance will be affected. Adjust and balance
brakes before free-play is excessive. A
i-9044
FIG. 8
FIGS. 9–10: Loosen lock nut (1) right-hand thread, and
lock nut (2) left-hand thread. Adjust turnbuckle (3) so
free-play is correct for respective brake pedal. Repeat 2
procedure for the other brake so free-play in pedals is
equal. Secure lock nuts against turnbuckles.
When adjustment is complete, latch pedals together and 3
operate tractor at a low speed. Depress pedals. If tractor
has a tendency to pull to one side, slight readjustment of
one brake is required. 1
Make sure lock nuts are secured when brake adjustment
is complete. Check operation of parking brakes after
adjustment is made.
m
i-9047
CAUTION: Brakes must be adjusted evenly
to permit equal braking action at both rear FIG. 9
wheels when brake pedals are latched
together.
2
i-9046
FIG. 10
07-6 4283359M1
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
1
2
I-10622
FIG. 11
FIG. 11: Synchro shuttle, power shuttle, and power shift

(1) Adjust fulcrum of spring to inside.
(2) When assembling, adjust the pedal so it’s level.
Make sure of direction of the pin and PIN COMP
(3) Align factory match marks.
4283359M1 07-7
1 4
I-10623
FIG. 12
FIG. 12: HST Differential Lock

(1) Turn fulcrum of spring to inside
(2) Apply loctite®.
(3) Apply sealant to matching face.
(4) Align factory match marks.
07-8 4283359M1
REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK AND
BRAKE DISASSEMBLY
FIG. 13: Remove the rear axle case bolts and remove
the axle case.
N229087
FIG. 13
FIG. 14: To remove the bull gear, unstake the nut and
remove.
N229088
FIG. 14
FIG. 15: Remove bolts and separate spacer case from
rear mission case.
N229089
FIG. 15
4283359M1 07-9
FIG. 16: Remove spacer case.
N229090
FIG. 16
FIG. 17: Right hand side shown.
N229091
FIG. 17
FIG. 18: Remove the snap ring and pull the pinion
bearing assembly out of the spacer housing.
Remove the seal, snap ring and remove the brake shaft
from the spacer housing.
N229092
FIG. 18
07-10 4283359M1
FIGS. 19–20: Remove the differential lock, shift fork, and
shaft.
N229093
FIG. 19
N229094
FIG. 20
FIG. 21: Remove the brake discs and separator plates.
Check the brake discs and separator plates for abnormal
wear, cracks, etc., and replace as necessary.
The usable limit of the brake discs is 2.7 to 2.9 mm (0.10
to 0.11 in).
The usable limit of the separator plates is 2.52 to 2.68 mm
(.099 to 0.103 in).
NOTE: Immerse new brake discs in oil before installing.
N229096
FIG. 21
4283359M1 07-11
10
9
11
3
1 2 12 16
8
13 15
14
4
4 6 17
7
5
N229095
FIG. 22
FIG. 22: Differential Lock System

(1) Bolt
(2) Pin
(3) Cotter Pin
(4) Bushing
(5) Pedal
(6) Washer
(7) Snap Ring
(8) Plate
(9) Snap Ring
(10) Arm
(11) Oil Seal
(12) Snap Ring
(13) Right Hand Brake Housing
(14) Pin
(15) Shaft
(16) Shift Fork
(17) Differential Lock
07-12 4283359M1
18 19
23
22
17
20
21
16
9
8
9 11 15
3 8
12 13
10 7 14
1
2 4 7
6
5
N229097
FIG. 23
Brake System (12) Left Hand Brake Housing

(1) Pin Assembly (13) Oil Seal
(2) Bolt (14) Brake Arm
(3) Snap Ring (15) Snap Ring
(4) Brake Arm (16) Steel Ball
(5) Snap Ring (17) Brake and Actuator Plates
(6) Grease Fitting (18) Spring Pin
(7) Pin (19) Bolt
(8) Washer (20) Plate
(9) Cotter Pin (21) Spring
(10) Brake Rod (22) Bolt
(11) Brake Cam (23) Bracket
4283359M1 07-13
Trouble Shooting - Brakes
Problem Cause Countermeasure

Insufficient braking force Poorly adjusted pedal play Adjust pedal play
Oil leaks in brake chamber Repair or replace
Worn or seized lining Replace lining
Overheated brakes Excessive pedal play Adjust pedal play
Poorly centered brake shoes Adjust brake shoes
Improper brake operation Operate brakes properly
Unbalanced braking Improperly adjusted pedal play Adjust pedal play
Oil leaks in brake chamber Repair
Linings on one brake are worn or Replace linings
seized
Brake pedals do not return Broken return springs Replace
smoothly
Poorly lubricated moving parts Remove rust and lubricate properly
Abnormal noises Worn or damaged bearings Replace
Worn or damaged parts such as wheel Replace
gears, wheel pinions, wheel shafts,
etc.
07-14 4283359M1
Rear Differential
20 16
9 14
22
13
8 17
18
18
19
23 19
22
5
4 15 10
2
14
18
24
19 7
6
19
20 25 12
21 11
27 23 26
22
3 1
d-13785
FIG. 24
FIG. 24: Rear differential components (14) Differential Pinion

(1) Gear Set (15) Bevel Gear
(2) Nut (16) Bevel Gear 20T
(3) Bearing (17) Washer 43 x 58 x 01
(4) Bearing (18) Pinion Washer
(5) Pinion Support (19) Differential Pinion Shaft
(6) Flange Bolt (20) Shim
(7) Differential Case (21) Shim
(8) Differential Case (22) Washer 80 x 100 x 03
(9) Differential Bolt (23) Snap Ring
(10) Nut (24) Differential Cover
(11) Pin (25) Flange Bolt
(12) Bearing (26) Ring Gear
(13) Bearing (ring gear) (27) Pinion
4283359M1 07-15
FIG. 25: Split the tractor between the front and the rear
transmission housing. remove the range gears. remove
the lift cylinder housing. Remove the left-hand and
right-hand housing
N229091
FIG. 25
FIG. 26: Remove all of the differential case bearing
support bolts. Install push bolts as shown. Tighten the
push bolts evenly to remove the bearing supports. The
number of shims installed behind each bearing support
must be checked and recorded for later assembly.
NOTE: The pictures shown in the above figures are
incorrect, however the procedure is the same.
I3658
FIG. 26
FIG. 27: Remove the differential assembly (1) from the
rear transmission case. Remove the differential bearings, 3
(2) from both sides of the differential assembly. Remove 1
the bolts (3) from the case. Remove the ring gear (4) and
disassemble the differential (4). 4
2
2
d-13785
FIG. 27
FIG. 28: Remove the pinion support housing as an
assembly. Use a small chisel in the key way to un-stake
the pinion nut. remove the nut and bearings. Push the
pinion shaft out of the support housing to remove the front
bearing with a press.
I3661
FIG. 28
07-16 4283359M1
Inspection
Check all gears and shafts for damage.
Check pinion gears, pins and washers for excessive wear.
Make sure all bearings turn smoothly.
Make sure all seal lips and seal lip contact surfaces are in
good condition.
Assembly
FIG. 29: Pinion shaft assembly
Set starting torque to 1.02 to 1.18 Nm (0.75 to 0.87 lbf ft)
NOTE: Tighten pinion nut so that it takes 2 kg (4 lbs) of
force with a scale hooked to the bottom hole (1)
to turn the plate. This is equal to 1.02 to 1.18 Nm
(0.75 to 0.87 lbf ft) starting torque.
1
I-10618
FIG. 29
FIG. 30: Stake pinion nut after setting the rolling torque.
I3664
FIG. 30
FIG. 31: Assemble the differential bearing in reverse
order.
1
NOTE: Effective week 43 of 2007 production, the
diameter of the differential bolt (1) changed from
8 mm (0.31 in) to 10 mm (0.40 in) The 8 mm
(0.31 in) differential bolt is tightened to a torque of
29.8 to 33.9 Nm (22 to 25 lbf ft) with loctite.
Tightening torque for the 10 mm (0.40 in) is 69.1
to 77.3 Nm (51 to 57 lbf ft) with loctite.
d-13785
FIG. 31
4283359M1 07-17
FIG. 32: The pinion shaft and bearing (ring gear) are a
matched set. Adjust the backlash to 0.15 to 0.25 mm
(0.006 to 0.010 in). After adjustment, tap the outer
circumference of the bearing (ring gear) with a brass
hammer and make sure the backlash does not change.
Check the backlash at four points 90 degrees from each
other.
I5279
FIG. 32
FIG. 33: When the support (drive) pinion and bearing
(ring gear) are meshed correctly with each other and the
backlash is within the specified range, contact is in the
middle of the bearing (ring gear) tooth and is
approximately 75 percent of the total tooth width.
I3669
FIG. 33
FIG. 34: Excessive backlash - move differential case
shims from the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
I3670
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Insufficient backlash - move the pinion shaft
rearward closer to the bearing (ring gear).
I3671
FIG. 35
07-18 4283359M1
FIG. 36: Too little engagement - move pinion shaft
rearward closer to the bearing (ring gear).
I3672
FIG. 36
FIG. 37: Too mush engagement - move pinion shaft
forward away from the bearing (ring gear).
I3673
FIG. 37
4283359M1 07-19
NOTES
07-20 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Brake .................................................................... 07-5

Brake Linkage ...................................................... 07-6
Diff Lock ............................................................... 07-7
Rear Axle And Brakes .......................................... 07-1

Rear Axle and Brakes
General Information .......................................... 07-1
Rear Axle Differential Lock and Brake ................. 07-9
4283359M1 07-21
Index
NOTES
07-22 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
08 - Front Axle
Contents
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE (4WD) ..................................................................................................................................... 08-1
General Description ................................................................................................................................. 08-1
Front Axle Construction ................................................................................................................................. 08-2
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................. 08-3
Front Wheel Drive Shaft (4WD) ..................................................................................................................... 08-4
Removal and Installation ......................................................................................................................... 08-6
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 08-11
Front Differential .......................................................................................................................................... 08-12
Removal and Installation Pinion Carrier Assembly ............................................................................... 08-13
Overhaul ................................................................................................................................................ 08-14
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 08-14
Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 08-14
Differential Gears .................................................................................................................................. 08-16
Final Drive - Wheel ...................................................................................................................................... 08-18
Wheel Shaft Seal or Cover .......................................................................................................................... 08-20
Removal and Installation ....................................................................................................................... 08-20
Front Axle Center Section ............................................................................................................................ 08-22
Oil Seal on Front Axle Bracket ..................................................................................................................... 08-23
Final drive Case ........................................................................................................................................... 08-24
Disassembly, Inspection, and Assembly ............................................................................................... 08-24
Front Wheel Alignment ................................................................................................................................ 08-29
Toe in Adjustment - 4WD ...................................................................................................................... 08-29
Wheel Spacing ............................................................................................................................................. 08-30
Steering Free-Play ....................................................................................................................................... 08-30
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 08-33
4283359M1 08-i
Contents
NOTES
08-ii 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE (4WD)
General Description
D-14081
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: The 4WD front axle is a center-pivot, reverse

Eliot type. The front drive mechanism is incorporated as
part of the axle.
The front wheel drive axle is powered by the transmission.
The front axle differential divides the power to the left and
right sides, respectively.
The front wheels are driven by bevel gears which are
driven by input shafts. The 4WD mechanism with bevel
gears provides wider steering angles and greater
durability.
4283359M1 08-1
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE CONSTRUCTION
3 5
4
2
D-14081 D-14082
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Front Axle Components

The swing angle of the front axle is seven degrees.
(1) Front Final Case
(2) Front Differential
(3) Pivot Front
(4) Pivot Rear
(5) 4WD Drive Shaft
08-2 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Alignment
Toe-in.................................................................................................................................... 2 to 6 mm (0.08 to 0.24 in)
Front Axle
Front Wheel Steering Angles To Stop Bolt ................................................................................................. 56 Degrees
Front Wheel Bolt Torques................................................................................................................. 163 Nm (120 lbf ft)
Front Axle End Float ............................................................................................................ 0 to 0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in)
Front Axle Oscillation...................................................................................................................................... 7 degrees
Front Ring and Pinion Backlash................................................................................ 0.1 to 0.3 mm (.004 to 0.0012 in)
4283359M1 08-3
FRONT AXLE
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT (4WD)
3
2
1
2
3
8 7
6
4
10 9
I5285
I5285
FIG. 3
FIG. 3: Drive Shaft Component List.

1. Drive Shaft
2. Snap Ring
3. Coupling
4. Tube
5. Tube
6. O-Ring
7. O-Ring
8. Clamp
9. Clamp Bolt
10. Bolt
08-4 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
4 2
5
D-14069
FIG. 4
FIG. 4: 4WD Drive Shaft - Precautions for Assembly

Drive pinion gear start torque is 0.49 to 0.69 Nm (0.36 to
50 lbf ft) After setting the start torque, make sure of
caulking the nut.
(1) Apply the grease
(2) Apply grease and make sure of the direction of the
oil seal.
(3) Make sure the direction of the coupling.
(4) Front mission case
(5) Shaft (4WD)
FIG. 5: T1 - Dimension of the shim (basic dimension is
0.2 mm x 2 mm (0.008 x 0.08 in)
T2 - Dimension of the shim (basic dimension is 0.2 mm x
2 mm (0.008 x 0.08 in)
A) Dimension of fitting check
B) Measured dimension between outside of the bearing
and front edge of drive gear when sub assembling the
drive pinion gear (condition of adding the pressure to the
bearing.
Calculate the thickness of the shim for the front side of the
pinion gear by the following formula. And then, decide the
number of shims (T2=A+B - 63.85) D-14072
Calculate the thickness of the shim for the rear side of the FIG. 5
drive pinion gear by the following formula. T1= 0.8 - T2
If the snap ring will not assemble to the rear side of the
collar, adjust the thickness of the shim (T1).
4283359M1 08-5
FRONT AXLE
Removal and Installation
6
12
10
8
7 9
1 4 13
3
5
2
11
d-14088
FIG. 6
FIG. 6: Front Axle Component List:

1. Adjusting Bolt
2. Pivot Support
3. Bushing (62 x 67 x 20)
4. Oil Seal
5. Axle Housing
6. Bevel Gear Case Carrier
7. Bushing (65 x 70 x 44)
8. Rear Pivot Support
9. Bolt
10. Oil Ring
11. Cap
12. Shaft left-hand
13. Shaft, right-hand
08-6 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
Inspection
FIG. 7: Bevel Gear Housing Shaft Diameter
Measure diameter at a bushing contact point with a
micrometer or vernier calipers. Standard value is 65 mm
(2.559 in). If measured value is less then usable limit 64.9
mm (2.555 in), replace housing.
I3723
I3723
FIG. 7
FIG. 8: Bevel Case Bushing Bore
Measure bore diameter of bushing for pivot support with a
cylinder gauge or vernier calipers. Standard value is 65.1
mm (2.567 in). If measured value exceeds usable limit
65.2 mm (2.562 in), replace bushing.
I3722
I3722
FIG. 8
FIG. 9: Front Axle Shaft Diameter
Measure diameter at a bushing contact point with a
micrometer or vernier caliper. Standard value is 55 mm
(2.165 in). If measured value is less than usable limit 54.9
mm (2.161 in), replace center section.
I5421
I5421
FIG. 9
4283359M1 08-7
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 10: Front Axle Bushing Bore Diameter.
Measure bore diameter of bushing pivot support.
Standard value is 55.1 mm (2.169 in). If measured value
exceeds usable limit 55.2 mm (2.173 in), replace bushing.
Worn or damaged oil seals, O-rings, and bearings should
be replaced.
I3724
I3724
FIG. 10
08-8 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
C
A
4 1
3
D-14079
FIG. 11
FIG. 11: Construction

(1) Main Pump
(2) Sub Pump
(3) Tank
(4) Relief Pressure 6.9 mPa (1000 psi)
(A) OUT
(B) IN
(C) Left
(D) Right
(E) To Steering Wheel
4283359M1 08-9
FRONT AXLE
1
8
2
9 3
6
7 5
D-14076 D-14077
FIG. 12
FIG. 12: Hydraulic Steering Circuit

(1) Steering Controller
(2) To the Steering Wheel
(3) Steering Cylinder
(4) Delivery Pipe
(5) Suction Pipe
(6) Pump
(7) Tie Rod
(8) Right Turn Hose
(9) Left Turn Hose
08-10 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
Assembly
FIGS. 13–14: Coat oil seal, bushing contact surfaces,
bore surfaces, and O-rings with grease before assembly.
Install axle with pivot brackets. Use loctite on pivot bracket
hardware (1) and (3).
Lower tractor and remove the supports.
Install bushing with seam turned upward.
Do NOT use excessive force while installing bushing.
When fore-and-aft play of front axle exceeds usable limit
of 1 mm (.04 in), correct play by tightening adjustment bolt
(2). Proper end play is 0 to 0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in)
NOTE: After correcting pivot support and end play, J101539
tighten the lock nut of adjusting bolt to a torque of FIG. 13

117-136 Nm (87 - 101 lbf ft).
The reassembled front axle must rock smoothly while
pivoting.
Install tie-rods and adjust toe-in.
2 1
I3725
I3725
FIG. 14
4283359M1 08-11
FRONT AXLE
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL
2 5
6
6
5
1
12
13 7
18
16 3
14 8
4
10
10
11
15 17
d-14089
FIG. 15
FIG. 15: Front Differential

(1) Gear 10-30
(2) Bearing Assembly, Taper Roller
(3) Collar 48 x 52 x 17
(4) Nut
(5) Shim C
(6) Shim D
(7) Oil Seal
(8) Snap Ring
(9) Differential Case
(10) Differential pinion
(11) Bevel gear
(12) Pin
(13) Spring Pin
(14) Wire
(15) Bearing
(16) Bearing
(17) Snap Ring
(18) Snap Ring
08-12 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
Removal and Installation Pinion Carrier
Assembly
Disassembly
FIG. 16: Remove front axle.
Remove both wheels.
Remove drain plug from each final drive housing and
drain oil.
Remove both outer final drive assemblies from front axle.
NOTE: Shape of front axle does not allow oil to
completely drain out of differential area. Use a
drain pan to catch remaining oil when differential
is removed.
J101539
FIG. 16
FIG. 17: Remove right-hand and left-hand front axle
shafts. Remove nuts holding differential housing and
remove differential assembly.
NOTE: Adhesive used between axle and differential
housing forms a tight seal. It will be necessary to
use a dull chisel against raised area of differential
housing to drive sections apart.
I3728
I3728
FIG. 17
FIG. 18: Remove bolts from both differential carriers
(right-hand and left-hand) and push the carriers out with
push bolts (1).
NOTE: The number of shims installed and shim
thickness must be noted for reassembly.
I3729
I3729
FIG. 18
4283359M1 08-13
FRONT AXLE
Overhaul
FIG. 19: End play of bevel pinion should be checked
before disassembly. End play should be 0.008 mm (.0003
in)
If end play exceeds specified value, correct it by
shimming, when reassembling.
Available shims:
Shim A 0.2 mm (.008 in)
Shim B 0.1 mm (.004 in)
Remove snap ring.
Remove pinion and bearings as an assembly.
I3730
I3730
FIG. 19
Inspection
FIG. 20: Inspect pinion teeth for wear or damage.
Inspect bearings for wear or roughness.
Replace parts if necessary.
NOTE: Ring gear and pinion gear must be replaced in a
matched set.
I3731
I3731
FIG. 20
Assembly
Adjust bearing preload with nut on rear end of pinion
shaft.
Specified starting torque is 0.5 to 0.7 Nm (4.3 to 6 lbf in).
Specified end play 0 to 0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in).
FIG. 21: Install bearing cone (1) on pinion shaft. Make
sure bearing cone is seated at pinion. 6 3 8
Install cups (2) and spacer (3). 7
Install cone (4). 5
1
Install nut (5) and tighten until all end play is removed
between bearing cups (2) and cones (1) and (4).
Cups (2) and spacers (3) should still roll easily on cones
(1) and (4).
Install assembly in housing.
Install spacer (6) and snap ring (7).
7
Measure end play between snap ring (7) and spacer (6).
6 2 4
I3732a
FIG. 21
08-14 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 22: Check starting torque as shown with front seal
removed. It should be 0.6 to 0.7 Nm (5 to 6 lbf in). If
starting torque is not correct it will be necessary to
remove snap ring and pinion and readjust nut until correct
starting torque is obtained.
I3733
FIG. 22
FIGS. 23–24: When correct starting torque is obtained,
remove pinion assembly and stake nut (1). 2
NOTE: Do not stake nut near threads on shaft. Reinstall
pinion, spacer, and snap ring. Make sure end
play is within limits.
Lubricate lip on seal (2) and install up to surface (3).
3
I3734
I3734
FIG. 23
I3664
FIG. 24
4283359M1 08-15
FRONT AXLE
Differential Gears
Disassembly
FIG. 25: Remove the bearings (1).
Push carriers (5) out of the ring gear (2). 1 2
Remove the roll pin and wire (3) holding ring gear, and 4
remove ring gear.
Remove pins (4) holding differential bevel gears, and side 3
gears (6) the differential can be disassembled.
NOTE: Discard straight pins (4).
5 6
D-7718a
FIG. 25
Inspection
Inspect ring gear for wear or damage.
Inspect bearings for wear or roughness.
Replace parts if necessary.
NOTE: Ring gear and pinion are matched sets. If ring
gear is damaged both ring gear and pinion must
be changed.
Assembly
FIG. 26: Reverse procedures to assemble differential
with the following additional information.
Friction surfaces must be coated with grease.
NOTE: There is no shimming procedure for the ring gear
or differential.
1
When sub-assembling the differential, insert the spring
ring (1). The seam is installed in the direction of the
external force applied. After inserting the spring pin, retain
it with wire.
NOTE: Seam of the roll pin must face in the direction
which load is applied.
I5569
After installing the front axle on the axle bracket, adjust
the fore-and -aft play of the front axle to the specified FIG. 26
value.
08-16 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
Assembly
FIG. 27: Coat friction surfaces with grease.
1
Use new pins (1).
Index ring gear.
IMPORTANT: Ring gear must be indexed properly or
failure of spider gears will result. 2
Apply Loctite to nuts (2) and torque to 29 Nm (21 lbf ft).
Apply loctite to bolts (3) and torque to 59 Nm (43 lbf ft).
Install carrier bolts.
Make certain the backlash between differential pinions
and side gears is 0.1 to 0.2 mm (.004 to 0.008 in).
3
I3735
Install carrier in bevel gear case. FIG. 27

Replace thrust washer and/or gears as necessary.
FIG. 28: Check backlash between ring gear and pinion.
Backlash must be.1 to 0.2 mm (.004 to 0.008 in). Change
shim positions from one side of carrier to the other if
necessary.
NOTE: After installation, make sure that there is no
backlash deviation by tapping both sides of the
ring gear with a copper hammer. The backlash
should be checked at four different points.
I3736
FIG. 28
4283359M1 08-17
FRONT AXLE
FINAL DRIVE - WHEEL
15 13 1
14
12
11
10 3
9
4
8 5
7
d-14087
FIG. 29
FIG. 29: Final Drive Wheel Components

(1) Final Case
(2) Bevel Gear 11T
(3) Ball Bearing
(4) Snap Ring
(5) Seal Plug
(6) Snap Ring
(7) Bearing
(8) Snap Ring
(9) Bearing
(10) Ball Bearing
(11) Bevel Gear 17T
(12) Bevel Gear 11T
(13) Ball Bearing
(14) Snap Ring
(15) O-Ring
08-18 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
3
4
d-14087
FIG. 30
FIG. 30: Outer Housing Components

(1) Seal 72 x 08
(2) Wheel Shaft
(3) Wheel Cover
(4) Bearing
(5) Washer
(6) Snap Ring
(7) Seal Plug 65
(8) Housing
4283359M1 08-19
FRONT AXLE
WHEEL SHAFT SEAL OR COVER

FIG. 31: Block front axle up on side where cover will be
removed.
Remove wheel and tire.
3
Position an oil pan under housing and remove drain plug
to drain oil.
1
Remove cover bolts (1) and remove cover with axle hub
(2) gear (3) and bearing (4). 2
4
I5296
FIG. 31
FIG. 32: Use a puller (1) to remove the bearing and
bevel gear.
I-7824
FIG. 32
FIG. 33: Use a suitable puller to remove gear (2) and
bearing (1). 1 2
Remove split ring (3), washer (4), bearing (5), cover (6) 5
and seal (7). 7
NOTE: Round one piece split ring is difficult to remove.
Use snap ring pliers to spread it out until one end
can be pried up out of groove. The ring can then
be spiraled out with a pry bar.
3
This round one-piece split ring must be discarded and a 4
new one installed on reassembly.
The two piece split ring will replace the round, one-piece 6
split ring (3). I5294
FIG. 33
08-20 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 34: Check bearings and replace if they have
excessive play or are rough.
Install a suitable sealant on outside of seal housing and
1
install seal (1).
I5295
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Check surface where seal seats on hub (2).
Replace hub if surface is damaged. 7
Grease inside of seal and install cover on hub, with 3
bearing (4) spacer (5) and snap ring (6) followed by gear
(3) and second bearing (4). 4
1
Apply gasket eliminator or sealant to housing (8) and
install cover carefully on dowel pins (7). 2
Install and torque bolts (1) to 18 to 29 Nm (14 to 22 lbf ft). 8 4
6
5
I5296
FIG. 35
FIG. 36: When replacing the shaft seals on the rotation
parts of the final drive case and wheel shaft, never hit the
flange surfaces of the sleeve. Damaged flange surfaces
will cause oil leaks.
(1) Improper
(2) Proper
1 2
i5568
FIG. 36
4283359M1 08-21
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 37: Install drain plug (3).
Install wheel with tire and torque wheel bolts to 88 to 108
Nm (65 to 80 lbf ft).
Lower tractor to level front axle. 2 1
Remove level plug (1) and fill plug (2).
Add oil until oil level reaches the bottom of level plug hole
or until oil level is halfway up the axle shaft when viewed
through the fill hole.
3
I-6187a
FIG. 37
FRONT AXLE CENTER SECTION

FIG. 38: Remove front axle and axle brackets from
tractor.
1
Remove front differential and outer final drive assemblies.
Remove oil fill plug (1).
Install new center section, and install oil fill plug (1).
Reverse procedures to reassemble and install axle.
I5302
FIG. 38
08-22 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
OIL SEAL ON FRONT AXLE BRACKET

FIG. 39: Remove front axle and axle brackets from
tractor.
Remove seal (1) from rear casting.
1
Measure pivot shaft and bushing diameter. Replace if
necessary.
Replace seal (1) in pivot.
Grease lips on seal and reinstall axle on pivot.
Reverse procedures to install axle.
I5303
FIG. 39
4283359M1 08-23
FRONT AXLE
FINAL DRIVE CASE
Disassembly, Inspection, and Assembly

FIG. 40: Drain oil. Remove the tire on the side of which
final case is to be disassembled.
NOTE: Support the tractor front with a suitable jack
stand.
m
CAUTION: Do not damage the O-ring.
Never attempt to insert the blade of a
screwdriver between the contact surfaces
of the final case and axle end.
I-7625
FIG. 40
FIG. 41: Remove the final case (1) from the axle end (2).
Separate the wheel cover from the final case. 1
I-7638
FIG. 41
FIG. 42: Remove dust cover (1).
1
HB04538
FIG. 42
08-24 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 43: Remove the snap ring (1).
HB04539
FIG. 43
FIG. 44: Remove the bearing (1) and the bevel gear
(11T) (2) from final case B (3).
3
HB04540
FIG. 44
FIG. 45: Remove the snap ring (1), and bearing (2) from
final case A (3). 3
HB04543
FIG. 45
FIG. 46: Remove the bevel gear (17T) (1) from final case
A (2).
2
1
HB04545
FIG. 46
4283359M1 08-25
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 47: Divide final case into final case A, (1), and final
case B, (2). The final case pivot seal can be accessed at 2
this point. 1
NOTE: Seal must be discarded and replaced when
assembled.
I-7647
FIG. 47
Inspection
Inspect seals, dust covers, O-rings, snap rings and
bearings. Replace all seals and O-rings prior to assembly.
Replace damaged dust covers, damaged snap rings and
rough bearings.
Assembly
Reassemble the parts in reverse order of disassembly,
following these instructions.
Apply a silicone sealant to the following parts:
Contact surfaces between the final case B and wheel
shaft cover.
Contact surfaces between the final case A and bearing
cover.
Contact surfaces between the final case A and front axle
housing.
When installing expansion plug into bottom of final drive
apply a sealant to outer circumference of expansion plug.
FIG. 48: When installing unitized seals on the wheel
shaft cover and the rotating part between the final drive
housing, apply force only to the outer circumference of the 1 2 1
seal as shown at (1). 2
Do not damage the seal retainer at position (2).
The installed wheel shaft must turn smoothly.
The oil seals must be coated with grease in advance.
Install them, assuring that their lips are not turned over.
The reassembled final drive housing must turn smoothly
until it makes contact with the stop.
When the wheel tire is reinstalled, turn the wheel by hand I3752
to make sure that all the mechanism turns smoothly with
out making any noise. FIG. 48
Wheel clamping torque 88 to 108 Nm

(65 to 80 Ibf ft)
After adjustment of the toe in, perform road test. There

must be no abnormalities such as vibration, abnormal
noises, deflected steering wheel operation, etc.
08-26 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
FIG. 49: When installing unitized seals, apply force only
to the outer circumference of the seal as shown (1). Do 1 1
not apply pressure to the outer surface.
The installed wheel shaft must turn smoothly.
Reinstall parts in reverse order of assembly. Use gasket
eliminator between all housings. Apply adhesive to plugs
prior to installing them into the bottom of the housing.
I5308
FIG. 49
FIG. 50: The flat-seat thrust bearing, as shown, must be
installed with the larger bore side turned downwards. Also
install the ball-cage assembly as shown in the figure.
The oil seals must be coated with grease in advance.
Then install them carefully, assuring that their lips are not
turned over.
The reassembled final housing must turn smoothly until it
makes contact with the stop.
When the wheel (tire) is reinstalled, turn it by hand to
make sure that all the mechanism turns smoothly without
making any noise.
After adjustment of toe-in, perform road tests. I5309
There must be no abnormalities such as vibration, or FIG. 50

abnormal noises.
Steering wheel operation must be normal.
4283359M1 08-27
FRONT AXLE
10 12
11
13
2 14
3
4
19
7 5 14 20
20
8 18
6 16 15
17
9
D-14078
FIG. 51
FIG. 51: Front Axle: Precautions for Assembly. (11) Vibration of the front and the rear of front axle 0 to
0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in).
(1) When assembling, use the jig for applying pressure.
(12) Cap Blank
(2) Oscillation 7 to 9 inches
(13) Apply Adhesive l 324.
(3) Groove for identification.
(14) Apply Grease.
(4) Install the O-ring and apply grease to the final case
and housing axle. (15) Backlash 0.1 to 0.3 mm (0.004 to 0.012 in).
(5) When assembling avoid excessive force to avoid (16) Make sure to assemble in the correct direction of
damage. the oil seal.
(6) Backlash 0.15 to 0.25 mm (0.006 to 0.010 in). (17) A portion with the gap of the pin is inserted in the
direction of the load.
(7) Make sure to install the washer / two positions of
facing (final case and wheel cover). (18) After installing the pin install the center to avoid
cutting off pin.
(8) Apply adhesive
(19) Drive Pinion: Torque 0.49 to 0.69 Nm (0.36 to 0.50
(9) Toe in
lbf ft) Secure nut after starting torque setup.
(10) Cap Blank
(20) Make sure the oil seal is being inserted in the
correct direction.
08-28 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
1
5
4
3
2
MFC4594
FIG. 52
FIG. 52: Tie Rod Assembly (4WD)

(1) Cylinder
(2) Steering Joint
(3) Lock Nut
(4) Tie Rod
(5) Castle Nut
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Toe in Adjustment - 4WD

FIG. 53: Correct toe-in dimension of front wheels (A
minus B) is 2 to 6 mm (0.08 to 0.24 in). 5
NOTE: Measure toe-in from tire center to tire center at a
point halfway up on face of each tire.
3 3
To adjust, remove clip securing rubber boot to tie rod (3). 1 1
Loosen lock nut (2) and rotate the tie rod (3) to adjust. Tie
rod ball joints (1) must freely rotate in cylinder ends.
Adjust each side evenly. Ball joints must move freely after
lock nuts are tightened. 2 2
4
I5262
FIG. 53
4283359M1 08-29
FRONT AXLE
WHEEL SPACING
FIG. 54: When installing ring (1) on front wheels, make
sure ring is installed as shown.
NOTE: Ring is not required with R-4 (industrial tread) 1
wheels.
STEERING FREE-PLAY
I5263
FIG. 54
FIG. 55: Steering should be checked for excessive

looseness, as indicated by steering wheel free-play.
Maximum free-play (1) is approximately 30 mm (1.25 in) 1
when measured at outside of steering wheel rim.
Excessive free-play can be caused by:
• Loose or worn ball joints.
• Worn or damaged steering column shaft/universal
joints.
• Air in steering system.
• Worn or damaged power steering unit. I-7788
FIG. 55
08-30 4283359M1
FRONT AXLE
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems and Probable Causes Corrections

Steering Wheel Hard to Turn:
Too low tire inflation. Correctly inflate tires.
Broken thrust bearing. Replace.
Stuck or broken ball joint on the rod. Grease or replace.
Seizure or poor lubrication of axle end bushing. Grease or replace.
Vibration or Pulling Steering Wheel:
Unbalanced wheels. Adjust balance.
Wheel deflection. Repair or replace.
Unequal diameter of both tires. Adjust inflation or replace.
Loose, worn, or damaged axle bearings. Repair or replace.
Loose, worn or damaged steering wheel shaft. Retighten or replace.
Worn final drive bushing (4WD). Replace
Loose final housing front axle bolts. Retighten.
Loose front wheel (tire) nuts. Retighten.
Steering wheel tends to turn to right or left while traveling on straight paved road:
Deflected wear of tire. Replace.
Different tire diameters. Adjust inflation or replace.
Damaged final case bearing. Replace.
Excessive or Eccentric Wear of Tire:
Improper tire inflation. Adjust.
Worn front wheel shaft bearing. Replace.
Poorly adjusted toe-in. Readjust correctly: 2 to 6 mm (.08 to.24 in)
Front wheel drive is always engaged (4WD). Engage FWD only when required.
Noise:
Loose fasteners. Tighten correctly to specified torque.
Worn or damaged final case spindle bearing. Replace.
Worn bushing. Replace.
Wear or poor movement of tie-rod end. Lubricate or replace.
Excessive backlash of differential and bevel gear Adjust bevel gear.
(4WD)
Different Steering Angles in Both Directions:
Length of RH and LH tie-rods are different. Adjust.
4283359M1 08-31
FRONT AXLE
NOTES
08-32 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Final Drive - Wheel ............................................ 08-18

Final drive Housing ............................................ 08-24
FRONT AXLE ...................................................... 08-1
Front Axle
Removal and Installation .................................. 08-6
Specifications .................................................... 08-3
Troubleshooting .............................................. 08-31
FRONT AXLE (4WD) ........................................... 08-1
Front Axle Center Section .................................. 08-22
Front Axle Construction ....................................... 08-2
Front Differential ................................................ 08-12
Front Wheel Alignment ...................................... 08-29
Front Wheel Drive Shaft (4WD) ........................... 08-4
Oil Seal on Front Axle Bracket ........................... 08-23
Removal and Installation Pinion Carrier Assembly ......

08-13
Steering Free-Play ............................................. 08-30
Wheel Shaft Seal or Cover ................................ 08-20

Wheel Spacing ................................................... 08-30
4283359M1 08-33
Index
NOTES
08-34 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
09 - Hydraulics
Contents
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................. 09-1
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Hydraulic Circuit ............................................................................................................................................. 09-3
COMPONENT LOCATION
Synchro Shuttle ............................................................................................................................................. 09-7
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
Hydraulic Diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 09-11
Synchro Shuttle Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 09-11
PowerShuttle ......................................................................................................................................... 09-12
COMPONENT BREAKDOWNS
General Description ..................................................................................................................................... 09-15
Suction Filter ......................................................................................................................................... 09-15
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-15
Operation Mechanism ........................................................................................................................... 09-16
Transmission Filter ................................................................................................................................ 09-16
Gear Pump .................................................................................................................................................. 09-17
Parts and Hydraulic Diagram ................................................................................................................ 09-17
Sub Pump .............................................................................................................................................. 09-18
Main Relief Valve ......................................................................................................................................... 09-19
Steering Orbit Roll ....................................................................................................................................... 09-21
Hydraulic Diagram ................................................................................................................................. 09-21
Power Steering Cylinder .............................................................................................................................. 09-22
Detail View and Specifications .............................................................................................................. 09-23
HST Oil Cooler (Hydro Transmission Only) ................................................................................................. 09-25
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-25
HST Charge Filter (Hydro Transmission Only) ............................................................................................ 09-26
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-27
HST Relief Valve (Hydro Transmission Only) .............................................................................................. 09-28
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-28
HST Unit (Hydro Transmission Version) ...................................................................................................... 09-29
4283359M1 09-i
Contents
VALVES
Main Control Valve ...................................................................................................................................... 09-31
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-32
Neutral Position ..................................................................................................................................... 09-33
Up Position ............................................................................................................................................ 09-34
Up Position to Neutral Position .............................................................................................................. 09-35
Down Position ....................................................................................................................................... 09-36
Slow Return Valve and Safety Valve ..................................................................................................... 09-37
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-37
Safety Valve .......................................................................................................................................... 09-37
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-38
Main Cylinder ........................................................................................................................................ 09-39
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-39
PTO Control Valve (STANDARD and HST Transmission Version) ............................................................. 09-40
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-40
PTO Control Valve (POWER SHUTTLE) .................................................................................................... 09-41
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-42
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-42
Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 09-42
Reduce Valve (Power Shuttle) .............................................................................................................. 09-43
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-43
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-43
Power Shuttle Control Valve ........................................................................................................................ 09-44
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-45
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-45
Joystick Valve .............................................................................................................................................. 09-51
Detail View ............................................................................................................................................ 09-52
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-52
Detail of Valve ....................................................................................................................................... 09-53
Couplers for Front Loader ..................................................................................................................... 09-60
External Auxiliary Hydraulics ....................................................................................................................... 09-61
Divertor Plug ................................................................................................................................................ 09-65
Assembling Of Outlet Of Auxiliary Hydraulics .............................................................................................. 09-66
Caution ........................................................................................................................................................ 09-66
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 09-67
Suction Filter ......................................................................................................................................... 09-67
Gear Pump ............................................................................................................................................ 09-67
Main Relief Valve .................................................................................................................................. 09-67
Main Control Valve ................................................................................................................................ 09-68
Slow Return Valve ................................................................................................................................. 09-68
Safety Valve .......................................................................................................................................... 09-68
Main Cylinder ........................................................................................................................................ 09-69
Lift Assist Cylinder ................................................................................................................................. 09-70
PTO Valve (for Standard and HST Version) ......................................................................................... 09-70
Reduce Valve ........................................................................................................................................ 09-71
PTO Valve (for Power Shuttle) .............................................................................................................. 09-72
Power Shuttle Valve .............................................................................................................................. 09-73
Joy Stick Valve ...................................................................................................................................... 09-74
09-ii 4283359M1
Contents
External Hydraulic Pressure Removal ................................................................................................... 09-77
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LINKAGE

External Auxiliary Hydraulics Link and Lever ............................................................................................... 09-79
Linkage Components ............................................................................................................................ 09-79
Joystick Link and Lever ............................................................................................................................... 09-80
Parts ...................................................................................................................................................... 09-80
Front View ............................................................................................................................................. 09-83
Three Point Position Control Link and Lever ............................................................................................... 09-85
Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ 09-87
Draft Control Link and Lever ........................................................................................................................ 09-89
Parts Components ................................................................................................................................. 09-89
Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ 09-90
THREE POINT LIFT LINKAGE

Three Point Linkage ..................................................................................................................................... 09-93
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 09-94
TROUBLESHOOTING HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS

Troubleshooting Examples .......................................................................................................................... 09-95
For Example .......................................................................................................................................... 09-95
Cause and Disposition ................................................................................................................................. 09-98
Check 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 09-98
Check 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-100
Check 3 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-101
Check 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-102
Check 5 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-103
Check 6 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-105
Check 7 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-106
Check 8 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-107
Check 9 ............................................................................................................................................... 09-108
Check 10 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-109
Check 11 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-110
Check 12 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-111
Check 13 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-112
Check 14 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-113
Check 15 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-114
Check 16 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-115
Check 17 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-116
Check 18 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-117
Check 19 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-118
Check 20 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-119
Check 21 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-119
Check 22 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-120
Check 23 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-121
Check 24 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-121
Check 25 ............................................................................................................................................. 09-122
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................... 09-123
4283359M1 09-iii
Contents
NOTES
09-iv 4283359M1
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
MF1533 1540, MF1533 1540, ST34 MF1533 1540, ST34 41,

ST34 41, MT265B 41, MT265B 275B MT265B 275B
275B Synchro Power Shuttle
Shuttle Hydro
Type 821 XL, Permatran III or equivalent

Oil Viscosity Contain VG56
Capacity 31 liter (32.75 qts.) 28 liters (29.6 qts)
Type Gear Pump
Model / Direction of KP05-L
Rotation
Manufacturer KYB
Gear Ratio 0.912
13.2 cc/rev
Main Pump 10.8 l/min (2.8 10.8 l/min (2.8 10.8 l/min (2.8 gal/min) @
gal/min) @ 900 rpm gal/min) @ 900 rpm 900 rpm
31.3 l/min (8.3 31.3 l/min (8.3 31.3 l/min (8.3 gal/min) @
Output gal/min) @ 2600 gal/min) @ 2600 rpm 2600 rpm
rpm
gal/min) @ 2860 gal/min) @ 2860 rpm 2860 rpm
rpm
Location Engine Right - Hand Rear
Type Gear Pump
Model / Direction of GPL1-71R GPL1-87R GPL1-71R
Rotation
Manufacturer ISEKI
7.1 cc/rev
5.8 l/min (1.5 7.1 l/min (1.9 gal/min) 5.8 l/min (1.5 gal/min) @
Sub Pump gal/min) @ 900 rpm @ 900 rpm 900 rpm
Output gal/min) @ 2600 gal/min) @ 2500 rpm 2600 rpm
rpm
gal/min) @ 2860 gal/min) @ 2750 rpm 2860 rpm
rpm
Location Engine Right - Hand Front
Type Direct (with Dumper)
Model PVR1-004-070
Main Relief Manufacturer Iseki
Relief Set Pressure 15.7 mPa (2277.092 psi) at 22 L/min (5.8 gal/min)
Location MID - Case - Right Hand
4283359M1 09-1
Specifications
MF1533 1540, MF1533 1540, ST34 MF1533 1540, ST34 41,
ST34 41, MT265B 41, MT265B 275B MT265B 275B
275B Synchro Power Shuttle
Shuttle Hydro
Type Mechanical
Model DVS2-014-020
Main Control Manufacturer Iseki

Valve Maximum Flow 45 L/min (11.88 gal/min)
Leak 4 cc/min
Location Cylinder Case
Bore X 85 X 111 mm (3.35 X 4.37 in)
Cylinder Stroke
Capacity 630 cc (21.3 ounces)
Lift Crank 100 mm (39.37 in)
Lift Arm 245 mm (9.65 in)
Main Cylinder Worked Angle of -9 + 57 degrees
Lift Arm
Lift Shaft Diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)
Type Mechanical Adjustment
Slow
Return Model FVM2-002-020
Valve
Leak 4 cc/min (0.141 ounces/min)
Type Direct
Safety Valve Model PVR1-006-010
Relief Set Pressure 20.1 mPa (2915.26 psi)
Type Mechanical
Model DVS2-005-030
Outlet Plug Size 3/8 quick
For Spool 4 Position with Speed Increasing Dump
Joy - Stick Bucket Type
For Spool 4 Position with Free Flow
Boom Type
Maximum Flow 45 L/min (11.88 gal/min)
Leak 7 cc/min (.25 ounce/min)
09-2 4283359M1
Hydraulic Circuit
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
5 6
7
8 9
3 4
2
1 17
10
18
23 15
22
14
21 13 12
16
24 20
19
11
I-10768
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: Hydraulic Circuit (Synchro Shuttle) (12) Sub Pump

(1) Safety Valve (13) Main Pump
(2) Assist Cylinder only *1 (14) Pressure Proportional Valve
(3) Main Cylinder (15) PTO Clutch
(4) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option)(Max (16) L/C Filter
Double Valve)
(17) Boom Cylinder
(5) External Auxiliary Cylinder
(18) L/C Filter
(6) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics Valve (Option: cut-off
plug) (19) PTO Control Valve
(20) Main Relief Valve
(7) Joystick Valve
(8) Bucket Cylinder (21) Flow Priority Valve
(9) Power Steering (22) Relief Valve

(23) Slow Return Valve
(10) Orbit Roll
(11) Suction Filter (24) Main Control Valve
4283359M1 09-3
Hydraulic Circuit
5 8
4 7 9 12
2 3 11 13
10
1
18
14
17
23
26
25 22
19 16 15
24 20
27 21
I-10769
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Hydraulic Circuit - Power Shuttle (13) Power Shuttle Clutch

(1) Safety Valve (14) Relief Valve
(2) Assist Cylinder only *1 (15) Pressure Proportional Valve for Power Shuttle
(3) Main Cylinder (16) Pressure Proportional Valve for PTO
(4) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option)(Max (17) Front Rear Valve
Double Valve)
(18) L/C Filter
(19) L/C Filter
plug) (20) Sub Pump
(21) Suction Filter
(7) Joystick Valve
(8) Bucket Cylinder (22) Reduce Valve
(9) Boom Cylinder (23) Orbit Roll

(24) Main Pump
(10) Power Steering
(11) PTO Clutch (25) Main Relief Valve
(12) Power Shuttle and PTO Valve (26) Slow Return Valve
(27) Main Control Valve
09-4 4283359M1
Hydraulic Circuit
4
5 7 8
9
2 10
3
25
11
1
26
12
13
21 20 14 15
24
27
22 19
18 17
23 28
16
I-10771
FIG. 3
FIG. 3: Hydraulic Circuit - Hydrostat (14) Pressure Proportional Valve

(1) Safety Valve (15) Sub Pump
(2) Assist Cylinder only *1 (16) Suction Filter
(3) Main Cylinder (17) Main Pump
(4) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option)(Max (18) L/C Filter
Double Valve)
(20) Relief Valve
plug) (21) Slow Return Valve
(7) Joystick Valve
(8) Bucket Cylinder (23) PTO Control Valve
(9) Power Steering (24) Flow Priority Valve

(10) Orbit Roll
(11) Boom Cylinder (26) HST Oil Cooler
(12) L/C Filter (27) HST ASSY

(13) PTO Clutch
4283359M1 09-5
Hydraulic Circuit
09-6 4283359M1
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
SYNCHRO SHUTTLE
25
24 20
17 18
16 6 19
14
23
13
21
11
12 2
15
1
6 5 22
7 3
8
I-10764
FIG. 4
FIG. 4: Synchro Shuttle (13) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics

(1) Main Pump (14) External Auxiliary Hydraulics Lever
(2) Sub Pump (15) Main Control Valve
(3) Suction Pipe (16) Slow Return Valve
(4) Suction Filter (17) Cylinder Case
(5) Delivery Pipe (18) Safety Valve
(6) PTO Control Valve (19) Orbit Roll
(7) Main Relief Valve (20) Power Steering
(8) Joy Stick Valve (21) High Pressure Pipe for Power Steering
(9) Joy Stick Coupler (22) Return Hose for Power Steering
(10) Joy Stick Lever (23) Hose for Power Steering
(11) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics Valve (Option) (24) Assist Cylinder
(12) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option) (25) Hose for Assist Cylinder
4283359M1 09-7
Component Location
17
18 29 28 20
16
24 17 19
14 23
27
26
11
13 21
7 9 2
12
15 8 7 3 5 1 22
6
I-10765
FIG. 5
FIG. 5: Power Shuttle (15) Main Control Valve

(1) Main Pump (16) Slow Return Valve
(2) Sub Pump (17) Cylinder Case
(3) Suction Pump (18) Safety Valve
(4) Suction Filter (19) Orbit Roll
(5) Delivery Pipe (20) Power Steering
(6) Relief Metal (21) High Pressure Pipe for Power Steering
(7) Main Relief Valve (22) Return Hose for Power Steering
(8) Joy Stick Valve (23) Hose for Power Steering
(9) Joy Stick Coupler (24) Assist Cylinder
(10) Joy Stick Lever (25) Hose for Assist Cylinder
(11) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics Valve (Option: cut-off (26) Reduce Valve
plug
(27) Control Pipe
(12) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option)
(28) Power Shuttle and PTO Valve
(13) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics
(29) Pipe for PTO
(14) External Auxiliary Hydraulics Lever
09-8 4283359M1
Component Location
25
18 6 27 20
24 17
16 30 29
19
14
23
13
11
4 9 26
12
15
6 8
7 3 5 28 22
I-10767
FIG. 6
FIG. 6: Hydrostatic (15) Main Control Valve

(1) Main Pump (16) Slow Return Valve
(2) Sub Pump (17) Cylinder Case
(3) Suction Pipe (18) Safety Valve
(4) Suction Filter (19) Orbit Roll
(5) Delivery Pipe (20) Power Steering
(6) PTO Control Valve (21) High Pressure Pipe for Power Steering
(7) Main Relief Valve (22) Return Hose for Power Steering
(8) Joy Stick Valve (23) Hose for Power Steering
(9) Joy Stick Coupler (24) Assist Cylinder
(10) Joy Stick Lever (25) Hose for Assist Cylinder
(11) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics Valve (Option: cut-off (26) HST Oil Cooler
plug)
(12) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve (Option)
(13) Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics
(29) HST Inlet Pipe
(14) External Auxiliary Hydraulics Lever
(30) HST Outlet Pipe
4283359M1 09-9
Component Location
NOTES
09-10 4283359M1
Hydraulic Diagram
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
Synchro Shuttle Diagram
2 5 6
3 4
7
1
8
9
14
15
13
10
11
16
18
12
17
I-10772
FIG. 7
FIG. 7: Synchro Shuttle (10) Orbit Roll

(1) Joystick Valve (11) Sub Pump
(2) To Front Loader Cylinder (12) Suction Filter
(3) To External Auxiliary Cylinder (13) Main Pump
(4) Safety Valve (14) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve
(5) Slow Return Valve (15) PTO Control Valve
(6) Main Cylinder (16) L/C Filter
(7) Assist Cylinder (17) PTO Clutch
(8) Main Control Valve (18) Main Relief Valve
4283359M1 09-11
Hydraulic Diagram
PowerShuttle
2 7 8
4 5 6
3
9
12
1
16 13
15
14
10
21 18
19 11
17
22
20
I-10773
FIG. 8
FIG. 8: Power Shuttle (12) L/C Filter

(1) Joystick Valve (13) Assist Cylinder
(2) To Front Loader Cylinder (14) Power Steering Cylinder
(3) To External Auxiliary Cylinder (15) Reduce Valve
(4) Safety Valve (16) Main Control Valve
(5) Slow Return Valve (17) Sub Pump
(6) Main Cylinder (18) L/C Filter
(7) L/C Filter (19) Main Pump
(8) Power Shuttle Clutch (20) Suction Filter
(9) Valve for Power Shuttle and PTO (21) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve
(10) PTO Clutch (22) Main Relief Valve
(11) Orbit Roll
09-12 4283359M1
Hydraulic Diagram
2
8
5
4 6
3
13 11
9
14
1 10
22 15
12
20
21 19
7
18
17 16
I-10775
FIG. 9
FIG. 9: Hydrostatic (12) Orbit Roll

(1) Joystick Valve (13) Main Control Valve
(2) To Front Loader Cylinder (14) Auxiliary Hydraulics Control Valve
(3) To External Auxiliary Cylinder (15) Sub Pump
(4) Safety Valve (16) Suction Filter
(5) Slow Return Valve (17) PTO Clutch
(6) Main Cylinder (18) HST Relief Valve
(7) L/C Filter (19) HST Oil Cooler
(8) HST ASSY (20) Main Pump
(9) HST Charge Filter (21) Main Relief Valve
(10) Power Steering Cylinder (22) PTO Control Valve
(11) Assist Cylinder
4283359M1 09-13
Hydraulic Diagram
NOTES
09-14 4283359M1
Component Breakdowns
COMPONENT BREAKDOWNS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Suction Filter
FIG. 10: Parts and Hydraulic Diagram
(1) Bolt 3 5
(2) O-Ring
4
(3) Filter
(4) Packing
(5) O-ring 1 2
I-10776
FIG. 10
FIG. 11: Circuit
(1) Engine
1
2 3
(2) Main Pump
(3) Sub Pump
(4) Suction Filter
4
I-10777
FIG. 11
FIG. 12: Suction Filter
(1) Out 1
(2) Magnet 2
(3) Paper Filter
3
(4) Punching Metal
(5) In
4 I-10778
5
FIG. 12
Specifications
Filtration Size: .......................................................................................................................................................... 20 micron
Filtration Area......................................................................................................................................4100 cu cm (250 cu in)
4283359M1 09-15
Operation Mechanism
When operating engine, negative pressure occurs by
driving of main pump and sub pump. Hydraulic oil goes
through suction filter and is sucked in the pumps.
Magnet and paper filter remove foreign objects.
Filter is protected with punching metal for prevention of
deformation of paper filter.
Transmission Filter
Transmission oil and filter must be changed after first 50
hours of operation and then every 200 hours thereafter.
Failure to perform regular maintenance may result in
hydraulic system damage.
Remove dust on magnet while replacing cartridge.
FIG. 13: When installing suction pipe, apply clean
grease to O-rings (1) on suction pipe.
1
1
I-10779
FIG. 13
09-16 4283359M1
GEAR PUMP
Parts and Hydraulic Diagram

FIG. 14: Main Pump
Output: 16.8 cc rev.
I-10825
FIG. 14
FIG. 15: Sub pump
Standard and HST output: 7.1 cc rev.
Power Shuttle and Q output: 8.7 cc rev.
I-10826
FIG. 15
FIG. 16: Main Pump
I-10828
FIG. 16
4283359M1 09-17
Sub Pump
FIG. 17: Sub Pump
I-10829
FIG. 17
Model Type Main Pump Output Sub Pump Output
S 31.3 l/min (8.3 gal/min) at 2600 16.8 l/min (4.4 gal/min)
rpm
H at 2600 rpm
MF1533 MF1540, ST34 rotation (drive shaft)
ST41, MT65B MT75B P 20.6 l/min (5.4 gal/min)
ratio 0.912
at 2600 rpm
09-18 4283359M1
MAIN RELIEF VALVE

Synchro Version and HST Version
FIGS. 18–19: Valve Assembly
(1) Valve Assembly
(2) PTO Control valve
1
3
I-10831
FIG. 18
I-10832
FIG. 19
Power Shuttle Version and Power Shift Version

FIG. 20: Valve Assembly
(1) Valve Assembly 2
(2) Rear Delivery Pipe
1
3
I-10833
FIG. 20
4283359M1 09-19
FIG. 21: Detail View-Main relief
(1) Spring
(2) Steel Ball 1 3
2
(3) In
(4) Out (to tank)
4
I-10835
FIG. 21
FIG. 22: Circuit- Power Shuttle and Power Shift
(1) Relief Valve
(2) Main Pump
1
I-10834
FIG. 22
FIG. 23: Circuit - Synchro and HST
(1) Relief Valve
(2) Main Pump
(3) PTO Control Valve
3 2
d-13256
FIG. 23
09-20 4283359M1
Specifications
1. Relief Pressure: 15.7 mPa (2277 psi) at 22 l/min (5.8
gal/min) 50 degree
2. Cracking Pressure: 14.1 mPa (2045 psi) at 0.3 l/min
(0.08 gal/min) 50 degree
Operation Mechanism
Relief valve works to prevent damage by high pressure.
Cracking pressure 14.1 mPa (2045 psi) the fluid pushes
steel ball up, overcoming the force of spring.
And then return fluid to tank.

It is possible to change the relief pressure by adjustable
bolt.
Assembly
Tightening torque of main relief valve 63.3 to 64.3 Nm
(46.7 to 47.4 lbf ft)
When installing pump, use new O-ring with fresh grease.
STEERING ORBIT ROLL
Hydraulic Diagram
NOTE: See chapter 11 for additional information on
steering system.
Standard Version
FIG. 24: Orbit Roll (Standard)
1
2
(3) Sub Pump
I-10872
FIG. 24
4283359M1 09-21
Power Shuttle
FIG. 25: Orbit Roll (Power Shuttle and Q Version)
1
2
(3) Sub Pump
(4) L/C Filter
3
(5) Reduce Valve
4
5
I-10873
FIG. 25
HST Version
FIG. 26: Orbit Roll (HST Version)
(1) Power Steering Cylinder 4 5
1
(3) Sub Pump
2
(4) HST Oil Cooler
(5) HST Charge Filter 6
(6) HST Unit
(7) HST Relief Valve 3 7
I-10874
FIG. 26
POWER STEERING CYLINDER
Hydraulic Diagram
Standard Version
FIG. 27: Power Steering Cylinder (Standard)
1
(3) Sub Pump 2
3
I-10875
FIG. 27
09-22 4283359M1
Power Shuttle
FIG. 28: Power Steering Cylinder (Power Shuttle and Q
Version)
1
(2) Orbit Roll Assembly 2
(3) Reduce Valve 6
(4) L/C Filter 3
(5) Sub Pump
4
(6) to Control Circuit
5
I-10876
FIG. 28
HST Version
FIG. 29: Power Steering Cylinder (HST)
5
(3) Sub Pump 2
(4) HST Oil Cooler
(6) HST Unit 6
7
(7) HST Relief Valve 3
I-10877
FIG. 29
Detail View and Specifications

FIG. 30: Steering Cylinder
Rod diameter x Bore x Stroke = 32 x 50 x 231
I-10879
FIG. 30
4283359M1 09-23
16
13
16
13
21 17
12 11
19
20 15
7 14
18
8
7 8 2 3
4 5 6
10
9
MFC7675
FIG. 31
FIG. 31: Steering Cylinder Components (11) Shaft

(1) Steering Controller Assembly (12) Housing Assembly
(2) Piston Rod Assembly (13) Snap Ring
(3) Piston Packing (14) Snap Ring
(4) Rod Packing (15) Oil Seal
(5) Dust Seal (16) Bearing
(6) Ring (17) S Bolt
(7) O-Ring (18) S Bolt
(8) O-Ring (19) 325 Hose Assembly
(9) Bolt (20) Straight Adaptor
(10) Lock Washer (21) 425 Hose Assembly
09-24 4283359M1
HST OIL COOLER (HYDRO
TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Hydraulic Diagram
FIG. 32: HST Oil Cooler
(1) Power Steering Cylinder 4
1 5
(3) Sub Pump 2
(4) HST Oil Cooler
3
(6) HST Unit 6
I-10881
FIG. 32
FIG. 33: Oil Cooler Location
(1) HST Oil Cooler
(3) To HST Unit 1
3
4
2 I-10882
FIG. 33
Detail View
FIG. 34: Oil Cooler Assembly
(1) Out 1 2
(2) In
Cooling surface area 0.5969 sq m (925 sq in)

Cooling efficiency 2.44Kw (3.27 hp)
Cooling performance about 10 degrees C at rated
engine revolution
I-10883
FIG. 34
4283359M1 09-25
Operation Mechanism
Oil flow from the tank port of orbit roll to the oil cooler.
Oil which is cooled down in oil cooler flow to HST charge
valve through charge filter.
If the pressure exceed the setting pressure, oil flow to the
tank by relief valve.
HST CHARGE FILTER (HYDRO

TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Hydraulic Diagram
FIG. 35: HST Charge Filter
1 4
(3) Sub Pump 5
(4) HST Oil Cooler 2
(6) HST Unit 3 6
I-10884
FIG. 35
FIG. 36: HST Components
(1) HST Cooler
1
(3) To HST Unit
3 4
2 I-10885
FIG. 36
09-26 4283359M1
Detail View
FIG. 37: Filter
3
(1) Bypass Valve
(2) In
(3) Out
Specifications
1. Filtration Area 2300 sq cm
2. Filtration Size 10 micron
3. Bypass valve 172 kPa (25 psi) 1
Opening Pressure 2 I-10886
FIG. 37
4283359M1 09-27
HST RELIEF VALVE (HYDRO
TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Hydraulic Diagram
FIG. 38: HST Relief Valve
(1) Power Steering Cylinder 1
4 5
(3) Sub Pump 2
(4) HST Oil Cooler
(6) HST Unit 3
6
7
I-10887
FIG. 38
FIG. 39: HST Relief Valve Location
(1) Suction Pipe 2
(2) Sub Pump 3 4
(3) Return Circuit from Orbit Roll
I-10888
FIG. 39
Detail View
FIG. 40: Relief Valve
(1) Out
(2) In
(3) Spring
(4) Popet
1 2
Relief Pressure Less than 1.76 Mpa (255
psi) at 20 l/min 4
more than 1.27 Mpa (184 3
psi) at 5 l/min at
I-10889
50 degrees C
FIG. 40
09-28 4283359M1
Operation Mechanism
If trouble occur in HST charge circuit and the pressure in
the return circuit from orbit roll exceed setting pressure,
the circuit is protected by relief valve.
If relief valve work, oil push the popet up and flow to the
suction pipe.
HST UNIT (HYDRO TRANSMISSION

VERSION)
Hydraulic Diagram
FIG. 41: HST Unit Hydraulic Diagram
(2) HST Oil Cooler 3
(3) HST Charge Filter 7
(4) HST Unit
(6) Sub Pump 6 4
(7) Orbit Roll Assembly 5
I-10890
FIG. 41
FIG. 42: HST Location
(1) From HST Charge Filter
(2) HST Unit
2
NOTE: Refer to Hydro section for additional information.
1
I-10891
FIG. 42
4283359M1 09-29
NOTES
09-30 4283359M1
Valves
VALVES
MAIN CONTROL VALVE

FIG. 43: Main Cylinder
I-10780
FIG. 43
FIG. 44: Cylinder Case Assembly (Backside)
2
1
(2) Link
I-10781
FIG. 44
Specifications
Maximum Output 45 l/min (11.9 gal/min)

Maximum Working 157 bar (2275 psi)
Pressure
External Leakage Less than 4 cc/min at C
port with 157 bar (2275
psi)
4283359M1 09-31
Valves
Detail View
6 5
1
3
15 13
17 16
4
2 11
18
12 20 8
14 7
19 19
10
I-10783
FIG. 45
FIG. 45: Main (3 Point) Control Valve (11) Plug

(1) Valve Body (12) Plug
(2) Main Spool (13) O-ring
(3) Screw (14) O-ring
(4) Snap Ring (15) PUMP port - From Main Pump
(5) Unloading Spool (16) TANK 1 port - To Tank
(6) Spring 030 (17) Tank 2 port - To Tank
(7) Check Poppet (18) Drain port - To Tank
(8) Spring 018 (19) Cylinder port - To Main Cylinder
(9) Poppet (20) Tank 3 port - To Tank
(10) Spring 019
09-32 4283359M1
Valves
Neutral Position
2 3 4
5
11 10 9 8
I-10784
FIG. 46
FIG. 46: Fluid from main pump goes to port (4) and push (9) Cylinder Port
spring leftward by unloading spool.
(10) Tank 3 Port
All fluid from port (4) goes to port (3) because hydraulic
circuit is closed by main spool. (11) Poppet
Unload pressure (pressure of pushing leftward by unload

spool 785 to 1471 kPa (113 to 213 psi)
(1) Spring
(2) Tank 1 Port
(3) Tank 2 Port
(4) Pump Port
(5) Unloading Spool
(6) Main Spool
(7) Drain Port
(8) Check Poppet
4283359M1 09-33
Valves
Up Position
2 3
4
5
10 9
11 8
I-10785
FIG. 47
FIG. 47: When shifting position control lever rearward, (7) Drain Port
main spool moves rightward.
(8) Check Poppet
Fluid from port (4) goes to spring chamber and unload
spool (5) moves rightward. Hydraulic circuit between (9) Cylinder Port
pump port (4) and tank 2 port (3) is closed. (10) Tank 3 Port
Check poppet moves rightward and fluid goes to main (11) Poppet
cylinder (3P linkage goes up)
Stroke of unload spool is changed by shifting main spool.
(1) Spring
(2) Tank 1 Port
(3) Tank 2 Port
(4) Pump Port
(5) Unloading Spool
(6) Main Spool
09-34 4283359M1
Valves
Up Position to Neutral Position
1
2 3 4 5
9
11 10 8
I-10786
FIG. 48
FIG. 48: When 3P linkage rises to position, the main (9) Cylinder Port
gradually returns to neutral position by link mechanism.
(10) Tank 3 Port
3P linkage stops rising.
(11) Poppet
Quantity of fluid that goes to main cylinder from main
pump, gradually decrease. So 3P linkage could rise
smoothly.
If it keep spring chamber of unload spool pressed in this
situation, it would cause that unload pressure become
high and fluid become high temperature.
Fluid from port (P) pushes poppet rightward and go to
port (T3). Unload pressure would be normal by moving
poppet rightward certainly.
(1) Spring
(2) Tank 1 Port
(3) Tank 2 Port
(4) Pump Port
(5) Unloading Spool
(6) Main Spool
(7) Drain Port
(8) Check Poppet
4283359M1 09-35
Valves
Down Position
2 3 4
1
9 8
10 7
I-10787
FIG. 49
FIG. 49: When shifting position control lever forward, (1) Tank 1 Port
main spool moves leftward.
(2) Tank 2 Port
Unload spool moves leftward because hydraulic circuit
(3) Pump Port
between spring chamber of unload spool and pot (T1) is
open. All fluid from port (P) goes to port (T2). (4) Unloading Spool
Check poppet will be moved by fluid pressure from port (5) Main Spool
(C) because hydraulic circuit between chamber of check
poppet and spool is open. 3P linkage would be down. (6) Drain Port
Quantity of fluid which go to port (T1) from port (C) could (7) Check Poppet
be adjusted by stroke of notch of main spool. (8) Cylinder Port
(9) Tank 3 Port
(10) Poppet
09-36 4283359M1
Valves
Slow Return Valve and Safety Valve
FIG. 50: Parts and Hydraulic Diagram
2 3
(1) Safety Valve
(2) Assist Cylinder 4 1
(3) 3P Linkage
5
(4) Main Cylinder
(5) Slow Return Valve 6
5
I-10788
FIG. 50
Detail View
FIG. 51: Slow return valve
(1) Adjustable Bolt
(2) Spring 1 2 3
(3) Poppet 4
(5) O-ring
(6) Main Cylinder 8 5
7 6
(7) O-ring
(8) Oil Seal
I-10789
FIG. 51
Safety Valve
FIG. 52: Safety Valve
(1) Spring
1 2
(2) Steel Ball
(3) In (from Main Cylinder)
(4) O-ring 3
(5) Out (to tank)
(6) O-ring
8 4
(7) Lock Nut 7 6 5
(8) Adjustable Bolt
I-10790
FIG. 52
4283359M1 09-37
Valves
Specifications
Slow Return Valve
maximum allowable 280 kg cm2 (20.7 Mpa)

pressure
Leak less than 1 cc/min at VG83 50
degrees
Loading pressure 9.8 Mpa
(1421 psi)
Safety Valve
Relief pressure 20.1 Mpa (2915 psi) at 20

l/min 50 degrees
Cracking pressure 17.2 Mpa (2429) at 0.3 l/min
50 degrees
Leak less than 0.1 cc/min at VG83
50 degrees
Loading pressure 9.8 Mpa
(1421 psi)
Operation Mechanism
Slow Return Valve
UP: All fluid from main control valve goes to main cylinder
through poppet.
Down: Quantity of fluid from main cylinder can be
adjusted by stroke of poppet. Stroke of poppet can be set
by adjustable bolt. The lowering speed of 3P linkage is
determined by quantity of fluid from main cylinder.
Lock: Hydraulic circuit between main cylinder and main
control valve is closed by tightening adjustable bolt
completely. 3P linkage would not be down.
Safety Valve
When pressure of main cylinder raise excessively, safety
valve works to prevent damage. Fluid of main cylinder
push steel ball in safety valve and fluid go to tank directly.
09-38 4283359M1
Valves
Main Cylinder
FIG. 53: Main Cylinder Circuit
1 3
(1) Assist Cylinder
(2) Safety Valve 4
(3) 3P Linkage (Lift crank etc.) 2
(4) Main Cylinder
(5) Slow Return Valve
(6) Main Control Valve 5
6
I-10791
FIG. 53
FIG. 54: Cylinder Case Assembly
(1) Lift Arm 1
(2) Cylinder Case Assembly
(3) Piston Rod
7
(4) Piston
(5) Main Cylinder 5
2
(6) Lift Crank
(7) Bar 6
4 3 1
I-10792
FIG. 54
Detail View
FIG. 55: Cylinder Case Assembly
(1) Lift Arm
(2) Lift Crank
1
4
(3) Piston Rod 3
(4) Piston
(5) Main Cylinder
2
5
I-10793
FIG. 55
4283359M1 09-39
Valves
PTO CONTROL VALVE (STANDARD AND

HST TRANSMISSION VERSION)

FIG. 56: PTO Control Valve
(1) PTO Control Valve 1 2
(2) Flow Priority Valve 3
(3) Pressure Proportional Valve
(5) to PTO Clutch
4
5
I-10797
FIG. 56
FIG. 57: Flow Priority Valve
1 6
(1) Relief Valve
(3) L/C Filter 5
(4) Main Pump
(5) PTO Clutch
(6) L/C Filter
2
3 4
I-10798
FIG. 57
Detail View
(1) Relief Valve 1
(2) Flow Priority Valve
2
(3) From Main Pump
3
(4) To PTO Clutch
5
(6) Pressure Proportional Valve
6
4
I-10799
FIG. 58
09-40 4283359M1
Valves
Control Flow 2.8 l/min at 50 degrees

Control Pressure 0 to 2.06 Mpa (0 to 300 psi) at 50 degrees
Control Current 0-1.6 a DC Amplitude ± 0.25 A
Symmetrical Triangle Frequency 100 Hz
Coil Resistance 3.20 ohms at 20 degree
Operation Mechanism
The first 2.8 liters/min (0.74 gal/min) of fluid goes to the
PTO control valve by flow from the priority valve. Rest of
all fluid go to main control valve.
Fluid 2.8 liters/min (0.74 gal/min )goes to the PTO clutch
controlled by pressure proportional valve through L/C
filter. L/C filter prevents contaminates from coming into
valve.
Maximum pressure is set by relief valve.
When pressure proportional valve is OFF, fluid go to tank
from PTO clutch.
PTO CONTROL VALVE (POWER SHUTTLE)

(1) Power Shuttle And PTO Valve 1 2 3
(2) Pressure Proportional Valve Of Power Shuttle
(3) Pressure Proportional Valve Of PTO
4
(4) To PTO Clutch
(5) Adapter With L/C Filter
(6) Adapter With L/C Filter 7 6
(7) From Reduce Valve 5
I-10849
FIG. 59

FIG. 60: Reduce Valve
(1) Reduce Valve 1
(2) Sub Pump
2
I-10800
FIG. 60
4283359M1 09-41
Valves
FIG. 61: Reduce Valve Circuit
1
(1) To Orbit Roll 2
(2) 1st Spool 3
(3) 2nd Spool
(4) To Control Valve
4
(5) Reduce Valve
5
(6) L/C Filter
(7) Reduce Valve
6
7
I-10801
FIG. 61
Detail View
FIG. 62: Reduce Valve
(1) 2nd Spool 1 2 3
(2) To Control Valve
(3) To Inlet of Main Pump
4
(4) Adjustable Bolt
(5) 1st Spool
(6) To Main Control Valve
(7) From Sub Pump
7 5
6 I-10802
FIG. 62
Specifications
Maximum Flow 30 l/min (7.9 gal/min)

Maximum allowable 15.7 mPa (2277 psi)
pressure
2nd pressure 2.06 mPa (300 psi) at 50
degrees
Operation
1st spool makes fluid pressure more than 2.45 mPa (355
psi) before coming into 2nd spool. The rest of the fluid
goes to the orbit roll.
2nd spool keeps fluid pressure 2.05 mPa (297 psi) in
hydraulic circuit of control valve constantly.
2nd pressure can be changed by adjustable bolt.
L/C filter installs in inlet of reduce valve. L/C filter prevents
dust from coming into valve.
09-42 4283359M1
Valves
Reduce Valve (Power Shuttle)
FIG. 63: PTO Control Valve Circuit
(1) PTO Clutch 1
(2) L/C Filter 2
(3) Reduce Valve
(4) Pressure Proportional Valve of PTO 4
3
(5) L/C Filter
5
I-10850
FIG. 63
Detail View
(1) To PTO Clutch 1
(2) Pressure Proportional Valve Of PTO 2
(3) To Tank
(4) From Reduce Valve
(5) Office
4
4 3
I-10851
FIG. 64
Specifications

Control Pressure 0 to 2.06 mPa (0 to 297 psi) at 50
degrees C
Coil Resistance 3.20 ohms at 20 degree
4283359M1 09-43
Valves
Operation Mechanism
Fluid from reduce valve goes to pressure proportional
valve through orifice.
Fluid from orifice is controlled by pressure proportional
valve and goes to PTO clutch. There is a L/C filter in
hydraulic circuit of PTO clutch. L/C filter prevents dust
from coming into valve.
When pressure proportional valve is OFF, fluid goes to
tank from PTO clutch.
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE

FIG. 65: Power Shuttle Control Valve
1 2
(1) Power Shuttle and PTO Control Valve
3
(2) Pressure Proportional Valve Of Power Shuttle
(3) Pressure Proportional Valve Of PTO 4
(4) To PTO Clutch
(5) Adapter With L/C Filter
(6) From Reduce Valve 6 5
I-10803
FIG. 65
FIG. 66: Power Shuttle Control Valve Circuit
(1) Hydraulic Clutch for Power Shuttle 1
5
(2) L/C Filter 2
6
(3) Pressure Proportional Valve of Power Shuttle
3 7
(4) L/C Filter
(5) F/R Power Shuttle Valve 4
(6) Relief Valve
8
(7) Lubricating Circuit of Power Shuttle
(8) Pressure Proportional Valve of PTO
I-10804
FIG. 66
09-44 4283359M1
Valves
Detail View
FIG. 67: need para
(1) Relief Valve 2
1
(2) Pilot Spool 3
(3) Pressure Proportional Valve of Power Shuttle 8
(4) Push Pin
4
(5) Solenoid (Forward)
(6) F/R Power Shuttle Spool
(7) Solenoid (Reverse) 5
7 6
(8) from Reduce Valve
I-10805
FIG. 67
Specifications

Control Pressure 0 to 2.06 mPa (297 psi) at 50 degrees
Coil Resistance Pressure proportional valve 3.20 ohms at 20 degree
F/R solenoid valve 9.6 ohms at 20 degree
4283359M1 09-45
Valves
Operation Mechanism
I-10806
FIG. 68
FIG. 68: Neutral Position

(P) Pump Port
(T) Tank Port
(F) Forward Port
(R) Reverse Port
09-46 4283359M1
Valves
I-10807
FIG. 69
FIG. 69: Shifting Shuttle Lever Forward
4283359M1 09-47
Valves
I-10809
FIG. 70
FIG. 70: 160 m/sec After Shifting Shuttle Lever Forward
09-48 4283359M1
Valves
I-10810
FIG. 71
FIG. 71: Shifting Shuttle Lever Forward (Relief Valve Is

Working Normally)
4283359M1 09-49
Valves
I-10808
FIG. 72
FIG. 72: Shifting Shuttle Lever Forward (Pressure

Proportional Valve Is Working)
09-50 4283359M1
Valves
JOYSTICK VALVE

FIG. 73: Joystick Linkage
(1) Joystick Lever
1
(2) Linkage of Joystick
(3) Sheet Metal 2
3
I-10818
FIG. 73
FIG. 74: Circuit
(1) Bucket
(2) Boom
I-10819
FIG. 74
FIG. 75: to adapter of front loader
(1) Pipe
1
I-10821
FIG. 75
4283359M1 09-51
Valves
FIG. 76: Joystick Valve
(1) Joystick Valve
(2) Adapter (4) 1
I-10822
FIG. 76
Detail View
FIG. 77: Boom / Bucket Valves
(1) Cut-Off Plug
(2) Valve For Bucket 1
(3) Valve For Boom 2
(4) Outlet Of Auxiliary Hydraulics
3
4
I-10823
FIG. 77
Specifications
Maximum flow 45 l/min (11.88 gal/min)

Maximum allowable pressure 15.9 Mpa (2306 psi) at 50
degree
Internal Leak less than 7 cc/min
15.9 Mpa (2306 psi) at 50
degree
Working load of spool N-UP, N-DN 79 to 137 N (17 to 31 lbf)
Boom free lock 245 to 294 N
(55 to 67 lbf)
Unlock 79 to 118 N
(17 to 27 lbf)
09-52 4283359M1
Valves
Detail of Valve
Cross Section
FIG. 78: Boom Valve
(1) Return Spring
2
(2) P 1
(3) Main spool
(4) A
(5) Check Valve
3
(6) P2 8
(7) B
7 6
(8) Detent (W/Lock) 5 4
I-10824
FIG. 78
FIG. 79: Bucket Valve
(1) Detent (Without Lock)
(2) D
(3) C
2 3
I-10837
FIG. 79
FIG. 80: Identification Mark Of Spool
(1) Identification mark of boom spool (bucket spool
does not have a mark)
I-10836
FIG. 80
4283359M1 09-53
Valves
FIG. 81: Boom Valve Detent
I-10838
FIG. 81
FIG. 82: Bucket Valve Detent
I-10839
FIG. 82
Operation Mechanism
FIG. 83: Boom Valve
(1) N 1 2
(2) P
(3) A
(4) P2
(5) B
5 4 3
I-10840
FIG. 83
09-54 4283359M1
Valves
FIG. 84: When spool is in neutral position, hydraulic
circuit between port (P) and port (N) is open. Port (P2) is
not connected with port (A) (B).
I-10841
FIG. 84
FIG. 85: Check valve (Up)
When shifting lever into up position, pressure would go 2
down. Check valve prevents arm of front loader from 1 3
lowering.
(1) T
(2) N
(3) P
(4) A
(5) P2
6 5 4
(6) B I-10842
FIG. 85
FIG. 86: Hydraulic circuit between port (P) and port (N)
is closed.
1
Fluid from port (P2) pushes check and go to port (A).
Fluid inside port (B) go to tank.
Arm of front loader would raise.
Operation could be tuned in exactly. Quantity of fluid can
be adjustable by notch of spool with using the joy stick
lever.
When releasing a lever, joy stick lever would return to
neutral position by return spring (1).
I-10844
FIG. 86
4283359M1 09-55
Valves
FIG. 87: Boom Valve (Down)
Hydraulic circuit between port (3) and port (2) is closed. 1 3
2
Fluid from port (5) pushes check and goes to port (6).
Fluid inside port (4) goes to tank.
Arm of boom is down.
Operation may be tuned in exactly. Quantity of fluid is
adjustable by notch of spool.
When releasing a lever the return spring causes the
joystick to return to the neutral position.
6 5 4
(1) T I-10845
(2) N FIG. 87
(3) P
(4) A
(5) P2
(6) B
FIG. 88: When releasing a lever, joy stick lever would
return to neutral position by return spring (1). 1
I-10857
FIG. 88
FIG. 89: Boom Valve (Float)
Hydraulic circuit between port (P) and port (N) is open.
2
1 3 1
Fluid from port (P2) is cut off.
Fluid inside port (A), (B) goes to tank.
Boom cylinder would be free.
(1) T
(2) N
(3) P
(4) A 6 5 4 I-10847
(5) P2
FIG. 89
(6) B
09-56 4283359M1
Valves
FIG. 90: When steel ball moves over detent position
shifting load increases.
Float position is kept by steel ball (1) and the groove of
spool.
1
I-10848
FIG. 90
FIGS. 91–92: Bucket Valve (N). When spool is in neutral
position, hydraulic circuit between port (P) and port (N) is 1
open constantly. 2 3
Hydraulic circuit of port (P2) is not connected with port
(C),(D). 4
(1) N
(2) P
(3) Outlet of auxiliary hydraulic valve
(4) Neutral position
7 6 5
(5) C
I-10852
(6) P2
FIG. 91
(7) D
6
I-10853
FIG. 92
4283359M1 09-57
Valves
Bucket
FIG. 93: Check Valve
When shifting lever into bucket position, pressure would 2 3
be down. 1
Check valve prevents bucket from lowering.
4
Hydraulic circuit between port (P) and port (N) is closed.
Fluid from port (P2) push check and go to port (C).
Fluid inside port (D) go to tank.
Front loader with bucket.
Operation could be tuned in exactly. Quantity of fluid could 7 6 5
be adjustable by notch of spool and using joy stick lever. I-10854
When releasing a lever, joy stick lever would return to FIG. 93

neutral position by return spring.
(1) T
(2) N
(3) P
(4) Neutral Position
(5) P2
(6) D
(7) C
return to neutral position by return spring. 1
(1) Return spring
I-10855
FIG. 94
09-58 4283359M1
Valves
Dump
FIG. 95: Bucket Valve (Dump). Hydraulic circuit between
port (P) and port (N) is closed. 1 2 3
Fluid from port (P2) push check and go to port (D).
4
Fluid inside port (D) go to tank.
Front loader would dump.
Operation could be tuned in exactly. Quantity of fluid could
be adjustable by notch of spool with using joy stick lever.
(1) N
(2) P
7 6 5
(3) T I-10859
(4) Dump FIG. 95

(5) C
(6) P2
(7) D
(1) Return spring
I-10860
FIG. 96
Quick Dump
FIG. 97: Hydraulic circuit between port (P) and port (N)
is closed. 2
1 3 1
Fluid from port (P2) push check and go to port (D).
4 5
Fluid inside port (C) go to port (D).
Front loader would dump faster than dump position.
When shifting joy stick lever into quick dump position,
steel ball gets over detent position. Shifting load would get
bigger.
(1) T
(2) N 8 7 6
I-10861
(3) P
FIG. 97
(4) Dump
(5) Quick dump
(6) C
(7) P2
(8) D
4283359M1 09-59
Valves
(1) Detent spring
(2) Steel ball
2
I-10858
FIG. 98
Couplers for Front Loader

FIG. 99: Couplers for Front Loader.
(1) B - lower
(2) D - bucket dump
2
1
(3) C - bucket curl
(4) A - lift
4 3
I-10862
FIG. 99
FIG. 100: Coupler Mount for Front Loader.
2 2
(1) Pipe
(2) Snap Ring
(3) Quick Coupler (Female)
(4) Cap
3 4
I-10863
FIG. 100
09-60 4283359M1
Valves
EXTERNAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

FIG. 101: Hydraulic Parts
(1) Auxiliary Control Valve
1 I-10866
FIG. 101
FIG. 102: Auxiliary Control Valve Circuit
(1) Main Pump
(2) To Tank
1 2 I-10867
FIG. 102
FIG. 103: Auxiliary Control Valve Components
I-10868
FIG. 103
4283359M1 09-61
Valves
2
I3891
FIG. 104
FIG. 104: Remote Control Valves

Remote control valves are available in single valve
sections for the tractors.
Provisions for one or two valves has been designed into
the tractors allowing use of loaders, or remote cylinders
on other applications.
The valves can be used with either single or double acting
hydraulic cylinders by setting an adjustment screw on the
valve, when adjusting screw is turned out, single acting
cylinders can be raised or lowered from the A port.
When adjusting screw is turned in fully, double acting
cylinders can be raised and lowered from the A and B
ports on each valve bank.
(1) Double acting cylinders
(2) Single acting cylinders
Type Convertible to Single or Double

Acting Cylinders
Pressure 15691 kPa (2275 psi)
Flow 28.2 l/min (7.7 gal/min)
09-62 4283359M1
Valves
FIG. 105: Remove the operators seat.
Remove control levers and position control lever cover.
Remove cover over cylinder lift cover.
Remove hydraulic connections to remote couplers.
Remove the remote control valve.
Reverse procedures to install valve, with following
information.
Tighten bolts slowly to prevent vale body distortion.
Tightening torque of 24.5 to 29.4 Nm (18.1 to

remote control valve 21.7 lbf ft)
mounting bolts.
I3892
FIG. 105
4283359M1 09-63
Valves
Remote Control Valve (Overhaul)
10
2
4 6
5
3 7
1
I3893
FIG. 106
FIG. 106: Remove valve.

Remove control handle (not shown).
Remove front plate, (1).
Remove snap ring, (2).
Remove spring and retainers, (3).
Remove spool, (4).
Seals, (5), and, (6), can be removed if replacement is
necessary. If removed they must be replaced.
Remove cap, (8), and check valve, (7), with spring.
Remove plate, 9, and double acting screw, (10).
Clean and inspect all parts, if spool, (4), or valve body are
damaged, they must be replaced.
Reverse procedures to assemble valve, with the following
additional information.
Replace all seals and “O”-rings.
Oil all seals prior to assembly.
Replace check valve if marked or grooved.
09-64 4283359M1
Valves
DIVERTOR PLUG

The optional divertor plug blocks off the flow of oil from the
auxiliary valve pressure side to the auxiliary valve return
side. This allows the pressure and return plugs to be
removed.
OIl from the auxiliary valves pressure port can be used to
supply another hydraulic circuit. Return oil from the other
hydraulic circuit is then fed back to the auxiliary valve
return port.
FIG. 107: Normal Condition
(1) Divertor Plug 6 1
(2) N
(3) P
2
(4) Return Plug
(5) Relief metal or Joy Stick Valve 3
(6) Standard Plug 4
5
(7) Pressure Plug
7
I-10869
FIG. 107
FIG. 108: Circuit
(1) Divertor plug 1
(2) Relief Metal / Joystick Valve
(3) Plug
2
(4) From Main Pump
3
I-10870
FIG. 108
FIG. 109: Auxiliary Hydraulics Outlet (OPT)
(1) Divertor Plug 1
(2) In
(3) Shielding
(4) Out 2
6
(5) P
3
(6) N 5
4
I-10871
FIG. 109
4283359M1 09-65
Valves
ASSEMBLING OF OUTLET OF
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
Remove the plug, 6, and install the divertor plug, 1.
Remove the plugs, and install the adapters (pressure and
return).
CAUTION
Tightening torque of divertor plug: 34.3 to 39.2 Nm (25.3
to 29 lbf ft)
Apply fresh grease to O-ring.
When removing the implement connecting with outlet of
auxiliary hydraulics, change the divertor plug to normal
plug certainly. If you default on change, the main relief will
work constantly and the hydraulic parts will seriously
damage.
When removing and installing adapters, remove the
sealed tape completely.
09-66 4283359M1
Hydraulic Component Assembly Instruction
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION
MAINTENANCE
Suction Filter
FIG. 110: The cartridge should be replaced regularly.
Replacement should be done after the first 50, 200 and
400 hours of use and for every succeeding 200 hours of 1
use thereafter.
The hydraulic components may malfunction if the
cartridge is not replaced regularly.
2 1 2
When replacing the cartridge, use air or the like to remove
any foreign substances that have adhered to the magnet.
When installing the suction pipe, apply clean grease over
the pipe's O-ring before insertion.
(1) O-ring
I-10930
(2) Suction Pipe
FIG. 110
Gear Pump
FIG. 111: Seal the installation contact surface by using a
gasket and apply heat resistant bond to the same surface. 2
1
Check the rotation orientation when replacing the
components.
3
(1) Lock Wash 6
(2) Nut
(3) Outlet Port
(4) O-Ring
(5) Gasket 5 4
(6) Gear Pump I-10931
FIG. 111
Main Relief Valve

FIG. 112: The torque when installing the main relief
valve is 63.3 to 64.3 Nm (46.7 to 47.4 lbf ft).
1
Do not use an impact wrench as its impact may loosen
the adjustment screw.
Always apply clean grease to the O-ring.
Do not disassemble the adjustment screw.
(1) Adjustment Screw
(2) O-ring
2
I-10932
FIG. 112
4283359M1 09-67
Main Control Valve
FIG. 113: The torque when installing the main control
relief valve is 11.8 to 17.2 Nm (8.7 to12.7 lbf ft ).
Do not use an impact wrench as the force it applies is
uneven.
Bind the 3 designated points evenly to avoid any jumbling
in the main spool.
Apply clean grease to the O-ring of the contract surface.
When replacing the main spool, make sure not to damage
its sliding surface.
Check for any slipping in the retaining rings. Remove the
retaining ring on the Drive side. I-10933
Remove the plug in the spring side when disassembling FIG. 113
the unload spool.
To remove the spools, plumb the spools so that they fall
off easily on their own weight. When re-installing the
spools, use a cleaning agent to remove all foreign
substances and apply clean oil to the spool.
Slow Return Valve

FIG. 114: The torque when installing the slow return
valve is 63.3 to 64.3 Nm (46.7 to 47.4 lbf ft).
Do not use an impact wrench as the force it applies is 1
uneven and its impact may loosen the adjustment screw. 3
Do not turn excessively to the lock position as this might
fixate the poppet.
(2) O-ring 2
(3) Poppet
I-10934
Safety Valve FIG. 114

FIG. 115: The torque when installing the slow return
valve and the safety valve is 58.9 to 68.7 Nm (43.4 to 50.7
lbf ft). 1
uneven and its impact may loosen the adjustment screw.
Do not disassemble the adjustment screw of the safety
valve.
(2) O-ring 2
(3) Safety Valve I-10935
FIG. 115
09-68 4283359M1
Main Cylinder
FIG. 116: Before removing the piston from the cylinder,
disassemble the lift arm, lift shaft and lift crank.
Pull the plug from the front end of the cylinder case. Use 3
the brass rod to push and remove the piston.
1 5 2
(1) Plug (Brass Rod)
(2) Piston
(3) Lift Arm Left-Hand 4
(4) Lift Crank
(5) Brass Rod
I-10936
FIG. 116
FIG. 117: When installing the piston, apply clean grease
to the O-Ring and the backup ring. Take note of the order
of installing the rings and pushing them inside the
cylinder. (Plastic hammers can be used.)
(1) O-Ring 1
(2) Backup Ring 2
I-10937
FIG. 117
4283359M1 09-69
Lift Assist Cylinder
PTO Valve (for Standard and HST Version)
1
2
3
I-10939
FIG. 118
FIG. 118: The torque of the proportional pressure

control valve is 39.5 to 49.50 (29.1 to 36.5 lbf ft).
The binding torque of the flow priority valve is 24.5 to 29.5
Nm (18.1 to 21.8 lbf ft).
The binding torque of the lock nut of the relief valve is ().
Clean the last chance filter during disassembly.
Clean the installation surface and apply clean grease to
the O-Ring.
(1) Relief Valve
(2) Last Chance Filter
(4) Proportional Pressure Control Valve
09-70 4283359M1
Reduce Valve
FIG. 119: In general, the adjustment screw should not
be disassembled.
Angle of adjustment should be within ± 45 degrees. 1
2
Please do not mix up the springs of the primary spool and
the secondary spool.
(1) Secondary Spool
(3) Primary Spool
3
I-10941
FIG. 119
FIG. 120: Clean the last chance filter after removal.
(1) Last Chance Filter
I-10940
FIG. 120
4283359M1 09-71
PTO Valve (for Power Shuttle)
2
3 1
I-10942
FIG. 121

During disassembly, clean the adapter with the last
chance filter.
(1) PTO Control Proportional Pressure Valve
(2) From the Reduce Valve of the Filtered Adapter
(3) To the PTO Clutch of Filtered Adapter
09-72 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
2
1
5
3
I-10943
FIG. 122

The binding torque of the F and R solenoid valve is 4.9 to
5.9 Nm (3.6 to 4.4 lbf ft).
The pilot spool and relief valve are precision instruments.
Take measures to prevent the entry of foreign elements
during the disassembly of these parts.
(1) Relief Valve
(2) Pilot Spool
(3) Reverse Solenoid
(4) Forward and Reverse Switch Spool F Solenoid
(5) Power Shuttle Control Proportional Pressure Valve
FIG. 123: Clean the adapter with the last chance filter
during disassembly.
Clean the contact surface and replace the gasket each
time.
I-10944
FIG. 123
4283359M1 09-73
Joy Stick Valve
FIG. 124: The torque when installing the joy stick valve
(using the M10 bolt) is 21.6 to 30.4 Nm (16 to 22.4 lbf ft).
1
uneven.
Bind the 3 designated points evenly to avoid any jumbling
in the main spool.
2
(1) Stud Bolt x 1
(2) Bolt x 2
I-10947
FIG. 124
FIG. 125: The torque during VALVE ASSY assembly
(M6 bolt) is 5.9 to 7.8 Nm (4.4 to 5.8 lbf ft).
1
Coupling can be made easier by inserting a round bar
(10.2 diameter) to the 2 holes.
(1) Bolt x 3
I-10948
FIG. 125
FIG. 126: When removing the main spool, first remove
the cover.
Detach the main spool and the spool head and then
1 2
remove the detent component.
Orient the valve vertically and remove it without damaging
the main spool. This action ruptures the oil seal of the
valve.
Any oil seal can be used; one recommended oil seal has
the following product code:
(1) Cover 3
(2) Main Spool I-10949
(3) Spool Head FIG. 126
09-74 4283359M1
FIG. 127: First insert the main spool. Apply clean oil to
the spool.
Hammer in the oil seal (SPECIAL TOOL).
(1) Oil Seal
1
(2) Insert in this direction
2
I-10950
FIG. 127
FIG. 128: Install the return spring. Then, screw in the
spool head.
(1) Spool Head
(2) Return Spring
1 2
I-10951
FIG. 128
FIG. 129: Apply molykote grease to the detent. Then
insert the detent to the spool head.
(1) Detent
3
(2) Spool Head 2
(3) Beware of the dropout of the Steel Ball
I-10952
FIG. 129
FIG. 130: Make sure that the drainage hole is at the
bottom of the main unit. 1
(1) Cover
(2) Drainage Hole
2
I-10953
FIG. 130
4283359M1 09-75
2
1
I-10954
FIG. 131
FIG. 131: Slide in the main spool. Make sure that there
is no jumbling and that the main spool is locked.
Check for any damages in the contact surface. Clean the
contact surface.
Follow the same steps when assembling/disassembling
the bucket valve and the boom valve.
SPECIAL TOOL: Hammering the oil seal on one end
before inserting the main spool.
(1) Special Tool A
(2) Oil Seal
FIG. 132: Hammering the oil seal on the other end after
inserting the main spool
(1) Special Tool B
(2) Oil Seal
1 2
I-10955
FIG. 132
09-76 4283359M1
External Hydraulic Pressure Removal
FIG. 133: The torque of the Divertor plug is 34.3 to 39.2
Nm (25.3 to 29 lbf ft).
2
Apply clean grease to the O-ring.
Remove the external hydraulic pressure unit. When 3
reverting to the original state, replace the cut-off plug with
the original plug. Failure to do so will result in continuous
operation of the main relief which can damage the
hydraulic components.
1
IMPORTANT: Reminder: Completely remove the seal
tape when removing the adapter.
Failure to do so will lead to damaging the
hydraulic unit. I-10956
(1) Pressure Port FIG. 133

(2) Divertor Plug - optional
(3) Return Port
Reduce Valve
FIG. 134: The installation angle of the valve and the
hose connection adapter. 4
(1) Pipe/Steering/Comp
(A) 78 degrees
A
I-10958
FIG. 134
4283359M1 09-77
Oil Cooler
FIG. 135: Oil Cooler
(1) Adapter 2
(2) Oil Cooler
1
(A) 15 degrees
I-10961
FIG. 135
Joy Stick Valve
D 1
1
B A
I-10963
FIG. 136
FIG. 136: Joy Stick Valve Elbows

(A) A
(B) B
(C) C
(D) D
(1) 19 degrees
(2) 30 degrees
09-78 4283359M1
Hydraulic Control Linkage
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LINKAGE
EXTERNAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

LINK AND LEVER
Linkage Components
I-10893
FIG. 137
FIG. 137: Rear Remote Linkage
4283359M1 09-79
JOYSTICK LINK AND LEVER
Parts
FIGS. 138–139: Joystick Control Lever
3 2
(1) Joint Assembly
(2) Lever Joystick 4
1
(3) Grip
(4) Boot
(5) Rod F
(6) Rod G
I-10894
FIG. 138
I-10895
FIG. 139
FIG. 140: Linkage Rod
(A) Length of Connecting Rod F: 282 mm (11.1 in)
(B) Length of Connecting Rod G: 286 mm (11.25 in)
A B
I-10896
FIG. 140
09-80 4283359M1
FIG. 141: Joystick Linkage
(1) Pivot of Lever for Boom
(2) Pivot of Lever for Bucket
1 2
I-10897
FIG. 141
FIG. 142: Valve Linkage
(1) Pivot of Linkage
1
(2) Bucket
(3) Boom 2
3
(4) Arm
(5) Joystick Control Valve 4
5
I-10898
FIG. 142
Operation Mechanism
Boom (lift) Right-Hand Side View
FIG. 143: Shift joy stick lever rearward.
Main spool moves rearward.
Arm of front loader would be raised.
When releasing a lever, joy stick lever will return to neutral
position by return spring. Arm of front loader will stop.
I-10899
FIG. 143
4283359M1 09-81
Boom (neutral)
FIG. 144: When lever is in neutral position, main spool is
in neutral position. Arm of front loader would stop.
I-10900
FIG. 144
Boom (lower)
FIG. 145: Shift joy stick lever forward.
Arm of front loader will be down.
position by return spring. Arm of front loader would stop.
I-10901
FIG. 145
Boom (float)
FIG. 146: Shift joy stick lever most front position.
Main spool would be moved most front position.
When releasing joy stick lever, main spool must be kept in
the float position.(Boom could be free)
Shift joystick lever rearward to neutral position. (Go
beyond detent of floating position.)
I-10902
FIG. 146
09-82 4283359M1
Front View
Bucket (scoop)
FIG. 147: Shift joy stick lever to the inside.
Front loader would bucket.
position by return spring. Bucket would stop.
I-10903
FIG. 147
Bucket (neutral)
FIG. 148: When lever is in neutral position, main spool is
in neutral position. Bucket would stop.
I-10904
FIG. 148
Bucket (dump)
FIG. 149: Shift joy stick lever to the outside.
Main spool moves forward.
Arm of front loader would be down.
Front loader would dump.
position by return spring. Front loader would stop.
I-10905
FIG. 149
4283359M1 09-83
Bucket (quick dump)
FIG. 150: Shift joy stick lever to most outside position.
When releasing joy stick lever, main spool will return to
the neutral position.
I-10906
FIG. 150
09-84 4283359M1
THREE POINT POSITION CONTROL LINK
AND LEVER
6 5
1 9
2
3
4 8
I-10907
FIG. 151
FIG. 151: Parts to the three point position control linkage

(1) Wire
(2) Pin/Spring
(3) Pin 12 x 45
(4) Washer Lock
(5) Cotter Pin
(6) Washer
(7) Spring/ HC101
(8) Washer
(9) Pin/Spring
FIG. 152: Linkage
I-10908
FIG. 152
4283359M1 09-85
FIG. 153: Top View of Control Lever
(1) Washer/Lock
(2) Bolt
(3) Bracket
2
3
I-10910
FIG. 153
FIG. 154: Lever Arm
3 2
(1) Pin Spring 1
(2) Arm
(3) Washer
4
(4) Lever Plate
(5) Lining
5
(6) Plate 6
I-10909
FIG. 154
FIG. 155: Position Control Lever
(1) Adjustable Rod 2
(2) Up
3
(3) Down
1
I-10911
FIG. 155
09-86 4283359M1
Adjustment
Set adjustable rod so that free play of position lever is 0 to
1 mm (at top of position lever). Make sure that relief valve
will not work.
FIG. 156: Tighten lock nut.
(1) Lift Arm
1 6
(2) Adjustable Rod
(3) Lock Nuts 2
(4) Arm A
3
(5) Arm B
(6) Position Control Lever
4 5
I-10913
FIG. 156
FIG. 157: Stroke of 3P linkage must be adjusted by
stopper.
I-10914
FIG. 157
Operation Mechanism
When shifting position control lever rearward, Arm (A)
would be turned counterclockwise.
Arm (A) pushes arm (B) and main control valve will be
moved into the up position. Fluid go to cylinder and 3P
linkage would raise.
Lift arm raises to designate position controlled by position
control lever, main spool is returned to the neutral position
by link mechanism.
4283359M1 09-87
FIG. 158: When shifting position control lever forward,
Arm (A) would be turned clockwise.
Arm (A) pulls arm (B) and main control valve will be
moved into down position. 3P linkage would be down.
I-10915
FIG. 158
FIG. 159: Lift arm lower to designate position controlled
by position control lever, main spool is returned to neutral
position by link mechanism.
I-10916
FIG. 159
09-88 4283359M1
DRAFT CONTROL LINK AND LEVER
Parts Components
8
2
1 5
4
3
6
11
10
I-10917
FIG. 160
FIG. 160:
(1) Link/Draft and Adjustable Bolt/nut
(2) Lock Nut
(3) Draft Rod
(4) Draft Cam
(5) Draft Arm
(6) Pin
(7) Position Control Lever
(8) Draft Control Lever
(9) Arm/Position
(10) Lift Arm
(11) Draft Link
4283359M1 09-89
Adjustment
Adjust highest position of position control lever.
FIG. 161: Adjust lowest position of position control lever.
Push lift arm down to lowest position.
I-10918
FIG. 161
FIG. 162: Install draft link and adjustable bolt/nut so that
draft link is no free play.
Adjust draft rod so that pin of draft cam touches bottom of
draft arm.
I-10919
FIG. 162
FIG. 163: Fix draft rod with lock nut.
I-10920
FIG. 163
09-90 4283359M1
FIG. 164: Set lower link horizontally by using draft
control lever. Make sure that lower link is be moved by
operating draft link.
After adjusting linkage, make sure that relief valve is not
work by shifting draft control lever to highest position.
I-10921
FIG. 164
4283359M1 09-91
NOTES
09-92 4283359M1
Three Point Lift Linkage
THREE POINT LIFT LINKAGE
THREE POINT LINKAGE
4
7
I-10923
FIG. 165
FIG. 165: Components

(1) Lower Link Left-Hand
(2) Lower Link Right-Hand
(3) Lift Rod Left-Hand
(4) Lift Rod Right-Hand
(5) Check Chain Left-Hand
(6) Check Chain Right-Hand
(7) Top Link
4283359M1 09-93
Three Point Lift Linkage
Specifications
B
E
F
A
C
I-10926
FIG. 166
FIG. 166: Dimensions of the 3 point link

(A) Lower Linkage Length 607 mm (23.9 in)
(B) Lift Rod Length 447 to 477 mm (17.6 to 18.8 in)
(C) Lower Linkage Height (bottom) 205 mm (8.0 in) top
hole/ 142 mm (5.6 in) bottom hole.
(D) Lower Linkage Height (top) 877 mm (34.5 in) top
hole/ 813 mm (32.0 in) bottom hole.
(E) Lower Linkage Stroke 618 mm (24.3 in) top hole /
593 mm (23.3 in) bottom hole.
(F) Circumference of Tire: 13.6 - 24 AG / 44 x 14-20
Turf
(G) Top Linkage Length 450 to 670 mm (17.7 to 26.4 in)
09-94 4283359M1
Troubleshooting Hydraulic Components
TROUBLESHOOTING HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING EXAMPLES
For Example
Position Control
RAISE LOWER LEAK UNLOAD

Remedy Position
Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Control
CASE X X Check 1 Pressure
1 does not
increase;
lowering of
pressure is
OK
CASE X X Check 2 Pressure
2 increases
and does not
drop.
CASE X Check 3 Considerable
3 leakage.
CASE X Check 4 Cannot
4 unload.
Joystick Control Valve for Boom
RAISE LOWER EXTEND RETRACT LEAK

Remedy Joystick
Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Inside Boom
CASE X X X Check 5 Pressure
1 does not
increase;
lowering of
pressure is
possible;
other
conditions
are normal.
CASE X X X Check 6 No pressure
2 rise nor
pressure
decline.
CASE X X Check 7 Lever cannot
3 be set back
to neutral.
CASE X X X Check 8 Free flow of
4 fluid; lever
cannot be
locked.
5 leakage.
4283359M1 09-95
Joystick Control Valve for Bucket
BUCKET LOWER DUMP QUICKLY LEAK

Remedy Joystick
Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Inside Bucket
CASE X X X Check 5 Cannot be
1 salvaged;
dumping is
possible;
other
controls are
normal.
CASE X X X Check 6 Cannot be
2 salvaged;
dumping is
impossible.
CASE X X X Check 7 Lever cannot
3 be set back
to neutral.
4 leakage.
PTO Control (Standard and HST Version)
REVOLUTION TORQUE TIMING FEELING PTO Control

Remedy (Standard and HST
RIGHT STOP RIGHT BAD/SLIDE SLOW HARD Version)
CASE X Check No spinning.
1 10
CASE X X Check Spinning but the
2 11 clutch slips.
CASE X X Check Takes time to start
3 12 spinning.
CASE X X Check Jolts are felt.
4 13
PTO Control
REVOLUTION TORQUE TIMING FEELING

Remedy PTO Control
RIGHT STOP RIGHT BAD/SLIDE SLOW HARD (Q Version)
CASE X Check No spinning.
1 14
CASE X X Check Spinning but the
2 15 clutch slips.
CASE X X Check Takes time to start
3 16 spinning.
CASE X X Check Jolts are felt.
4 17
09-96 4283359M1
Power Shuttle
SHUTTLE REV. TORQUE TIMING FEELING

BOTH EITHER BAD/SLIDE BAD/SLIDE SLOW HARD Remedy Power Shuttle
F or R (Q Version)
CASE X X Check Does not move
1 18 forwards nor
backwards.
CASE X X Check Slips during forward
2 19 and backward
movement.
CASE X X Check Either moves
3 20 forward only or
backward only.
CASE X X Check Either slips forwards
4 21 or backwards.
CASE X Check Takes time to start
5 22 moving.
CASE X Check Jolts are felt.
6 23
CASE Power Shuttle Lever is NEUTRAL but the tractor moves forward or Check Moves even when
7 backward. 24 the lever is in
neutral.
4283359M1 09-97
CAUSE AND DISPOSITION
Check 1
FIGS. 167–168: Cause and disposition of Check 1.
(1) Unloading Spool 1
(2) Main Spool
(3) Right Flow
(4) Wrong Flow
Cause:
1) The unloading spool of the main control valve is not 2
completely closed.
3
Disposition: I-10964
In normal cases, the unloading spool operates to block FIG. 167

the flow from P to T2. Thus, oil flows from P to C (main
cylinder) and pressure builds up.
When the unloading spool is not functioning properly, P
gets linked to T2 and thus there will be no pressure
buildup in C (main cylinder) and pressure does not rise.
Clean the unloading spool.
Replace the main control valve assembly when there is
damage due to contaminants.
Cause: 4
2) The main relief valve is always in operation.
I-10965
When the oil passage from the main relief valve to the
main control valve or to the sub control valve is blocked, FIG. 168
oil flows from the main relief valve and then to the main
tank when it is in operation and so, pressure does not
build up.
Disposition:
Clean the pipe interior.
Clean the sub control valve or replace it.
09-98 4283359M1
FIGS. 169–170: Cause and disposition of Check 1
continued.
(1) Suction Filter
1
(2) Suction Pipe
(3) Main Pump
Cause:
3) The main pump is not discharging any oil.
When there is damage in the drive gear/shift of the pump, 3
the pump will fail to rotate and thus fail to discharge oil. 2
Thus, pressure fails to build up. I-10966
Disposition: FIG. 169
Check the driving member and replace its components if

necessary.
Cause:
When air is sucked in from the sealed portion of the
suction pipe and suction filter, the main pump fails to
discharge oil and thus pressure does not build up. At the
same time, power steering will also not function properly.
Disposition:
Search the portion where air is being sucked in and seal it
up. I-10967
In particular, check the O-ring in the connecting member FIG. 170

of the pipe.
(Refer to the circled parts in the diagram.)
4283359M1 09-99
Check 2
(1) Adjustable Bolt
(2) Popet 2
1
(4) Main Cylinder 3
(5) Lowering Rate Knob
(6) Joint Rod
4
Cause: 2
1) The slow return valve is always closed. I-10968
The lowering rate knob is at the stop position. FIG. 171
Disposition:
Turn the knob to the fast setting.
Cause:
The adjustable lock is locked at the stop position.
5
Disposition:
Use a tool on the joint rod and forcibly loosen it.
Replace the valve assembly when this happens again.
6
I-10969
FIG. 172
FIG. 173: Cause and disposition of Check 2 continued.
(1) Upper Side 2 1
(2) Back Side
(3) Front Side
(4) Lower Side 3
5
(5) ARM/A
Cause:
4
2) The position link is locked and cannot be moved.
When arm/a is not spinning smoothly, the main spool of FIG. 173
the main control valve cannot move downstream and so
pressure does not drop.
Apply lubricating oil to the spinning support member.
Replace the support member when it is deformed.
09-100 4283359M1
Check 3
FIG. 174: Cause and disposition of Check 3.
(1) Unloading Spool 1
(2) Popet
Cause:
1) The unloading spool fails to open completely at the
neutral position.
Disposition:
Usually, when the main spool is near the neutral position,
the popet operates to completely open the unloading 2
spool. I-10971
When the popet is not working, the unloading spool fails FIG. 174
to open completely. Thus, the upstream flow is just slightly
open and unloading cannot be performed properly.
Disassemble the popet and clean it.
Check for any noticeable damages or scratches; remove
the scratches or replace the popet.
4283359M1 09-101
Check 4
(1) Leak
(2) Check Popet
Cause:
1) Leakage inside the main control valve
Disposition:
Normally, pressure inside the main cylinder is pushing the 1
popet and so, there is no leakage. 2
Leakage worsens when there are scratches or damage in I-10972
the sheet surface of the popet or when there are
contaminants present. FIG. 175
Disassemble the check popet and clean it.

the scratches or replace the popet.
(1) O-ring/Backup ring
(2) Main Cylinder
1 2
Cause:
2) Leakage inside the main cylinder.
Disposition:
Leakage worsens when there is insufficient sealing due to
damage in the O-ring and the backup ring.
Replace the O-ring and the backup ring. I-10973
Leakage worsens when there is insufficient sealing due to FIG. 176

damage in the interior of the main cylinder.
Replace the cylinder case assembly.
(1) Steel Ball
(2) In 1
(3) Out
Cause: 2
3) Check valve leakage.
Disposition:
Leakage worsens when there are scratches on the sheet 3
surface of the steel ball or due to the entry of I-10974
contaminants.
FIG. 177
Disassemble the check valve and clean it.
the scratches or replace the valve.
09-102 4283359M1
Check 5
(1) Check Valve
(2) P2 2
(3) Port A
Cause:
1) The check valve inside the joy stick valve is stuck.
Disposition:
1
Normally, when the main spool moves to the raise the
bucket, oil flowing from P2 to A pushes the check valve to 3
I-10975
open the same and thus raising the bucket.
FIG. 178
When the check valve is stuck, it blocks the oil flow from
P2 to A and thus, the bucket cannot be raised.
Clean the check valve.
If there are any significant scratches and damage due to
the presence of contaminants, replace the joy stick valve
assy.
Cause:
If the fluid flow from the main relief valve to the joy stick
valve is blocked, then the operation of the main relief valve
causes the fluid to flow out to the tank from this valve and
thus, the bucket cannot be raised.
Disposition:
Clean the oil passage.
4283359M1 09-103
continued.
(1) Suction Filter
(2) Suction Pipe
(3) Main Pump
Cause:
3) The main pump is not discharging any fluid.
3
When there is damage in the drive gear/shaft of the
pump, the pump stops turning and stops discharging fluid.
Thus, pressure cannot be raised. 2 1
I-10976
Check the driving unit and replace parts if necessary.
Cause:
When air leaks in through the seals of the suction pipe
and suction filter, the main pump stops discharging oil and
thus, the bucket cannot be raised. At the same time, this
also causes malfunction in the steering wheel.
Disposition:
Check for any air leaks and perform the necessary
repairs.
I-10977
In particular, check the O-rings located at the couplings of
the pipe. FIG. 180
09-104 4283359M1
Check 6
Cause:
If the fluid flow from the main relief valve to the joy stick
valve is blocked, then the operation of the main relief valve
causes the fluid to flow out to the tank from this valve and
thus, the bucket cannot be raised.
Disposition:
Clean the fluid path.
Cause:
2) The MAIN PUMP is not discharging any fluid.
When there is damage in the drive gear/shaft of the
pump, the pump stops turning and stops discharging fluid.
Thus, pressure cannot be raised.
Disposition:
Check the driving unit and replace it if necessary.
continued.
Cause:
When air leaks in through the seals of the suction pipe
and suction filter, the main pump stops discharging oil and
thus, the bucket cannot be raised. At the same time, this
also causes malfunction in the steering wheel.
Disposition:
Check for any air leaks and perform the necessary
repairs.
I-10978
In particular, check the O-rings located at the couplings of
the pipe. FIG. 181
I-10979
FIG. 182
4283359M1 09-105
Check 7
(1) Valve for Boom 1
(2) Return Spring
(3) Valve for Bucket
Cause: 2
1) The return spring is damaged.
Disposition:
Normally, the main spool returns to its neutral position 3
through the action of the return spring. I-10980
When the return spring is damaged and is not functioning FIG. 183
properly, the main spool cannot be moved and thus the
joy stick lever cannot be set to neutral.
Replace the return spring.
When damage in the return spring begins to affect and
damage the main spool and the like, repair the return
spring or replace the joy stick valve assembly.
(1) Main Spool
Cause:
2) The main spool is not running smoothly.
Disposition:
If the installation bolt of the joy stick valve is fastened too
tightly, then the main spool cannot move smoothly.
1
Re-fasten the installation bolt.
The main spool is not running smoothly because of I-10981
contaminants that have locked the spool and the valve
body together. Also, the main spool may have been FIG. 184
deformed.
Clean the interior of the valve.
If there are any significant scratches and damage due to
the presence of contaminants, replace the joy stick valve
assembly.
09-106 4283359M1
Check 8
(1) Detent Spring
1
(2) Steel Ball 3
(3) Main Spool
Cause:
1) The detent spring is damaged.
Disposition:
Normally, when fluid is flowing freely from the main spool, 2
the steel ball enters the groove of the spool and thus, the I-10982
action of the detent spring supports and maintains the joy
stick lever. FIG. 185
When there is damage in the detent spring, the main

spool cannot be maintained and thus, the joy stick lever
cannot also be supported.
Replace the detent spring.
When damage in the detent spring begins to affect and
damage the main spool, repair the spring or replace the
joy stick valve assembly.
4283359M1 09-107
Check 9
(1) T 1 1
(2) B
(3) A
(4) Main Spool
(5) Detail View
(6) Seal 4
Cause:
1) Leakage inside the joy stick valve. 2 3
I-10983
Normally, when the main spool is in neutral, fluid flow from

A to T is blocked by the sealing units and so, leakage is 1 5
confined within the prescribed limits.
When there is damage or wear and tear in the sealing
units, the gap between the main spool and the body
widens thus leading to increased leakage.
Disassemble and clean the valve.
When there is considerable damage, repair the damage
or replace the valve. 3 6
I-10984
FIG. 187
(1) Cylinder for Bucket 1 2
(2) Cylinder for Boom
Cause:
2) Leakage inside the loader cylinder.
Disposition:
When there is damage in the O-ring and the backup ring,
sealing becomes insufficient and this leads to increased
leakage.
I-10985
Replace the O-ring and the backup ring.
FIG. 188
When the interior of the main cylinder is damaged, there
will be insufficient sealing which leads to increased
leakage.
Replace the cylinder case assembly.
09-108 4283359M1
Check 10
(1) Relief Valve
1
(3) Pressure Control Valve 2
Cause:
1) Damage in the components inside the PTO control
valve.
Disposition: 3
When the spool inside the pressure control valve is stuck, I-10987
pressure completely dissipates and thus the PTO clutch
does not operate to turn the PTO shaft. FIG. 189
Replace the pressure control valve assembly.

Damage in the spring inside the relief valve causes the
complete dissipation of pressure and thus the PTO clutch
does not operate to turn the PTO shaft.
Replace the spring inside the relief valve.
When the spool inside the flow priority valve is stuck, fluid
flow to the PTO clutch stops and thus the PTO shaft stops
turning.
Replace the flow priority valve assembly.
Cause:
Disposition:
Same as check 1-2.
Cause:
Disposition:
Same as check 1-3.
4283359M1 09-109
Check 11
(1) Relief Valve
1
Cause:
1) Damage in the components inside the PTO Control
Valve.
Disposition: 3
pressure decreases and this lowers the torque
transmitted by the PTO clutch and leads to slippage in the FIG. 190
PTO clutch.
Ineffective action of the spring inside the relief valve
lowers pressure and thus leading to lower PTO clutch
torque that causes slippage in the PTO clutch.
09-110 4283359M1
Check 12
(1) Relief Valve
1
Cause:
valve.
Disposition: 3
pressure decreases and this leads to lowering the speed
of the piston inside the PTO clutch. The PTO shaft turns FIG. 191
slowly which leads to lesser transmission torque and
slippage in the PTO clutch.
lowers pressure and leads to lowering the speed of the
piston inside the PTO clutch. The PTO shaft turns slowly
which leads to lesser transmission torque and slippage in
the PTO clutch.
When the spool inside the flow priority valve is stuck,
pressure decreases which leads to lesser fluid flow. This
leads to lowering the speed of the piston inside the PTO
clutch and thus, causing the delay in the start of the
turning of the PTO shaft.
4283359M1 09-111
Check 13
(1) Relief Valve
1
Cause:
valve.
Disposition: 3
pressure can no longer be controlled. Pressure inside the
PTO clutch increases rapidly and thus, the PTO clutch FIG. 192
couples rapidly leading to jerky operation.
When the spool inside the flow priority valve is stuck,
there is less fluid flow and this lowers the speed of the
piston inside the PTO clutch. When the piston comes into
contact, torque peaks which leads to jerky operation.
09-112 4283359M1
Check 14
(1) Orifice
Cause:
valve
Disposition:
Stickiness in the spool inside the pressure control valve
has caused the complete dissipation of pressure and thus 1
the PTO clutch does not operate to turn the PTO shaft. I-10990
Replace the pressure control valve assembly. FIG. 193

(1) 2nd Pressure Spool 3
1 2
(2) Spring
(3) Reduce Valve
Cause:
2) Damage in the components inside the relief valve.
Disposition:
When there are contaminants in the orifice of the PTO
Clutch, oil does not flow to PTO clutch and thus, the PTO
I-10991
shaft does not turn.
FIG. 194
Clean the orifice inside the valve.
Damage in the spring inside the valve causes the
complete dissipation of pressure and thus the PTO clutch
does not operate to turn the PTO shaft.
Replace the reduce valve assembly.
Cause:
Disposition:
Same as check 1-2.
Cause:
Disposition:
Same as check 1-3.
4283359M1 09-113
Check 15
(1) Pressure Control Valve
Cause:
1
valve.
Disposition:
When the spool inside the pressure control valve is stuck,
pressure decreases. This lowers the transmission torque
of the PTO clutch which causes slippage in the PTO
clutch. I-10990
Replace the pressure control valve assembly. FIG. 195

(1) 2nd Pressure Spool 3
1 2
(2) Spring
(3) Reduce Valve
Cause:
Disposition:
lowers pressure and thus leading to lower PTO clutch
I-10991
transmission torque that causes slippage in the PTO
clutch. FIG. 196
09-114 4283359M1
Check 16
(1) Orifice
Cause:
valve.
Disposition:
Stickiness in the spool inside the pressure control valve
lowers pressure and leads to lowering the speed of the 1
piston inside the PTO clutch. The PTO shaft turns slowly I-10990
which leads to lesser torque and causing slippage in the FIG. 197
PTO clutch.
When there are contaminants in the orifice of the PTO
Clutch, there is lesser fluid flow which leads to lowering
the speed of the piston inside the PTO clutch. As a result,
the PTO shaft starts to turns slowly.
(1) 2nd Pressure Spool
2
1
(2) Reduce Valve
Cause:
Disposition:
Ineffective action of the spring inside the reduce valve
lowers pressure and leads to lowering the speed of the
piston inside the PTO clutch. The PTO shaft turns slowly
which leads to lesser torque and causing slippage in the I-10991
PTO clutch. FIG. 198
Replace the spring inside the reduce valve.
4283359M1 09-115
Check 17
(1) Orifice
Cause:
1) Damage in the components inside the PTO Control
Valve.
Disposition:
pressure can become uncontrollable. Pressure inside the 1
PTO clutch increases rapidly and thus, the PTO clutch I-10990
couples rapidly leading to jerky operation. FIG. 199

The entry of contaminants into the orifice inside the valve
can lead to lesser fluid flow which lowers the speed of the
09-116 4283359M1
Check 18
(1) Mechanical Relief Valve
1
2
(3) Forward/Reverse Valve
Cause:
1) Damage in the components inside the power shuttle
valve.
Disposition:
3
I-10992
pressure completely dissipates. Thus, the power shuttle
clutch fails to operate and the tractor does not move FIG. 200
forward nor backward.
When the spool inside the mechanical relief valve is stuck,
pressure completely dissipates. Thus, the power shuttle
clutch fails to operate and the tractor does not move
forward nor backward.
Clean the spool inside the mechanical relief valve.
When there are significant scratches or damage due to
contaminants, replace the mechanical relief valve
assembly.
When the spool inside the forward/reverse valve is stuck,
the passageway to the power shuttle clutch becomes
blocked and thus the tractor does not move forward nor
backward.
Clean the spool inside the forward/reverse valve.
3
1 2
(2) Spring
(3) Reduce Valve
Cause:
2) Damage in the components inside the reduce valve.
Disposition:
contaminants, replace the power shuttle valve assembly I-10991
or the spool inside the forward/reverse relief valve.
FIG. 201
When the spring inside the valve is damaged, pressure
dissipate completely and so the power shuttle clutch fails
to operate and the tractor does not move forward nor
backward. At the same time, the PTO shaft does not turn.
4283359M1 09-117
Check 19
(1) Mechanical Relief Valve
1
2
Cause:
valve.
Disposition:
3
I-10992
pressure decreases and this leads to lowering the torque
transmitted by the clutch and thus causing slippage in the FIG. 202
clutch.
When the spool inside the mechanical relief valve is stuck,
pressure decreases and this leads to lowering the torque
transmitted by the clutch and thus causing slippage in the
clutch.
assembly.
3
1 2
(2) Spring
(3) Reduce Valve
Cause:
Disposition:
Damage in the spool inside the mechanical relief valve
leads to lower pressure and leads to lowering the torque I-10991
transmitted by the clutch and thus causing slippage in the
clutch. FIG. 203
09-118 4283359M1
Check 20
(1) Mechanical Relief Valve 1
2
(3) Spring
Cause:
valve. 3
3
Disposition: 4
I-10992
When the spool inside the forward/reverse valve is stuck, FIG. 204
this leads to the blocking of the passageway to the power
shuttle clutch and thus the tractor does not move forward
nor backward.
contaminants, replace the power shuttle valve assembly
or the spool inside the forward/reverse relief valve.
Check 21
2
(3) Spring
Cause:
valve. 3
3
Disposition: 4
I-10992
When there is damage in the spool inside the forward/ FIG. 205
reverse valve, the power shuttle clutch slips when the
passageway to the power shuttle clutch and the
passageway to the tank gets connected to each other.
foreign contaminants, replace the power shuttle valve
assembly or the spool inside the forward/reverse relief
valve.
4283359M1 09-119
Check 22
2
(3) Orifice 3
Cause:
valve.
Disposition: 4
I-10992
When the spool inside the pressure control valve or the FIG. 206
spool inside mechanical relief valve are stuck, pressure
decreases and thus the operating speed of the piston
inside the power shuttle clutch decreases.
The tractor starts up slowly and the torque transmitted by
the clutch decreases and so the power shuttle clutch
slips.
assembly.
The presence of contaminants inside the valve of the
orifice leads to a decrease in the fluid flow and a decrease
in the operational speed of the piston in the power shuttle
clutch. Thus, startup forward/backward movement
becomes slower.
(1) Reduce Valve 1
2 3
(3) Spring
Cause:
Disposition:
Damage in the spring inside the valve leads to complete
dissipation of pressure and results in lower operational I-10991
speed of the piston inside the power shuttle clutch.
FIG. 207
The tractor starts up slowly and the torque transmitted by
the clutch decreases and so the power shuttle clutch
slips.
09-120 4283359M1
Check 23
(2) Pressure Control Valve 4 2
(4) Orifice
Cause:
1) When there is damage in the components of the Power
Shuttle Valve.
Disposition: 3
I-10992
When the spool inside the pressure control valve is stuck, FIG. 208
pressure becomes uncontrollable. Pressure inside the
PTO clutch increases rapidly and thus, the PTO clutch
couples rapidly leading to jerky operation.
The entry of contaminants into the orifice inside the valve
can lead to lesser fluid flow which lowers the speed of the
Check 24
(2) Pressure Control Valve 4 2
(4) Orifice
Cause:
valve.
3
When the spool inside the forward/ reverse valve is stuck FIG. 209
in the forward or reverse position, the passageway
leading to the power shuttle clutch is left open and thus,
the tractor tends to move forward or backward.
Clean the spool inside the Forward/Reverse valve.
When there are scratches due to the presence of
contaminants, replace the power shuttle valve assembly
or the spool inside the forward/reverse valve.
4283359M1 09-121
Check 25
(1) Reduce Valve 1
2 3
(3) Spring
Cause:
Disposition:
When the spring inside the valve is damaged, pressure
completely dissipates and the gear shift cannot be I-10991
manipulated. At the same time, the PTO malfunctions.
FIG. 210
Measure the pressure of the reduce valve.
When there is no pressure, replace the reduce valve
assembly.
1
(1) Gear Shift Valve
(2) Adapter with Filter
(3) Pipe
(4) Adapter with Filter
(5) From Reduce Valve
Cause: 5
4
2) The pipe line is blocked. 3
When the filter inside the adapter is clogged, pressure
2
I-10993
completely dissipates and the gear shift cannot be
manipulated. FIG. 211
Replace the filter of the adapter.
09-122 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Numerics L
3 Point Linkage Linkage Components ......................................... 09-79

Specifications .................................................. 09-94
M
A
Main Control Valve ............................................. 09-31
Assembling of Outlet of Auxiliary Hydraulics ...... 09-66
O
C
Operation ............................................................ 09-42
Component Location ............................................ 09-7
P
D
Power Shuttle and Q Version ............................. 09-22
Divertor Plug ...................................................... 09-65 Power Shuttle Control Valve
Draft Control Link and Lever .............................. 09-89 (Power Shuttle and Q Transmission Version) .... 09-44
Power Shuttle Valve ........................................... 09-73
Power Steering Cylinder ..................................... 09-22
E PTO Control Valve
(POWER SHUTTLE and
External Auxiliary Hydraulics ............................. 09-61 Q Transmission Version) .................................... 09-41
External Auxiliary Hydraulics Link and Lever ..... 09-79 PTO Control Valve
External Hydraulic Pressure Removal ............... 09-77 (STANDARD and HST Transmission Version) .. 09-40
PTO Valve (for Power Shuttle and Q Version) ... 09-72
H
R
HST Charge Filter (Hydro Transmission Only) .. 09-28
HST Charge Filter (Hydro Transmission Version) ........ Reduce Valve
09-26 (Power Shuttle and Q Transmission Version) ... 09-43
HST Oil Cooler (Hydro Transmission Only) ....... 09-25
HST Unit (Hydro Transmission Version) ............ 09-29
Hydraulic Circuit ................................................... 09-3 S
Hydraulic Component Assembly Instruction ...... 09-67
Hydraulic Control Linkage .................................. 09-79 Slow Return Valve and Safety Valve .................. 09-37
Hydraulic Diagram .................................. 09-11, 09-28 Specifications ....................................................... 09-1
Hydraulic Diagram HST Relief Valve Steering Orbit Roll .............................................. 09-21
(2) Orbit Roll Assembly (3) Sub Pump .............. 09-28
Hydraulics T
Component Breakdowns ................................ 09-15
Component Location ......................................... 09-7 Three Point Lift Linkage ..................................... 09-93
Gear Pump ..................................................... 09-17 Three Point Linkage ........................................... 09-93
Main Relief Valve ............................................ 09-19 Three Point Position Control Link and Lever ...... 09-85
Specifications ......................................... 09-1, 09-15 Troubleshooting Hydraulic Components ............ 09-95
Suction Filter ................................................... 09-15
V
J
Valves
Joystick Link and Lever ...................................... 09-80 Parts and Hydraulic Diagram .......................... 09-31
Joystick Valve .................................................... 09-51
4283359M1 09-123
Index
NOTES
09-124 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
10 - Electrical
Contents
WIRE DIAGRAM AND COLOR CHART
Wire Diagrams and Color Chart ..................................................................................................................... 10-1
Circuit MF 1533 and 1540 HST (except cab models) ........................................................................... 10-12
MF 1533 HST (cab models) .................................................................................................................. 10-14
AGCO ST 34A and ST41A .................................................................................................................... 10-16
Challenger MT265B and MT275B ......................................................................................................... 10-24
NOTES ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-32
MF Synchro Shuttle ..................................................................................................................................... 10-33
MF HYDRO ........................................................................................................................................... 10-37
MF Power Shuttle .................................................................................................................................. 10-41
MT and ST Power Shuttle ..................................................................................................................... 10-45
MT and ST Synchro Shuttle .................................................................................................................. 10-49
Cab Schematic- All Models ................................................................................................................... 10-53
MF Hydro Cab ....................................................................................................................................... 10-57
MF PowerShuttle Cab ........................................................................................................................... 10-61
SOLENOID VALVES
Solenoid Valves ........................................................................................................................................... 10-65
Power Shuttle Solenoid Valve ............................................................................................................... 10-65
PTO Solenoid Valve .............................................................................................................................. 10-74
Resistance of Solenoid Valves .............................................................................................................. 10-83
INSTRUMENT PANEL (EXCEPT DIGITAL PANEL)

Instrument Panel Except Digital Panel ........................................................................................................ 10-85
SWITCHES AND RELAYS

Switches and Relays ................................................................................................................................... 10-91
Harness/Main ...................................................................................................................................... 10-133
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROLS

Power Shuttle Controls .............................................................................................................................. 10-141
POWER SHUTTLE VALVE

Power Shuttle Valve .................................................................................................................................. 10-149
PTO CONTROLS
PTO Controls ............................................................................................................................................. 10-161
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-169
4283359M1 10-i
Contents
NOTES
10-ii 4283359M1
Wire Diagram and Color Chart
WIRE DIAGRAM AND COLOR CHART
WIRE DIAGRAMS AND COLOR CHART
Mark Color Color Stripe

R RED
B BLACK
W WHITE
L BLUE
SB SKY BLUE
G GREEN
Y YELLOW
O ORANGE
P PINK
BR BROWN
LG LIGHT
GREEN
GY GRAY
V VIOLET
W/B WHITE BLACK
W/R WHITE RED
W/L WHITE BLUE
W/G WHITE GREEN
W/O WHITE ORANGE
Y/R YELLOW RED
Y/L YELLOW BLUE
Y/B YELLOW BLACK
L/R BLUE RED
L/B BLUE BLACK
L/W BLUE WHITE
L/G BLUE GREEN
L/Y BLUE YELLOW
G/W GREEN WHITE
G/B GREEN BLACK
G/Y GREEN YELLOW
R/B RED BLACK
R/G RED GREEN
R/W RED WHITE
R/Y RED YELLOW
B/R BLACK RED
B/G BLACK GREEN
B/W BLACK WHITE
LG/R LIGHT RED
GREEN
LG/B LIGHT BLACK
GREEN
O/W ORANGE WHITE
4283359M1 10-1
Massey Ferguson 1533 and 1540 Syncho Shuttle
d-11999
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: MF Synchro Shuttle
10-2 4283359M1
The following information refers to Fig. 1:
Abbreviation Description
Battery Battery
SLOW BLOW FUSE Slow Blow Fuse
Safety Start Relay Safety Start relay
Engine Stop relay Engine Stop relay
GLOW Monitor Lamp Glow Monitor Lamp
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
ENGINE STOP Engine Stop Solenoid
SOENOID
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Pull Coil
MAIN Switch Main Switch
ALTERNATOR Alternator
Standby Power Supply Standby Power Supply
Battery Charge Monitor Battery Charge Monitor
Lamp lamp
Fuel meter Fuel Meter
Coolant Temperature Coolant Temperature
Gauge Gauge
Engine-oil Pressure Engine-oil Pressure
Monitor Lamp Monitor Lamp
Trailer Harness Trailer Harness
Connector Connector
MAIN Switch Contact Main Switch Contact
Pattern Pattern
Engine Stop Relay Engine Stop Relay
Safety Start relay Safety Start relay
PTO Monitor lamp Power Take Off Monitor
lamp
PTO Selectable Switch Power Take Off
Selectable Switch
Shuttle Lever Neutral Shuttle Lever Neutral
Switch Switch
Neutral=ON Neutral=On
Seat Switch Seat Switch
PTO Switch Power Take Off Switch
PTO Control Solenoid Power Take Off Control
Valve Solenoid Valve
Selectable Switch
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-3
d-12000
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: MF 1533 and 1540 Power Shuttle
10-4 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
ENGINE STOP SOLENOID Engine Stop Solenoid
PULL COIL Pull COIL
HOLD COIL Hold Coil
Engine Stop Relay Contact Engine Stop Relay Contact
Glow Monitor Lamp Glow Monitor Lamp
Battery Charge Monitor Lamp Battery Charge Monitor Lamp
Fuel Meter Fuel Meter
Coolant temperature gage Coolant temperature gage
Engine-oil Pressure Monitor lamp Engine-oil Pressure Monitor
lamp
Trailer Harness Connector Trailer Harness Connector
Safety Start Relay Safety Start Relay
PTO Monitor Lamp Power Take Off Monitor Lamp
Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay
(Contact) (Contact)
MAIN Switch Contact Pattern Main Switch Contact Pattern
PTO Selectable Switch Power Take Off Selectable
Switch
PTO Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Control Solenoid
Valve
Power Shuttle Clutch Control Power Shuttle Clutch Control
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Power Shuttle Forward Valve Power Shuttle Forward Valve
Power Shuttle Reverse Valve Power Shuttle Reverse Valve
Shuttle Lever Forward Shuttle Lever Forward
Shuttle Lever Reverse Shuttle Lever Reverse
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
Starter Motor Starter Motor
4283359M1 10-5
d-12002
FIG. 3
FIG. 3: Circuit MF, 1533 and 1540, Synchro,

Powershuttle HST Lighting (Except Cab Models)
10-6 4283359M1
Flasher UNIT Flasher Unit
Hazard Light Switch Hazard Light Switch
Turn Switch Turn Switch
Turn Signal Light (RH) Turn Signal Light
(Right-Hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Turn Signal Monitor Lamp
Lamp (RH) (Right-Hand)
Connector Connector
Tail Lamp (RH) Tail Lamp (Right-Hand)
Tail Lamp Relay Tail Lamp Relay
Turn Signal Light (LH) Turn Signal Light
(left-hand)
Lamp (LH) (Left-Hand)
Tail Lamp (LH) Tail Lamp (Left-Hand)
High Beam Monitor High Beam Monitor Lamp
Lamp
Head Lamp Relay Head Lamp Relay
Panel Back Light Panel Back Light
Tail Lamp RH/LH Tail Lamp
right-hand/left-hand
Head lamp Relay Head lamp Relay
Head lamp Hi RH/LH Head lamp Hi
Right-Hand/Left-Hand
Head lamp Lo RH/LH Head lamp Lo
Working Lamp Working Lamp
Light Switch Light Switch
4283359M1 10-7
d-12003
FIG. 4
FIG. 4: Circuit MF 1533 and 1540 Lighting (Cab Models

Only)
10-8 4283359M1
(Right-Hand)
Connector Connector
(left-hand)
Lamp
4283359M1 10-9
D-12005
FIG. 5
FIG. 5: Circuit MF 1533 and 1540 Cab
10-10 4283359M1
Abbreviations Description
Radio cassette player (OPT) Radio Cassette Player (Optional)
Speaker (LH) Speaker (Left-Hand)
Speaker (RH) Speaker (Right-Hand)
Blower Switch Blower Switch
A/C Switch A/C Switch
Compressor Compressor
Compressor Relay Compressor Relay
Dual Pressure Switch Dual Pressure Switch
thermostat Thermostat
Blower resistor Blower Resistor
Blower Button Blower Button
Blower relay Blower relay
Interior Lamp Interior Lamp
Wiper Switch Wiper Switch
Wiper Relay F Wiper Relay Front
Wiper Pump F Wiper Pump Front
Wiper Switch R (OPT) Wiper Switch Rear (Optional)
Wiper Motor Wiper Motor
Wiper Relay R (OPT) Wiper Relay Rear (Optional)
Wiper Pump R (OPT) Wiper Pump Rear (Optional)
Wiper Relay F (Contact) Wiper Relay Front (Contact)
Working Lamp Relay Working Lamp Relay
circuit breaker Circuit Breaker
Wiper Motor R (OPT) Wiper Motor rear (Optional)
Working lamp Switch F Working lamp Switch Front
Working lamp Switch R Working lamp Switch Rear
Working Lamp Relay F (Contact) Working Lamp Relay Front (Contact)
Working Lamp Relay R Working Lamp relay (Rear)
Working Lamp F (LH) Working Lamp Front (Left-Hand)
Working Lamp F (RH) Working Lamp Front (Right-Hand)
Working Lamp R (LH) Working Lamp Rear (Left-Hand)
Working Lamp R (RH) Working Lamp Rear (Right-Hand)
Ciger power supply Cigarette Power Supply
4283359M1 10-11
Circuit MF 1533 and 1540 HST (except cab
models)
D-13832
FIG. 6
FIG. 6: MF 1533 HST (except cab models)
10-12 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
ENGINE STOP SOENOID Engine Stop Solenoid
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Pull Coil
Battery Charge Monitor Lamp Battery Charge Monitor lamp
Coolant Temperature Gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge
Engine-oil Pressure Monitor Lamp Engine-oil Pressure Monitor Lamp
PTO Monitor lamp Power Take Off Monitor lamp
PTO Selectable Switch Power Take Off Selectable Switch
Shuttle Lever Neutral Switch Shuttle Lever Neutral Switch
PTO Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Control Solenoid
Valve
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
Range Shift Lever Neutral Relay Range Shift Lever Neutral Relay
Range Shift Lever Sensor Range Shift Lever Sensor
4283359M1 10-13
MF 1533 HST (cab models)
D-13831
FIG. 7
FIG. 7: MF 1533 HST (cab models)
10-14 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
PULL COIL Pull COIL
HOLD COIL Hold Coil
Engine-oil Pressure Monitor lamp Engine-oil Pressure Monitor lamp
Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay (Contact)
(Contact)
PTO Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Control Solenoid Valve
Power Shuttle Clutch Control Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid
Solenoid Valve Valve
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
Check Mode FULL FUSE Check Mode Pull FUSE
HST Model selection Hydrostatic Model Selection
4283359M1 10-15
AGCO ST 34A and ST41A
D-12006
FIG. 8
FIG. 8: AGCO ST34A and ST41A Synchro Shuttle
10-16 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
SOENOID
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Pull Coil
Battery Charge Monitor Battery Charge Monitor
Lamp lamp
Gauge Gauge
Engine-oil Pressure Engine-oil Pressure
Monitor Lamp Monitor Lamp
Connector Connector
MAIN Switch Contact Main Switch Contact
Pattern Pattern
PTO Monitor lamp PTO Monitor lamp
PTO Selectable Switch PTO Selectable Switch
Switch Switch
Selectable Switch
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-17
D-12007
FIG. 9
FIG. 9: ST34A and ST41A Power Shuttle
10-18 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Hold Coil
Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay (Contact) Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay (Contact)
Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid Valve Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-19
D-12009
FIG. 10
FIG. 10: Circuit ST34A and ST41A Lighting etc. (Except

Cab Models)
10-20 4283359M1
Turn Signal Light (RH) Turn Signal Light (Right-Hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (RH) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (Right-Hand)
Turn Signal Light (LH) Turn Signal Light (left-hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (LH) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (Left-Hand)
High Beam Monitor Lamp High Beam Monitor Lamp
Tail Lamp RH/LH Tail Lamp right-hand/left-hand
Head lamp Hi RH/LH Head lamp Hi Right-Hand/Left-Hand
Head lamp Lo RH/LH Head lamp Lo Right-Hand/Left-Hand
4283359M1 10-21
D-12012
FIG. 11
FIG. 11: Circuit ST34A and ST41A Cab
10-22 4283359M1
4283359M1 10-23
Challenger MT265B and MT275B
D-12025
FIG. 12
FIG. 12: Circuit M 265B and MT275B Synchro
10-24 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
ENGINE STOP SOENOID Engine Stop Solenoid
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Pull Coil
Battery Charge Monitor Lamp Battery Charge Monitor lamp
Coolant Temperature Gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge
PTO Monitor lamp Power Take Off Monitor lamp
Shuttle Lever Neutral Switch Shuttle Lever Neutral Switch
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-25
d-12026
FIG. 13
FIG. 13: Circuit MT265B and MT275B Power Shuttle
10-26 4283359M1
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Hold Coil
Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay (Contact) Shuttle Lever Neutral Relay (Contact)
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-27
D-12028
FIG. 14
FIG. 14: Circuit MT265B and MT275B Synchro and

Power Shuttle Lighting (Except Cab Models)
10-28 4283359M1
(Right-Hand)
Connector Connector
(left-hand)
Lamp
4283359M1 10-29
D-12030
FIG. 15
FIG. 15: Circuit MT265B and MT275B Cab
10-30 4283359M1
4283359M1 10-31
NOTES
10-32 4283359M1
MF Synchro Shuttle
d-12615
FIG. 16
4283359M1 10–33
10–34 4283359M1
The following legend refers to Fig. 16
BATTERY Battery
STARTOR MOTOR Starter Motor
ENGINE STOP RELAY Engine Stop Relay
TIMER RELAY Timer Relay
HEADLAMP / LH Head Lamp left-hand
HEADLAMP / RH Head Lamp right-hand
FLASHER UNIT Flasher Unit
HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH Hazard Light Switch
ECU Electronic Control Unit
DIODE Diode
TAIL LAMP RELAYS Tail Lamp Relays
TURN SWITCH Turn Switch
LIGHT SWITCH Light Switch
PTO CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Power Take Off Control Solenoid Valve
CLUTCH Clutch
WORKING LAMP Working Lamp
GLOW PLUGS Glow Plugs
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
SHUTTLE LEVER SWITCH Shuttle Lever Switch
PTO SELECTABLE SWITCH Power Take Off Selectable Switch
PTO SWITCH Power Take Off Switch
WATER TEMP SENSOR Water Temperature Sensor
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR Oil Pressure Sensor
FUEL GAUGE Fuel Gage
HEADLAMP RELAYS Head Lamp Relay
SAFETY START RELAY Safety Start Relay
STANDBY POWER SUPPLY Standby Power Supply
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT (LH) Turn Signal Light (left-hand)
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT (RH) Turn Signal Light (right-hand)
TAIL LAMP (LH) Tail Lamp (left-hand)
TAIL LAMP (RH) Tail Lamp (right-hand)
TRAILER HARNESS CONNECTOR Trailer Harness Connector
SEAT SWITCH Seat Switch
4283359M1 10-35
INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Panel
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
WIRE COLOR Wire Color
Ground Ground
Unswtched Power supply Unswitched Power Supply
Others Others
Explanatory Note Explanatory Note
MAIN SWITCH Main Switch
Engine start/stop safety system ECU Engine Start/Stop Safety System Electronic Control
Unit
10-36 4283359M1
MF Hydo
D-14098
FIG. 17
4283359M1 10–37
10–38 4283359M1
The following information refers to Fig. 17 :
STARTOR MOTOTR Starter Motor
BATTERY Battery
HEADLAMP L/H Head Lamp left-hand
SHIFT LEVER SWITCH Shift Lever Switch
PTO SELECTABLE SWITCH Power Take OFF Selectable Switch
PTO SWITCH Power Take OFF Switch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HEADLAMP / LH Head Lamp / left-hand
HEADLAMP / RH Head Lamp / right-hand
FUEL GAUGE Fuel Gauge
FUSE BOX Fuse Box
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT (RH) Turn Signal Light (right hand)
4283359M1 10-39
HEADLAMP RELAYS Head Lamp Relays
SHIFT LEVER NEUTRAL SAFETY RELAY Shift Lever Neutral Safety Relay
DIODE Diode
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Engine start/stop safety system, ECU Engine Start/Stop Safety System, Electronic
Control Unit
10-40 4283359M1
MF Power Shuttle
D-14057
FIG. 18
4283359M1 10–41
10–42 4283359M1
The following legend refers to Fig. 18
BATTERY Battery
DIODE Diode
POWER SHUTTLE SOLENOID VALVE Power Shuttle Solenoid Valve
FORWARD Forward
REVERSE Reverse
CLUTCH Clutch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
FORWARD Forward
REVERSE REVERSE
POWER SHUTTLE SAFETY RELAY Power Shuttle Safety Relay
4283359M1 10-43
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Engine start/stop safety system ECU Engine Start/Stop Safety System
Electronic Control Unit
10-44 4283359M1
MT and ST Power Shuttle
D-14057
FIG. 19
4283359M1 10–45
10–46 4283359M1
The following legends refers to Fig. 19:
BATTERY Battery
DIODE Diode
POWER SHUTTLE SOLENOID VALVE Power Shuttle Solenoid Valve
FORWARD Forward
REVERSE Reverse
CLUTCH Clutch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
FORWARD Forward
REVERSE REVERSE
POWER SHUTTLE SAFETY RELAY Power Shuttle Safety Relay
4283359M1 10-47
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Engine start/stop safety system ECU Engine Start/Stop Safety System
Electronic Control Unit
10-48 4283359M1
MT and ST Synchro Shuttle
D-14054
FIG. 20
4283359M1 10–49
10–50 4283359M1
The following legend refers to Fig. 20:
BATTERY Battery
DIODE Diode
CLUTCH Clutch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-51
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Unit
10-52 4283359M1
Cab Schematic
D-13897
FIG. 21
4283359M1 10–53
10–54 4283359M1
The folllowing legend refers to Fig. 21:
Front working lamp Front Working Lamp
Rear working lamp Rear Working Lamp
Windshield wiper Windshield Wiper
Rear shield wiper (OPT) Rear Shield Wiper (Optional)
Courtesy light Courtesy Light
Blower (A/C) Blower (Air Conditioner)
Socket Socket
Air conditioner Air Conditioner
wire size Wire Size
wire color Wire Color
Ground Ground
Unswitched Power supply Unswitched Power Supply
Others Others
DIODE Diode
COMPA Compressor
STARTER MOTOR Starter Motor
FRONT WORKING LAMP SWITCH Front Working Lamp Switch
REAR WORKING LAMP SWITCH Rear Working Lamp Switch
BLOWER MOTOR Blower Motor
RESISTOR Resistor
THERMOSTAT Thermostat
FRONT WORKING LAMP Front Working Lamp
PRESSURE SWITCH Pressure Switch
COURTESY LIGHT Courtesy Light
REAR SHIELD WIPER MOTOR Rear Shield Wiper Motor
SPEAKER Speaker
REAR WORKING LAMP Rear Working Lamp
COMPRESSOR RELAY Compressor Relay
BLOWER RELAY Blower Relay
FRONT WORKING LAMP RELAY Front Working Lamp Relay
REAR WORKING LAMP RELAY Rear Working Lamp Relay
4283359M1 10-55
SOCKET Socket
REAR SHIELD WORKING RELAY (OPT) Rear Shield Working Relay (Optional)
FUSE BOX Fuse Box
CAB POWER SUPPLY Cab Power Supply
RADIO CASSETTE PLAYER (OPTION) Radio Cassette Player (Option)
REAR SHIELD WIPER RELAY (OPT) Rear Shield Wiper Relay (Optional)
A/C UNIT Air Conditioner Unit
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH Windshield Wiper Switch
REAR SHIELD WIPER SWITCH (OPT) Rear Shield Wiper Switch (Optional)
FRONT WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID MOTOR Front Windshield Washer Fluid Motor
REAR WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID MOTOR (OPT) Rear Windshield Washer Fluid Motor (Optional)
WINDSHIELD WIPER RELAY Windshield Wiper Relay
A/C OPERATION PANEL Air Conditioner Operation Panel
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR Windshield Wiper Motor
10-56 4283359M1
Hydro Cab
D-13895
FIG. 22
4283359M1 10–57
10–1 4283359M1
The following legend refers to:Fig. 22:
BATTERY Battery
DIODE Diode
CLUTCH Clutch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-59
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Unit
CAB Power supply Cab Power Supply
REV COUNTER Rev Counter
COIL Coil
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
SELECTOR SWITCH Selector Switch
SHIFT LEVER NEUTRAL SAFETY RELAY Shift Lever Neutral Safety Relay
SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL Synchronous Communication Terminal
PTO CONTROL SOLENOID Power Take Off Control Solenoid
GEAR ROTATION COUNTER Gear Rotation Counter
SHIFT LEVER SWITCH Shift Lever Switch
PTO SHIFT LEVER SWITCH Power Take Off Shift Lever Switch
MID PTO LEVER SWITCH (OPT) Mid Power Take Off Lever Switch (optional)
10-60 4283359M1
MF Power Shuttle Cab
D-14055
FIG. 23
4283359M1 10–61
10–62 4283359M1
The following legend refers to Fig. 23:
BATTERY Battery
DIODE Diode
CLUTCH Clutch
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
4283359M1 10-63
WIRE SIZE Wire Size
Ground Ground
Others Others
Unit
CAB POWER SUPPLY (REFER TO CAB SYSTEM Cab Power Supply (Refer To Cab System Wiring)
WIRING)
10-64 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
SOLENOID VALVES
SOLENOID VALVES
Power Shuttle Solenoid Valve
3
5
6
1
d-12413
FIG. 24
FIG. 24: Power Shuttle Solenoid

(1) 2 PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
(2) 1-2 Power Shuttle Solenoid (Reverse)
(3) 1 Power Shuttle Valve
(4) Coupler of Power Shuttle (Forward/Reverse)
(5) 1-1 Power Shuttle Solenoid (Forward)
(6) Coupler of Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid
(7) 1-3 Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid
4283359M1 10-65
Solenoid Valves
d-12416
FIG. 25
FIG. 25: Wiring Harness

AC Air Conditioning
PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Control Solenoid Valve
P-ECU P-Electronic Control Unit
Power Shuttle Forward Solenoid Valve Power Shuttle Forward Solenoid Valve
Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid Valve Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid Valve
10-66 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 26: Coupler of P-ECU: Pin Location in Coupler of
Harness
d-12417
FIG. 26
FIG. 27: Pin location inside coupler of solenoid valve
Coupler of power shuttle clutch (control) solenoid
(Solenoid -side) Tube: Blue
d-12369
FIG. 27
FIG. 28: (Harness - Side)
Coupler: Blue
d-12414
FIG. 28
FIG. 29: Coupler of Power Shuttle F/R
(Solenoid - Side)
d-12366
FIG. 29
4283359M1 10-67
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 30: Coupler of Power Shuttle F/R
(Harness - Side)
NOTE: Coupler of power shuttle clutch (control) solenoid
is the same shape as coupler of PTO clutch
control solenoid.
NOTE: When connecting coupler, make sure the color of
coupler and wire are the correct match.
NOTE: Power shuttle clutch (control) solenoid - tube of
solenoid: blue, coupler of wire: blue
NOTE: PTO clutch control solenoid - tube of solenoid:
green, coupler of wire: green d-12415
FIG. 30
FIG. 31: Power Shuttle Solenoid (Forward)
(Solenoid - Side)
Check coil of the solenoid valve.
Disengage coupler from he harness and check resistance
between F+ and F
Normal 9.6 ohm at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F)
d-12373
FIG. 31
FIG. 32: Check the insulation of the solenoid valve.

disengage coupler from the harness and check the
resistance between F+ and GND.
(Between F+ and GND)
d-12374
FIG. 32
10-68 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 33: (Between F and GND)
Normal - ohm (non-conductance)
d-12375
FIG. 33

Check wiring harness between the P-ECU and the
solenoid. Disengage coupler from the harness and check
the resistance between the P-ECU and solenoid (38-38).
Normal about 0 ohm
d-12418
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Check the power supply from the wiring

harness. Disengage coupler from the solenoid valve and
turn the main switch ON. Check the voltage between the
coupler and GND. (Between 30 and GND)
Normal DC11-12V
When starting the engine, expect about 14V.
d-12419
FIG. 35
4283359M1 10-69
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 36: Power Shuttle Solenoid (Reverse)
(Solenoid - Side)
Check coil of solenoid valve. Disengage coupler from the
harness and check resistance between R+ and R.
d-12378
FIG. 36
FIG. 37: Check insulation of the solenoid valve.

Disengage coupler from the harness and check
resistance between R+ and GND. (or R and GND)
(Between R+ and GND)
d-12379
FIG. 37
FIG. 38: (Between R and GND)
d-12380
FIG. 38
10-70 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
Check wiring harness between the P-ECU and solenoid.
resistance between P-ECU and solenoid (39-39).
Normal About 0 ohm
d-12420
FIG. 39
FIG. 40: Check power supply from the wiring harness

Disengage coupler from solenoid valve and turn the main
switch ON. Check voltage between coupler and GND.
(between 30 and GND).
Normal DC11-12V
When starting the engine, expect about 14V.
d-12421
FIG. 40
FIG. 41: 1-3 Power shuttle clutch control solenoid.
(Solenoid-side)
Check coil of solenoid valve (tube: blue)
Disengage coupler from harness and check resistance
between P+ and P.
d-12383
FIG. 41
4283359M1 10-71
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 42: Check insulation of the solenoid valve.
resistance between P+ and GND. (or P and GND).
(Between P+ and GND)
d-12384
FIG. 42
FIG. 43: Between P and GND
d-12385
FIG. 43

Check wiring harness between P-ECU and solenoid
(tube: color). Disengage coupler from harness and check
resistance between P-ECU and solenoid(380-380).
Normal approx 0 ohm
d-12422
FIG. 44
10-72 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 45: Check power supply from the wiring harness.
Disengage coupler from solenoid valve and turn main
switch ON. Check voltage between coupler and GND.
(between 30 and GND).
Normal DC11 - 12V
When starting the engine, expect approximately 14V.

NOTE: Coupler of power shuttle clutch (control) solenoid
is the same shape as the coupler of PTO clutch
control solenoid.
NOTE: When connecting coupler, make sure color of d-12423
coupler and wire are the appropriate color.
FIG. 45
green, coupler of wire: green
4283359M1 10-73
Solenoid Valves
PTO Solenoid Valve
2
d-12413
FIG. 46
FIG. 46: PTO Solenoid Valve (power shuttle

transmission)
(1) Coupler of PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
(2) PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
(3) Power Shuttle Clutch Control Solenoid
10-74 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
d-12416
FIG. 47

AC Air Conditioning
PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Control Solenoid Valve
Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid Valve Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid Valve
4283359M1 10-75
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 48: Coupler of P-ECU: Pin Location in Coupler of
Harness
d-12417
FIG. 48
FIG. 49: Pin Location in Coupler Solenoid:
(Solenoid - Side) Tube of Wire: Green
d-12406
FIG. 49
FIG. 50: Pin Location in Coupler of Solenoid:
(Harness - Side) Coupler: Green
NOTE: The coupler of power shuttle clutch (control)
solenoid is the same shape as the coupler of the
PTO clutch control solenoid.
NOTE: When connecting the coupler, make sure the
color of the coupler and wire are appropriate
match.
green, coupler of wire: green d-12424
FIG. 50
FIG. 51: PTO Solenoid Valve (P-Type)
PTO Clutch Control Solenoid. Measure the resistance of
Solenoid (Green Wire) Disconnect the coupler from the
harness and measure the resistance between PTO and
PTO+.
d-12409
FIG. 51
10-76 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
Disconnect the coupler from harness and measure the
resistance between PTO and GND (or PTO+ and GND).
(Between PTO+ and GND)
d-12410
FIG. 52
FIG. 53: (Between PTO and GND)
Normal Range - ohm (non-conductance)
d-12411
FIG. 53
FIG. 54: Harness-Side

Check the wiring harness between P-ECU and solenoid.
(Green Wire) Disconnect the couplers from P-ECU and
solenoid. Then measure the resistance between 34 and
34.
Normal Range Approximately 0 ohm
d-12425
FIG. 54
4283359M1 10-77
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 55: Check the power supply to the wiring harness.
Disconnect the coupler of solenoid valve and turn the
main switch to ON position.
Measure the voltages between 30 and GND.
Normal Range DC11- 12V
When starting the engine expect approximately 14 V.

NOTE: The coupler of the power shuttle clutch (control)
solenoid is the same shape as the coupler of
PTO clutch control solenoid.
NOTE: When connecting the coupler, make sure the d-12426
color of the coupler and wire are the appropriate FIG. 55

match.
green, coupler of wire: green
d-12427
FIG. 56
FIG. 56: PTO Solenoid Valve (Synchro and, Hydrostatic

Transmission)
(2) Coupler for PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
10-78 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
d-12428
FIG. 57

AC Air Conditioner
PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve Power Take Off Clutch Control Solenoid Valve
FIG. 58: Coupler of P- ECU: Pin Location
d-12429
FIG. 58
4283359M1 10-79
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 59: Pin Location in Coupler of Solenoid
Solenoid Side: Green Wire
d-12406
FIG. 59
FIG. 60: Pin Location in Coupler of Solenoid
Harness Side: Green Coupler
d-12424
FIG. 60
FIG. 61: 3 PTO Clutch Control Solenoid.
(Solenoid Side)
Measure the resistance of the solenoid.Disconnect
coupler from the harness and measure the resistance
between PTO and PTO+.
d-12409
FIG. 61
10-80 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
Disconnect the coupler from harness and measure the
resistance between PTO and GND (or PTO+ and GND).
(Between PTO+ and GND)
d-12410
FIG. 62
FIG. 63: (Between PTO and GND)
Normal Range - ohm (non-conductance)
d-12411
FIG. 63
FIG. 64: Harness Side

Check the wiring harness between the P-ECU and
solenoid.
Disconnect the couplers from P-ECU and solenoid. Then
measure the resistance between 34 and 34.
Normal Range Approximately 0 ohm
d-12430
FIG. 64
4283359M1 10-81
Solenoid Valves
FIG. 65: Check power supply to the wiring harness.
Disconnect the coupler of the solenoid valve and turn the
main switch to the ON position.
Measure voltages between 30 and GND.
Normal DC11-12V
When stating the engine, expect approximately 14 V.
d-12426
FIG. 65
10-82 4283359M1
Solenoid Valves
Resistance of Solenoid Valves
Number Terminal Normal Resistance Applicable Model

0hm
1-1 F+ F 9.6 Q P
1-2 R+ R 9.6 Q P
1-3 P+ P 3.2 Q P
9.6
2-1 1+ 1 Q
9.6
2-2 2+ 2 Q
9.6
2-3 3+ 3 Q
9.6
2-4 4+ 4 9.6 Q
3 PTO+ PTO 3.2 Q P H S
4283359M1 10-83
Solenoid Valves
NOTES
10-84 4283359M1
Instrument Panel (Except Digital panel)
INSTRUMENT PANEL (EXCEPT DIGITAL PANEL)
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXCEPT DIGITAL

PANEL
1 2 3 4 5
8 9
6 7
10
d-12600
FIG. 66
FIG. 66: Instrument panel (Except Cab Models)

(1) GLOW Plug Monitor
(2) Battery Charge
(3) Oil Pressure Warning
(4) PTO Power Take Off
(5) High Beam Monitor Lamp
(6) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (left-hand)
(7) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (right-hand)
(8) Fuel Gauge
(9) Coolant Temperature Gauge
(10) Hour Meter
4283359M1 10-85
d-12601
FIG. 67
FIG. 67: Dash Circuit
10-86 4283359M1
The following information refers to Fig. 67
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
MAIN Switch Contact Pattern Main Switch Contact pattern
Coolant Temperature gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge
Engine-oil Pressure Monitor Lamp Engine-Oil Pressure Monitor Lamp
Light Switch High Light Switch High
Turn Signal Light (RH) Turn Signal Light (Right-Hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (RH) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (Right-Hand)
Turn Signal Light (LH) Turn Signal Light (Left-Hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (LH) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (Left-Hand)
High Beam Monitor Lamp High Beam Monitor Lamp
Headlamp Relay Headlamp Relay
4283359M1 10-87
FIG. 68: Layout of meter side (female connector)
d-12602
FIG. 68
FIG. 69: Layout of Meter Side (Female Connector)
d-12603
FIG. 69
FIG. 70: Layout of harness side (male connector)
d-12604
FIG. 70
FIG. 71: Layout of harness side (male connector)
d-12605
FIG. 71
10-88 4283359M1
No. Description Wire Color Circuit No.

1 Battery Charge W/R 21
2 Turn Signal Monitor lamp (left-hand) Y 46
3 Internal Light (Backlight) BR 63
4 GLOW monitor P 12
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 12V MAIN Switch AC (ON Position) W/B 20
9 Fuel Gauge Y/R 22
10 - - -
11 - - -
12 - - -
A Internal Light (backlight) BR 63
B Oil Pressure Warning Y/B 24
C - - -
D - - -
E - - -
F - - -
G GND B 1000
H Coolant Temperature Gauge Y/L 23
I High Beam Monitor Lamp R/G 61
J PTO Power Take Off L/Y 33
K - -
L Turn Signal Monitor lamp (right-hand) G 44
4283359M1 10-89
NOTES
10-90 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
SWITCHES AND RELAYS
SWITCHES AND RELAYS
Battery
1-3R 80D25R(33,40)
115D31R(47,52)
GLOW PLUG
10-3B/W
19
5A
SLOW BLOW 12-P
FUSE
GLOW Monitor Lamp
40A
4-3R 20-0.85W/B R ALTERNATOR
7-3R/W (12V40A)
20A
21-W/R L
30 AC
Battery Charge Monitor Lamp
MAIN Switch
Fuel meter
MAIN Switch
22-Y/R
Contact Pattern
Coolant Temperature gauge
19 30 50 AC
Off 23-Y/L
On
Engine-oil Pressure Monitor Lamp
Glow 1000-B
24-Y/B
Start
PTO Monitor Lamp

37-L/G ON
33-L/Y
PTO Switch
d-12653
FIG. 72
FIG. 72: Starting and gauge circuit
Battery Battery
GLOW PLUG Glow Plug
ON On
OFF Off
Glow Glow
Start Start
4283359M1 10-91
Switches and Relays
Battery Charge Monitor lamp Battery Charge Monitot Lamp
Coolant temperature gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge
B/W Black/White
BR/W Brown/White
W/R White/Red
Y/R Yellow/Red
Y/L Yellow/Blue
Y/B Yellow/Black
L/Y Blue/Yellow
L/G Blue/Green
B Black
FIG. 73: Inspection by coupler on the harness side.

Measure of voltage with coupler connection.
Terminal
d-12654
FIG. 73
10-92 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
NO Operation Normal Range

12 MAIN Switch = OFF or ON Position 0V
MAIN Switch = Glow or Start Position 11 - 12V
20 MAIN Switch = OFF Position 0V
MAIN Switch = ON or Glow or Start 11 - 12V
21 MAIN Switch = ON without Engine Running Approximately 0 V
MAIN Switch =ON with Engine Running Approximately 10 -12V
24 MAIN Switch =ON without Engine Running Approximately 0 V
MAIN Switch =ON with Engine Running 11 - 12V
33 MAIN Switch =ON and PTO Approximately 0 - 1V
MAIN Switch = ON and PTO Switch-hit 11 - 12 V
NOTE: Voltage on the chart above is relevant if the

engine is OFF
FIG. 74: Measurement of voltage without coupler
connecting
Terminal
Terminal
d-12655
FIG. 74
Terminal Normal Range

22 1000 When fuel sensor is moved, change to within range of 10-90 ohm
23 1000 Approximately 600 ohm (Coolant temperature is 40 degrees C (104 degrees F)
Approximately 47.5 ohm (Coolant temperature is 110 degrees C (219.2 degees F)
1000 GND Approximately 0 ohm
4283359M1 10-93
Switches and Relays
Battery
1-3R 80D25R(33,40)
115D31R(47,52)
SLOW BLOW
FUSE
1000-B
40A
h a
Hazard Light Switch
41-0.85L/Y 44-0.85G Turn Signal Light(RH)
b f
Flasher UNIT Turn Signal Monitor Lamp(RH)
42-0.85W/G
20A j
46-0.85Y 45-
40-0.85R/B d i
0.85R Tail Lamp(RH)
Turn Switch
Tail Lamp Relay
4-3R
Turn Signal Light(LH)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp(LH)
47-
0.85R/L Tail Lamp(LH)
43-0.85L/W Tail Lamp Relay

Light Switch High Beam Monitor Lamp
High 61-R/G
15A Rh
Headlamp Relay
Low 62-R/Y
60-0.85R/L Rl
Headlamp Relay
63-0.85BR Panel Back Light
1.7W× 4
d-12665
FIG. 75
FIG. 75: Light circuit schematic
Battery Battery
Turn Signal Light (RH) Turn Signal Light (right-hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (RH) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (right-hand)
Tail Lamp (RH) Tail lamp (right-hand)
Turn Signal Light (LH) Turn Signal Light (left-hand)
Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (lh) Turn Signal Monitor Lamp (left-hand)
Tail Lamp (LH) Tail lamp (left-hand)
High Beam Monitor lamp High Beam Monitor Lamp
Headlamp Relay Head Lamp Relay
10-94 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
High High
Low Low
L/W Blue/White
R Red
L Blue
R/B Red/Black
R/L Red/Blue
W/G White/Green
R/G Red/Green
R/Y Red/Yellow
BR Brown
FIG. 76: pin-out of harness side
d-12666
FIG. 76
FIG. 77: Inspected by coupler on harness side.
Measurement of voltage with coupler connecting.
Terminal
d-12654
FIG. 77
4283359M1 10-95
Switches and Relays
NO. Operation Normal Range

44 Turn Switch R = OFF Approximately 0 V
Turn Switch R =ON Intermittently 11V
46 Turn Switch L =OFF Approximately 0 V
Turn Switch L =ON Intermittently 11V
61 Light Switch = High Position 11 - 12V
Light Switch = OFF or Low Position 0V
63 Light Switch = Low or High Position 11 - 12V
Light Switch = OFF Position 0V
NOTE: Voltage on the chart above is only accurate if the

engine is shut off. If the engine is running, set
down the to 10-12V and 11-12V, to
approximatley 12-14V.
Position Normal Lever Position Important

range
Arm Terminal Resistance Q Type H Type
R R-B Approx. 0 Hare Hare When the lever is in each position, do not
Ohm disconnect the contact point of the sensor by the
excess play in the lever.
L L-B Approx. 0 Snail tortoise
Ohm
Y Y-B Approx. 0 Tortoise Snail
Ohm
R-B Infinity When the lever is in the neutral position, do not
Ohm connect the contact point of the sensor
Excerpt Neutral Neutral
R,L and L-B Infinity
Y Ohm
Y-B Infinity
Ohm

(1) H Type
1
d-12663
FIG. 78
10-96 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
Circuit tester for the H Type Normal Range

+ - Voltage
351 GND Approximately 11V
351 1000 Approximately 11V
4283359M1 10-97
Switches and Relays
d-12657
FIG. 79
FIG. 79: PTO Lever Sensor

(1) PTO Shift Lever
(2) PTO Lever Sensor
10-98 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12675
FIG. 80
FIG. 80: PTO lever sensor diagram

(1) E3,E6 Type
(2) E4 Type 1
2
d-12676
FIG. 81
Digital Panel Digital Panel
PTO Lever Sensor Power take Off Lever Sensor
12V 12 Vaults
Y Yellow
4283359M1 10-99
Switches and Relays
B Black
R Red
N Neutral
LG/R Light Green/Red
LG/B Light Green/Black
10-100 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
(1) E3, E6 Type
(2) E4 Type 1
2
d-12679
FIG. 82
Circuit tester for the E3, and E6 Type Normal Range

+ - Voltage
Circuit tester for theE4Type Normal Range

+ - Voltage
4283359M1 10-101
Switches and Relays
1
F
3
N
R
2
d-12682
FIG. 83
FIG. 83: Power Shuttle Lever Sensor

(1) Shuttle Lever Reverse Switch
(2) Power Shuttle Lever
(3) Shuttle Lever Forward Switch (F is labled on the
switch)
Sensor Side
Position Normal Range

Lever Terminal Resistance
F F-C Approx. 0 ohm
N,R F-C Infinity ohm
N,F R-C Infinity ohm
R R-C Approx. 0 ohm
10-102 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 84: P Type
Measurement of voltage
Circuit Tester Normal Range

+ - Voltage
d-12686
FIG. 84
FIG. 85: Inspection of harness wire

(1) Power Shuttle Lever Side
(2) Power Shuttle ECU Side
1
Terminal Position Normal Range 2
Shuttle Lever P-ECU Resistance
131 131 Approximately 0 Ohm
132 132 Approximately 0 Ohm
d-12688
FIG. 85
4283359M1 10-103
Switches and Relays
4
2 3
d-12690
FIG. 86
FIG. 86: A graph that displays as the shift position

sensor is turned from (FREE) to position A, Ohms
resistance increases.
(1) Resistance of Ohms
(2) Free
(3) Position A
(4) OK
(5) Five Thousand Ohms
10-104 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
2
d-12689
FIG. 87
FIG. 87: Shift Position Sensor (1-2), Shift Position

Sensor (3-4)
(1) Shift Position Sensor (1-2)
FIG. 88: Shift Position Sensor Schematic
Shift Position Sensor Shift Position Sensor
(1-2) (1-2)
Shift Position Sensor Shift Position Sensor
(3-4) (3-4)
Q-ECU Electronic-Electronic
Control Unit
R/B Red/Black d-12695
G/W Green/White FIG. 88
G/B Green/Black
B/W Black/White
4283359M1 10-105
Switches and Relays
d-12693
FIG. 89
FIG. 89: Coupler and wire harness for shift position

sensor
(1) Coupler of ECU
(2) Harness Wire
(3) Coupler of 1-2 Side
(4) Coupler of 3-4 Side
Check each line: A18, A26, A30, A22 from the coupler
side to the coupler of the ECU. There should be 0 Ohms
of resistance.
10-106 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12694
FIG. 90
FIG. 90: Diagram of wire harness connection between

the coupler and the shift position sensor.
(3) Harness Wire
(4) Coupler of ECU
4283359M1 10-107
Switches and Relays
d-12696
FIG. 91
FIG. 91: Travel speed sensor and sensors that are

relevant to the engine.
(1) Engine Revolution Sensor
(2) Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
(3) Coolant Temperature Sensor
(4) Fuel Level Sensor
(5) Travel Speed Sensor
10-108 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12697
FIG. 92
FIG. 92: Travel Speed Sensor

(1) Travel Speed Sensor
Normal Range
Terminal Resistance
291 207 Approximately480 to 550
ohms
FIG. 93: Engine reverse Sensor Schematic
Engine Rev. Sensor Engine Revolution Sensor
PTO Speed Sensor Power Take Off Speed
Sensor
Travel Speed Sensor Travel Speed Sensor
W/O White/Orange
G/W Green/White d-12699
B/W Black/White FIG. 93
4283359M1 10-109
Switches and Relays
FIG. 94: Harness of the digital panel side
(1) Travel Speed Sensor Coupler, on the Sensor Side

Panel Side Sensor Side Resistance
291 291 Approximately 0 ohms
1
d-12698
FIG. 94
d-12726
FIG. 95
FIG. 95: Engine Reverse Sensor

(1) Engine Reverse Sensor
Normal range
Terminal Resistance
291 206 Approximitely 480 to 550
ohms
10-110 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 96: Engine Reverse Sensor
Engine Rev. Sensor Engine Revolution Sensor
PTO Speed Sensor Power Take Off Speed
Sensor
Travel Speed Sensor Travel Speed Sensor
W/O White/Orange
G/W Green/White d-12727
B/W Black/White FIG. 96
FIG. 97: Harness of Digital Panel Side

(1) Travel Speed Sensor Side Coupler

NOTE: The engine revolution sensor for the digital panel

is used for display of the engine revolution and 1
PTO revolution. PTO revolution is calculated by d-12728
the engine sensor and PTO lever sensor. FIG. 97
d-12729
FIG. 98
FIG. 98: Fuel Level Sensor
4283359M1 10-111
Switches and Relays
FIG. 99: Fuel Level Sensor
d-12769
FIG. 99
Normal Range
Terminal Resistance Position of Float
Terminal Plate 1 to 5 ohms Full (Stopper position)
Terminal Plate 27.5 to 37.5 ohms Half of tank
Terminal Plate 103 to 117 ohms Empty (Stopper position)
FIG. 100:
Digital Panel Digital Panle
Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Sensor
Sensor Sensor
Y/R Yellow/Red
Y/L Yellow/Blue
B/Y Black/Yellow d-12732
FIG. 100
FIG. 101: Harness side coupler for fuel level sensor

d-12733
FIG. 101
10-112 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 102: Standard panel type for the fuel level sensor
Gage Gage
MAIN Switch (ON Main Switch (On Position)
Position)
AC Air Conditioner
d-12730
W/B White/Black FIG. 102
Y/R Yellow/Red
Y/L Yellow/Blue
FIG. 103: Harness Side, Sensor or Panel

Sensor or - Resistance
Panel
1000 GND Approximately 0 ohms d-12731
FIG. 103
4283359M1 10-113
Switches and Relays
d-12734
FIG. 104
FIG. 104: Coolant temperature sensor (for the digital

panel)
Normal Range
Terminal Resistance Water Temperature
23 290 6750k to 7750k ohms 15 degrees C (59 degrees F)
23 290 1500 to 1700 ohms 60 degrees C (140 degrees F)
23 290 510 to 560 ohms 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
FIG. 105: Digital Panel Fuel Level Sensor
Gage Gage
Position)
B/Y Black/Yellow
Y/R Yellow/Red
d-12736
Y/L Yellow/Blue FIG. 105
10-114 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 106: Coupler for digital panel
(1) Temperature Harness Assembly
(2) Coupler 3
(3) Harness of Digital Panel Side
1
290 290 Approximately 0 ohms 2
23 23 Approximately 0 ohms d-12735
FIG. 106
d-12737
FIG. 107
FIG. 107: Coolant temperature sensor (for the standard

panel)
Normal Range
Terminal Resistance Water Temperature
Screw Thread Body Approximately 600 ohms 45 degrees C (113 degrees F)
Screw Thread Body Approximately 84.5 ohms 85 degrees C (185 degrees F)
Screw Thread Body Approximately 47.5 ohms 110 degrees C (230 degrees F)
4283359M1 10-115
Switches and Relays
FIG. 108: Fuel Meter Schematic
gage Gage
Position)
W/B White/Black
Y/R Yellow/Red
d-12739
Y/L Yellow/Blue FIG. 108
Coolant Temp. Sensor Coolant temperature
Sensor
AC Air Conditioner
FIG. 109: Harness for standard panel

(1) Coolant Temperature Sensor Side
3
(2) Coupler
(3) Harness of the Instrumental Panel Side

Panel Side Sensor Side Resistance 2
1
d-12738
Terminal Normal Range FIG. 109

Panel Side - Resistance
1000 GND Approximately 0 ohms
10-116 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12762
FIG. 110
FIG. 110: Engine Stop Solenoid

(1) Engine Stop Solenoid
FIG. 111: Solenoid with White, Red, Black, wire color for
coupler
d-12765
FIG. 111
4283359M1 10-117
Switches and Relays
d-12764
FIG. 112
FIG. 112: Engine Stop Solenoid Operation
Engine Stop Sol. HOLD COIL Engine Stop Solenoid Hold Coil
Engine Stop Sol. PULL COIL Engine Stop Solenoid Pull Coil
ON On
OFF Off
It depends on the movement of the seat switch timer It depends on the movement of the seat switch timer unit.
unit
Between 0.72 to 1.08 seconds Between 0.72. to 1.08 seconds
About one second About one second
Turning on is maintained for 0.72 to 1.08 seconds Turning on is maintained for 0.72 to 1.08 seconds
10-118 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12763
FIG. 113
FIG. 113: Engine Stop Solenoid Schematic with Legend

below
Battery Battery
(Contact) (Contact)
Seat Switch Timer Seat Switch Timer Unit
UNIT
PTO Monitor Lamp Power Take Off M onitor
Lamp
PTO Selectable Switch Power Take Off Selectable
Switch
Contact Pattern Contact Pattern
4283359M1 10-119
Switches and Relays
Switch Switch
Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
PTO Switch Power take Off Switch
TIMER Timer
AC Air Conditioner
Start Start
Glow Glow
Off Off
On On
Mass production article Mass Production Article
SOLENOID
PULL COIL Pull Coil
HOLD COIL Hold Coil
L/R Blue/Red
L/W Blue/White
L/Y Blue/Yellow
L/B Blue/Black
L/G Blue/Green
W White
R Red
B Black
L Blue
10-120 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
d-12740
FIG. 114
FIG. 114: Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

(1) Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Normal Range
Terminal Resistance Pressure
Screw Thread Body Approximately 0 ohms Unloading
Screw Thread Body Ohms Infinity Loading
FIG. 115: Digital panel Schematic of Oil Pressure

Sensor
12V 12 Vaults
Y/B Yellow/Black
d-12744
FIG. 115
4283359M1 10-121
Switches and Relays
FIG. 116: Digital wire harness for the engine iol pressure
sensor

d-12743
FIG. 116
FIG. 117: Harness of the instrumental panel side of the

standard panel
(1) Coolant Temperature Sensor Side 3
(2) Coupler
(3) Harnes for a standard panel type
2
1
d-12742
FIG. 117
FIG. 118: Standard panel type
Engine-oil Pressure Engine-Oil Pressure Monitor
Monitor Lamp Lamp
Position)
Engine-oil Pressure Engine-Oil Pressure Sensor
Sensor
Y/B Yellow/Black
W/B White/Black d-12741
FIG. 118
AC Air Conditioner
10-122 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
2 4
3
5
1
6
d-12745
FIG. 119
FIG. 119: Location of the switches on the instrumental

panel (E3, E6)
(1) Combination Switch
(2) Hazard Switch
(3) PTO Selectable Switch
(4) PTO Switch
(5) Display Mode Switch for QCY and HCY Type
(6) MAIN Switch
4283359M1 10-123
Switches and Relays
2
5
d-12748
FIG. 120
FIG. 120: Combination Switch

(1) Right
(2) OFF
(3) Left
(5) Hazard Switch
FIG. 121: Terminal position for the light switch and turn
signal
Position B1 T 1 2
OFF
LOW
HIGH
Position B2 R L d-12746
RIGHT FIG. 121
OFF
LEFT
10-124 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 122: Hazard Switch terminal
d-12747
FIG. 122
Position B1 F B2 TL TB TR R L
FREE
LOCK
3
2
d-12751
FIG. 123
FIG. 123: Diagam of control panel with PTO Controls

(2) Display Mode Switch
(3) PTO Switch
(4) MAIN Switch
4283359M1 10-125
Switches and Relays
FIG. 124: Terminal position of the PTO selectable switch
Position A B C D E
FREE
LOCK
d-12749
FIG. 124
FIG. 125: Main switch terminal position
Position A AC Glow ST
OFF
ON
GLOW
START
d-12750
FIG. 125
FIG. 126: Terminal position for the PTO switch.

Connector color is Blue
Position NC COM NO
OFF
ON
d-12752
FIG. 126
10-126 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 127: Terminal for the display mode switch for Q
and H type
Position COM NO
FREE
LOCK
d-12753
FIG. 127
4283359M1 10-127
Switches and Relays
2 3
5
6
1 8
7
d-12754
FIG. 128
FIG. 128: Location of the switches on the instrumental

panel of the (E4).
(1) Small Light Switch
(2) Combination Switch
(3) Hazard Switch
(5) PTO Switch
(6) Display Mode Switch
(7) MAIN Switch
(8) Glow Signal
10-128 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
3
2
d-12755
FIG. 129
FIG. 129: Location of Relays (E3,E6)

(1) Flasher UNIT
(2) Tail Lamp Relay
(3) Safety Start Relay (Black)
(4) Shift Lever Neutral Relay (Blue)
(5) Head Lamp Relay (Black) x 2
4283359M1 10-129
Switches and Relays
d-12756
FIG. 130
FIG. 130: Backside of instrumental panel

(1) PTO and Power Shuttle Control UNIT (Except Q
Type)
10-130 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
2
d-12757
FIG. 131
FIG. 131: Near radiator

(1) Engine Stop Relay
(2) Seat Switch Timer UNIT
FIG. 132: Relay E3
Tail Lamp Relay
Safety Start Relay
Head Lamp Relay
(1) Black
d-12758
FIG. 132
4283359M1 10-131
Switches and Relays
FIG. 133: Shift lever neutral relay
(1) Blue
1
d-12759
FIG. 133
FIG. 134: Engine Stop Relay
(1) Black
d-12760
FIG. 134
FIG. 135: Seat Switch Timer UNIT
Seat Switch Timer Seat Switch Timer Unit
UNIT
AC Air Conditioner
d-12761
FIG. 135
10-132 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
Harness/Main
FIG. 136: Controller for the Q type
d-12777
FIG. 136
FIG. 137: Sensor for main change
(1) 3rd and 4th Speed
1 3
(2) 1st and 2nd Speed
(3) Other Side of 3rd and 4th Speed
(4) Other Side of 1st and 2nd Speed
2 4
d-12778
FIG. 137
FIG. 138: Solenoid valve 1st and 3rd Speed
(1) Connector of Solenoid
(2) Connector of Harness
1 2
d-12779
FIG. 138
4283359M1 10-133
Switches and Relays
FIG. 139: 2nd and 4th Speed
1 2
d-12780
FIG. 139
FIG. 140: Forward and Reverse
1 2
d-12781
FIG. 140
FIG. 141: Pressure control for the power shuttle
d-12782
FIG. 141
FIG. 142: Controller for Q Type
d-12783
FIG. 142
10-134 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 143: Pressure control for the PTO
d-12784
FIG. 143
FIG. 144: Pressure control unit, connector of harness
d-12785
FIG. 144
FIG. 145: Pressure control for the power shuttle
d-12786
FIG. 145
FIG. 146: Forward and reverse
1 2
d-12787
FIG. 146
4283359M1 10-135
Switches and Relays
FIG. 147: Range shift sensor, connector of the PTO
sensor
d-12788
FIG. 147
FIG. 148: Connector of harness
(1) Q Type Harness
(2) Control lever
(3) Connector of PTO Harness (E3) 1 3
(4) Harness for Steering
2
4
d-12789
FIG. 148
FIG. 149: Meter panel
(1) Speed Up And Down Button coupler
(2) Other Side
1 2
d-12790
FIG. 149
FIG. 150: Sensor for the main change
1 3
(1) 3rd and 4th Speed
(2) 1st and 2nd Speed
(3) Other Side of 3rd and 4th Speed
(4) Other Side of 1st and 2nd Speed
2 4
d-12791
FIG. 150
10-136 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
FIG. 151: Axis sensors
(1) Input Axis Sensor
(2) Output Axis Sensor 1
(3) Axle Sensor
(4) Sensor for Engine RPM Forward and Reverse
Switch 2 3
(5) Other Side of Sensor for Engine RPM Forward and
reverse Switch
4 5
d-12792
FIG. 151
FIG. 152: Mid-PTO safety switch
(1) Harness Side
(2) Sensor Side
1 2
(3) Other Side (White,Black,Red)
3
d-12793
FIG. 152
FIG. 153: Power shuttle couplers
(1) Switch
(2) Q Type 1 2 3
(3) P Type
(4) Harness
4
d-12794
FIG. 153
FIG. 154: Harness for steering
d-12795
FIG. 154
4283359M1 10-137
Switches and Relays
FIG. 155: Controller for V type
d-12796
FIG. 155
FIG. 156: Controller for S type
d-12797
FIG. 156
10-138 4283359M1
Switches and Relays
7 8
4
6 9
3
5
d-12798
FIG. 157
FIG. 157: Engine RPM Harnesses

(1) Instrument
(2) Main Harness
(3) Extension Harness
(4) Coolant Sensor
(5) Coolant Extension Harness
(6) Sensor
(7) Harness Side
(8) Sensor
(9) Harness
4283359M1 10-139
Switches and Relays
FIG. 158: Key Stop Relay
d-12799
FIG. 158
10-140 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Controls

Legend - Power Shuttle Controls Wire Color Legend

R RED
B BLACK
W WHITE
L BLUE
SB SKY BLUE
G GREEN
Y YELLOW
O ORANGE
P PINK
BR BROWN
LG LIGHT
GREEN
GY GRAY
V VIOLET
W/B WHITE BLACK
W/R WHITE RED
W/L WHITE BLUE
W/G WHITE GREEN
W/O WHITE ORANGE
Y/R YELLOW RED
Y/L YELLOW BLUE
Y/B YELLOW BLACK
L/R BLUE RED
L/B BLUE BLACK
L/W BLUE WHITE
L/G BLUE GREEN
L/Y BLUE YELLOW
G/W GREEN WHITE
G/B GREEN BLACK
G/Y GREEN YELLOW
R/B RED BLACK
R/G RED GREEN
R/W RED WHITE
4283359M1 10-141
R/Y RED YELLOW
B/R BLACK RED
B/G BLACK GREEN
B/W BLACK WHITE
LG/R LIGHT RED
GREEN
LG/B LIGHT BLACK
GREEN
O/W ORANGE WHITE
d-12090
FIG. 159
FIG. 159: Power Shuttle Controls Circuit
10-142 4283359M1
Reference Description Wire Color Circuit No.

A1 Model select(46/50PS),32/38PS B 1000
A2
A3 PTO Switch L/G 37
A4 PTO Selectable Switch L/B 35
A5 GND B 1000
A6 MAIN Switch AC Position (12V) L/R 30
A7 Power Shuttle Forward Valve 38
A8 Power Shuttle Reverse Valve GY/B 39
A9 PTO Control Solenoid Valve L 34
A10
A11 Shuttle Lever Forward O/W 131
A12 Shuttle Lever Reverse L/G 132
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20 Power Shuttle Clutch Control sol. GY 380
FIG. 160: P-ECU Pin Layout of Coupler (Harness Side)
d-12091
FIG. 160
4283359M1 10-143
FIG. 161: Power Shuttle Lever
(1) Forward 1
2
(2) Neutral
(3) Reverse
3
d-12092
FIG. 161
1
4
5 3
d-12093
FIG. 162
FIG. 162: PTO Clutch Control Solenoid Valve

(1) Power Shuttle Forward Solenoid
(3) PTO Clutch Control Solenoid
(4) Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid
(5) Power Shuttle Valve
10-144 4283359M1
1
2
d-12094
FIG. 163
FIG. 163: Power Shuttle Circuit Schematic

(1) Forward Clutch Pack
(2) Reverse Clutch Pack
(3) Forward Solenoid
(5) Control Solenoid
(6) Reduce Valve
(7) Sub Pump
4283359M1 10-145
d-12095
FIG. 164
FIG. 164: Shuttle Lever Schematic in Neutral

The power shuttle control solenoid is in a electrified state,
and mechanical relief valve is closed. Since the power
shuttle forward solenoid and the power shuttle reverse
solenoid are in a non-electrified state, clutch operation oil
is not supplied. Oil of 2 liter/min (0.53 gal/min) is always
passed for lubricating clutches.
10-146 4283359M1
d-12096
FIG. 165
FIG. 165: Schematic of Shuttle Lever Shifting to Forward

The power shuttle lever is operated to the F side, it will
drive the Power Shuttle Control solenoid and power
shuttle forward solenoid, and will control the clutch driving
pressure. Power Shuttle Lever Neutral to Forward
operation Simultaneously with the operation, turn on
power shuttle forward solenoid.Simultaneously, make the
drive current of power shuttle control solenoid small
(current which makes clutch pressure two or less about 1
kPa or (psi), after that, enlarge current slowly and control
the clutch pressure. Clutch pressure draws the pressure
curve which changes depending on speed change
ranges.
NOTE: When shifting the shuttle lever to reverse, same
mechanism as forward operation..
4283359M1 10-147
d-12097
FIG. 166
FIG. 166: Allow two seconds to pass after the pressure

rises, set it to the total pressure, and the control operation
of the clutch pressure will be completed.
10-148 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
POWER SHUTTLE VALVE
POWER SHUTTLE VALVE
9
2
1
3
8
5
7 6
10 11
9
d-12105
FIG. 167
FIG. 167: Valve Diagram

(1) Relief Valve
(2) Pilot Spool
(3) Power Shuttle Control Proportional Pressure Valve
(4) Push Pin
(5) Forward Solenoid
(6) Forward, Reverse Switching Spool
(8) From the Reduce Valve
(9) Tank Port
(10) To Forward Clutch Pack
(11) To Reverse Clutch Pack
4283359M1 10-149
Power Shuttle Valve
5
2 4
1
T
3
d-12106
FIG. 168
FIG. 168: Detailed Explanation of the Valve Operation

(1) After Engine Start (Forward, Reverse, Neutral)
(2) Immediately after Forward Gear Change
(3) 180 ms after Forward Gear Change
(4) Mech-Relief Stabilization after Forward Gear
Change
(5) Proportional Pressure Valve Control after Forward
Gear Change
(6) Pressure Control Valve Control Current
(T) Time
(P) Pressure
10-150 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
d-12107
FIG. 169
FIGS. 169–170: After Engine Startup (Forward, reverse,

Neutral)
Valve Schematic
The Pressure port regularly supplies pressure (measuring
roughly 2 MPa (290 psi) from the reduce valve.
When the power shuttle control proportional pressure
valve is driven by an amount of current (roughly 1.6A) that
is equivalent to the maximum pressure, the reduce valve
applies pressure to the pilot spool to close the relief valve.
This is to stop the flow of fluid from the relief valve to the
tank when the proportional pressure valve is not in
operation.
The Forward and Reverse solenoids are not in operation
and the pressure from the reduce valve is blocked by the d-12108
Reverse switch spool and thus, no pressure is supplied to FIG. 170
the clutch side.
4283359M1 10-151
Power Shuttle Valve
The power shuttle clutch piston chamber connects to the
tank via the power shuttle switching spool and thus, the
clutch pressure is 0 MPa. The vehicle body comes to a
stop.
P 2
T
d-12109
FIG. 171
FIG. 171: Forward Solenoid ON

(1) Time After Engine Startup (Forward, Reverse,
Neutral
(2) Pressure Control Valve Control Current 1.6 A
(T) Time
(P) Pressure
10-152 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
d-12110
FIG. 172
FIGS. 172–173: Immediately After Forward Gear

Change
When the Power Shuttle Lever is shifted to the Forward
side the Forward solenoid is immediately actuated and oil
is supplied to the Forward side of the power shuttle clutch.
During this time, the pressure control valve continuously
receives the amount of current (roughly 1.6 A) roughly
equivalent to the maximum pressure and so, the passage
from the relief valve to the tank remains closed.
This measure is intended for rapidly moving the clutch
piston to the clutch meet point.
Because the relief valve is closed, the maximum amount
of flow drives the clutch piston.
d-12111
FIG. 173
4283359M1 10-153
Power Shuttle Valve
2
P
T
d-12112
FIG. 174
FIG. 174: Detailed explanation of the Valve Operation

(1) Immediately After Forward Gear Change
(T) Time
(P) Pressure
10-154 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
d-12113
FIG. 175
FIG. 175: Lapse of 180 ms After Forward Gear Change

Reduce the driving current of the pressure control valve to
nearly O MPa at the point immediately before the clutch
panel reaches the clutch meet point.
The relief valve is fully open and oil supplied to the clutch
decreases and the pressure inside the clutch chamber
goes down to approximately 0.1 MPa (14.5 psi). The
pressure increases to the mechanical relief valve
pressure of 0.12 MPa.
4283359M1 10-155
Power Shuttle Valve
FIG. 176: Schematic Diagram of Valve
d-12114
FIG. 176
1
T
d-12115
FIG. 177
FIG. 177: Detailed Explanation

(1) 180 milliseconds after Forward Gear Change
(T) Time
(P) Pressure
10-156 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
d-12116
FIG. 178
FIG. 178: Forward Gear Change Mechanical Relief

Stabilization Period
The amount of current to the pressure control valve
gradually increases when the mechanical relief pressure
level 0.12 mPa (17.4 psi) has been reached.
The pressure control valve is driven by current that makes
it apply pressure that exceeds the mechanical relief
pressure, the pressure inside the clutch chamber comes
under the control of the proportional pressure control
valve.
4283359M1 10-157
Power Shuttle Valve
FIG. 179: Schematic View of Valve
d-12117
FIG. 179
P 2
T
d-12118
FIG. 180
FIG. 180: Forward Solenoid ON

(1) Forward Gear Change Mechanical Relief
Stabilization Period
(2) Gradually Increase The Control Current Of The
Pressure Control Valve
(T) Time
(P) Pressure
10-158 4283359M1
Power Shuttle Valve
d-12119
FIG. 181
FIG. 181: Proportional Pressure Control Period after

Forward Gear Change
FIG. 182: Schematic View
d-12120
FIG. 182
4283359M1 10-159
Power Shuttle Valve
T
d-12121
FIG. 183
FIG. 183: If the proportional pressure control valve is in

control, increase the driving current of the valve up to the
maximum pressure level to gradually increase the
pressure inside the clutch chamber and continuously
increase the torque of the clutch.
(1) Control Timing Of The Proportional Pressure
Control Valve After Gear Change
10-160 4283359M1
PTO Controls
PTO CONTROLS
PTO CONTROLS
FIG. 184:
Instrumental Panel
(1) PTO (Power Take Off) Indicator Light (1).
d-12125
FIG. 184
FIG. 185: Control Panel
1
(2) PTO Switch
d-12050
FIG. 185
4283359M1 10-161
PTO Controls
1
1
d-12126
FIG. 186
FIG. 186: Left-Hand of Transmission Case

FIG. 187:
(1) Orbit Roll Circuit
1 4
(2) Reduce Valve
(3) Sub Pump
(4) PTO Clutch
(5) PTO Clutch Control Solenoid 5
2
3
d-12127
FIG. 187
10-162 4283359M1
PTO Controls
d-12128
FIG. 188
FIG. 188: PTO Control System Circuit (Quadra Shift

System)
4283359M1 10-163
PTO Controls
Gear Shift 1 Solenoid Valve Gear Shift 1 Solenoid Valve
Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid valve Power Shuttle Reverse Solenoid valve
Buzzer Contact Buzzer Contact
Shift Position Sensor (1-2) Shift Position Sensor (1-2)
Shift Position Sensor (3-4) Shift Position Sensor (3-4)
Timer Shift Mode (Shift Position Sensor Timer Shift Mode (Shift Position Sensor malfunction Pull
malfunction Pull Terminal) Terminal)
Shift Butten Shift Button
PTO Selectable Switch (PTO equivalent Power Take Off Selectable Switch (Power Take Off
system) Equivalent System)
Check Mode (Pull Fuse) Check Mode (Pull Fuse)
DATA Communication (External) Data Communication (External)
AC Air Conditioner
Buzzer Contact (Instrument Panel) Buzzer Contact (Instrument Panel)
10-164 4283359M1
PTO Controls
NO Description Wire Color Circuit NO.

A1 MAIN Switch AC Position (12V) R/L 300
A6 PTO Control Solenoid Valve Y 302
A10 GND B 1001
B18 PTO Switch L/Y 33
B25 PTO Selectable Switch G/R 360

R/L Red Blue
Y Yellow
B Black
L/Y Blue Yellow
G/R Green Red
FIG. 189: Operating PTO by using PTO switch

PTO control solenoid will be controlled by the PTO 1
Switch.
Accordingly PTO clutch would be engage or disengage
by PTO switch.
PTO Switch=OFF 3 2
PTO Control sol.=OFF and PTO Monitor Lamp=OFF
PTO Switch=ON
PTO Control sol.=ON and PTO Monitor Lamp=ON
(1) PTO Selectable Switch d-12131
(2) PTO Switch FIG. 189

(3) PTO Selectable Switch Monitor lamp
FIG. 190: PTO Control and PTO Switch Fuse Harness
d-12129
FIG. 190
4283359M1 10-165
PTO Controls
FIG. 191: Electrical Circuit
(1) PTO Clutch Control Solenoid
1
(2) PTO Clutch
(3) Main Pump
d-12134
d-12132
FIG. 191
10-166 4283359M1
PTO Controls
FIG. 192
FIG. 192: Operating the PTO with the PTO selectable

switch, the pressurization of fluid will be changed by the
PTO selectable switch.
PTO Selectable Switch = OFF
Normal Condition Ex; Tiller
(1) Pressure
(2) Time
(a) 0.8 mPa (116 psi)
(b) 1.9 mPa (275 psi)
More than 17 kgf/cm2 is normal arrival pressure
4283359M1 10-167
PTO Controls
a
a
d-12134
FIG. 193
FIG. 193: PTO Selectable Switch = ON (Switch Monitor

Lamp ON)
Smooth Engagement (Mower)
(1) Pressure
(2) Time
(a) 1.9 mPa (275 psi)
More than 1.6 mPa (232 psi) is normal arrival pressure.
10-168 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Instrument Panel (Except Digital panel) ............. 10-85

Instrument Panel Except Digital Panel
Instrument panel (Except Cab Models)
(1) GLOW Plug Monitor (2) Battery Charge ....... 10-85
MF 47 52 HP HYDRO ............................................ A-1
Power Shuttle Controls .................................... 10-141

Power Shuttle Valve ......................................... 10-149
PTO Controls ................................................... 10-161
Resistance of Solenoid Valves .......................... 10-83
Solenoid Valves ................................................. 10-65

Switches and Relays .......................................... 10-91
Wire Diagrams AND COLOR CHART .................. 10-1
4283359M1 10-169
Index
NOTES
10-170 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
11 - Hydrostatic Steering
Contents
GENERAL INFORMATION
Construction ................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Major Components .................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Integral Orbit Roll .................................................................................................................................... 11-3
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 11-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-15
..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-15
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 11-19
4283359M1 11-i
Contents
NOTES
11-ii 4283359M1
General Information
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION
5
2
1
3
4
I5537
FIG. 1
FIG. 1: The steering unit (mini-orbit roll) controls (1) Relief Valve 103 bar (1493 psi)
hydraulic power and activates the front wheels directly
(2) Flow Divider Valve
through the power steering cylinder. It features minimized
vibration at the steering wheel because vibration of the (3) Hydraulic Pump
front wheels is not directly transmitted to the steering
wheel. (4) Strainer
Hydraulic fluid divided into the system through the (5) Orbit Roll
flow-divider valve is controlled by the orbit roll to activate
the cylinder.
In accordance with the operation of the steering wheel,
the rotary valve and metering device built in the orbit roll
controls the direction and flow rate of the hydraulic fluid
and activates the power-assisted steering system works.
NOTE: Hydro Transmission Schematic shown. Standard
Transmission does not have a flow divider
installed between the hydraulic pump and the
steering orbit roll.
4283359M1 11-1
General Information
Major Components
4 5 6 7
8
1 2
11
4 9 12
10
3
13
14
15
24 16
23
22 17
18 19
21 20
MFC8555
FIG. 2
FIG. 2: Overall view of major components. (13) Valve Assembly

(1) Wire Band 250 (14) O-ring
(2) Delivery Hose Assembly (2) (15) Wire Band 140
(3) Clamp 28x55 (16) Hydraulic Hose Assembly 1700
(4) O-ring (2) (17) Oil Pump Gasket
(5) 90 degree Left Elbow Assembly (2) (18) O-ring (2)
(6) Assembly Adapter L/G1/4 (19) Wire Band 140 (2)
(7) Bolt (3) (20) Bolt (3)
(8) Lock Washer (3) (21) Flange
(9) O-ring (22) O-ring
(10) 45 degree Elbow Assembly (23) Delivery Flange Assembly
(11) Assembly Adapter L/G1/4 (24) Bolt
(12) Hose Assembly 1350
11-2 4283359M1
General Information
Integral Orbit Roll
2
3
1
4 5
6
31 30
29
7
9
29
8
29
13
14
15
16
15
22
12
12
22
23
22
11
25
24
24
20
28
10
19
27
21
17 18
26
I5815
FIG. 3
4283359M1 11-3
General Information
FIG. 3: Component listing: (16) Flat Springs (2)
(1) Bolts (6) (17) Adjust Plug
(2) Retainer Bolt Assembly (18) O-ring
(3) Retainer Bolt (19) Spring
(4) Spring Pin (20) Poppet
(5) Ball (21) Collar
(6) End Cap (22) Bearing Races (2)
(7) Gyrator (23) Thrust Needle Bearing
(8) Spacer Plate (24) Seal
(9) Drive (25) Oil Seal
(10) Control Valve Assembly (26) Dust Seal
(11) Housing (27) Retaining Ring
(12) Sleeve (28) Seal Bushing
(13) Spool (29) O-rings
(14) Pin (30) Seal
(15) Centering Springs (4) (31) O-ring
11-4 4283359M1
General Information
Disassembly
• When repairing the steering unit, a clean workplace is
essential.
• Before disconnecting piping, clean around the ports
of the unit.
• Remove dust accumulating around the joint of the
unit with a wire brush.
NOTE: The unit should be held in a vice during operation
although almost of all the illustrations below for
easy viewing show no vice.
Disassembly of Rotor Side

FIG. 4: Hold the unit with the rotor side turned upward in
the vice, inserting copper plates or the like between the
unit and vice, and tighten the unit softly.
Over tightening may damage the unit.
Remove six bolts and the retainer bolt assembly using a
5/16 inch socket wrench.
I5816
FIG. 4
FIG. 5: Remove the end cap.
Remove O-ring from end cap.
Remove seal, and O-ring, from gerotor.
I5817
FIG. 5
FIG. 6: Remove gerotor taking care not to let the star
rotor fall from it.
Remove O-ring, from the gerotor.
Remove drive.
I5818
FIG. 6
4283359M1 11-5
General Information
FIG. 7: Remove spacer plate and then remove O-ring
from housing.
Turn the housing upside down and remove ball taking
care not to allow it to fall into a groove, a side hole, etc.
I5819
FIG. 7
Disassembly of Control Side

FIG. 8: Remove housing from the vice and place it on
cloth.
Pry the end of retaining ring out of the groove using a
small screwdriver and remove the ring from the housing.
I5820
FIG. 8
FIG. 9: Turn spool and sleeve so that pin becomes level.
Then push the spool and sleeve to remove seal bushing.
I5821
FIG. 9
FIG. 10: Remove oil seal from seal bushing.
I5822
FIG. 10
11-6 4283359M1
General Information
FIG. 11: Remove dust seal with a screwdriver taking
care not to damage the seal bushing.
Remove two bearing races and thrust needle bearing.
I5823
FIG. 11
FIG. 12: Pull off spool and sleeve from housing.
NOTE: Pull off the spool and sleeve assembly in the
opposite direction of the flange while turning it
right and left.
I5824
FIG. 12
FIG. 13: Pull off pin.
I5825
FIG. 13
FIG. 14: Push out spool a little and push off centering
springs and flat springs.
I5826
FIG. 14
4283359M1 11-7
General Information
FIG. 15: Pull off spool out of sleeve.
NOTE: Pull off the spool in the direction shown by the
arrowhead while turning it right and left.
I5827
FIG. 15
FIG. 16: Remove O-ring from housing.
NOTE: Never adjust the relief valve. When it is defective,
replace control valve assembly.
I5828
FIG. 16
Inspection
Check the contact surfaces of all components. Replace
defective ones. Wash all metal parts in clean solvent and
dry them with pressurized air.
Do not dry them with cloth or paper, or lint and paper
waste contaminate the hydraulic system, which will lead
to system trouble. Never file parts or polish them with
coarse sandpaper.
NOTE: Apply fresh grease to O-rings ahead of time.
We recommend used O-rings and seals be replaced with
new ones whenever possible
11-8 4283359M1
General Information
Assembly
Assembly of Control Side
FIG. 17: Insert the spool into sleeve while turning the
spool slowly.
NOTE: Make sure that the spool that turns smoothly by
holding the spool's splined part.
I5829
FIG. 17
FIG. 18: Align the spring grooves of the spool and sleeve
and insert centering springs and flat springs. Set the
spring ends flush with the sleeve circumference.
NOTE: Set four centering springs and two flat springs
together with the cut-away parts turned
downward.
I5830
FIG. 18
FIG. 19: Insert pin into the holes of the sleeve and spool
and set both pin ends flush with the circumference of the
sleeve.
I5825
FIG. 19
FIG. 20: Insert the assembly of spool and sleeve from
back of housing.
NOTE: Insert the spool/sleeve assembly carefully
without jamming, turning it right. Make sure that
the assembly turns smoothly.
Place housing, on a clean level surface and insert O-ring.
I5831
FIG. 20
4283359M1 11-9
General Information
FIG. 21: Insert two bearing races, and thrust needle
bearing.
NOTE: The thrust needle bearing should be located
between the bearing races.
I5832
FIG. 21
FIG. 22: Set dust seal, into seal bushing.
NOTE: Install the dust seal with the flat surface turned
toward the bushing.
Push oil seal, into seal bushing securely by pushing it with
your fingers.
Insert seal bushing into spool while turning the bushing.
NOTE: Drive the bushing into the spool securely using a
plastic hammer.
I5833
FIG. 22
FIG. 23: Insert retaining ring into the groove of housing.
NOTE: Push open the retaining ring with a screwdriver
so that it is seated completely and fully expanded
in the groove.
i5834
FIG. 23
11-10 4283359M1
General Information
Assembly of Gerotor Side
FIG. 24: Insert ball into the bolt hole and make sure that
the ball is seated in the proper position.
NOTE: Make sure that the spool/sleeve assembly is
deformed a little when the ball is installed.
I5835
FIG. 24
FIG. 25: Insert O-ring into housing.
Place spacer plate as shown and align the oil holes.
NOTE: The bolt hole and oil holes are different.
I5836
FIG. 25
FIG. 26: Insert drive.
NOTE: Provide a guide line on the drive end face parallel
with the pin axis with a felt pen for correct
installation.
I5837
FIG. 26
FIG. 27: Insert O-ring on gerotor.
Install O-ring and seat on gerotor.
A line from a bottom land of the rotor to the opposite
bottom land.
Guide line for the pin axis
Pin axis
Port surface
A, B, and C should be parallel to each other.
I5838
FIG. 27
4283359M1 11-11
General Information
FIG. 28: Turn O-ring on gerotor toward spacer plate and
install the gerotor on the drive by aligning the bottom land
to bottom land line of the gerotor with the guide line on the
drive.
NOTE: When the bolt holes of the gyrator and placer
plate do not align to each other, turn the gyrator
housing alone.
Insert O-ring on end cap.
I5839
FIG. 28
FIG. 29: Place end cap on gerotor and align bolt holes.
I5817
FIG. 29
FIG. 30: Apply oil to the threads of retainer bolt assembly
and bolts ahead of time. Then insert them into end cap.
NOTE: Make sure that there is no pinching of the O-ring
and tighten the bolts in the sequence mentioned
above to the specified torque.
Temporary tightening 10.85 Nm (8.0 lbf ft)

torque.
Final tightening torque. 20.33 Nm (15 lbf ft)
NOTE: Set a handle to the spool and make sure that the I5840
spool turns smoothly.
FIG. 30
11-12 4283359M1
General Information
Flow Control Valve Assembly
8 9
7
5
2
11
3
4
10
I5902
FIG. 31
FIG. 31: Flow control valve assembly (flow divider).

(1) Body
(2) Spool
(3) Spring Guide
(4) Spring
(5) Spool Stopper
(6) Plug
(7) O-ring
(8) O-ring
(9) O-ring
(10) O-ring
(11) Filter
4283359M1 11-13
General Information
NOTES
11-14 4283359M1
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems Location Possible Cause Countermeasures
Off-set column center. Repair (if loosened bolts

when tightening the
column on the orbit roll
makes the steering lighter
to turn, the cause of the
trouble is an offset center
of column.)
Orbit Roll Seized spool/sleeve Replace assembly.

assembly due to trapped
foreign matter.
Too high back pressure. Correct the back pressure.
The seven end cap bolts are Loosen the bolts.

to tight.
It is not operating. Operate it.

Steering wheel is heavy to turn.
Worn or damaged pump. Replace pump.
Pump
Pump is rotating in reverse. Correct.
Insufficient pump delivery. Correct the pressure and

flow rate.
Defective. Replace the valve.
Relief Valve
Set pressure is to low. Correct the regulation
pressure.
Flow Divider Seized position. Disassemble, clean and

assemble.
Cylinder Area is receiving insufficient Replace with proper

pressure. cylinder.
4283359M1 11-15
Troubleshooting
Seized spool. Disassemble, clean and

assemble.
Clogged damping orifice. Disassemble, clean and

assemble.
Priority Valve
Insufficient control pressure Replace with proper
of spring. spring.
Low regulation pressure of Correct regulation

relief valve. pressure.
Seized spool/sleeve Replace.

assembly.
Steering wheel does not return to
neutral position when it is released Orbit Roll Too high back pressure. Correct the back pressure.
or it has a tendency to turn by itself.
Off-set center from that of Correct.
column.
Trapped air within gerotor Bleed the lines.

pump.
Orbit Roll
Insufficient delivery against Increase delivery rate.
steering system
requirement.
Cylinder does not react to turning of
steering wheel smoothly or at all.
Trapped air. Bleed the lines.
Cylinder
Broken piston. Replace the piston.
Overload/anti-cavity Valve leaking. Replace the valve.

valves
Orbit Roll Incorrect valve timing. Correct valve timing.

Steering wheel is turned in reverse.
Piping Mistake in port connection. Correct port connection.
Oil leakage. Worn oil seal. Replace oil seal
Contaminated working fluid. Provide the proper

countermeasure to prevent
Through shafts (circumference of oil contamination.
splined part).
Back pressure is to high. Correct the back pressure.
11-16 4283359M1
Troubleshooting
Broken o-rings. Replace the O-rings.

Contact surfaces between housing,
spacer plate, gerotor and end cap.
Pinched o-rings. Replace the O-rings.
4283359M1 11-17
Troubleshooting
NOTES
11-18 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Assembly ............................................................. 11-9

Assembly of Control Side ..................................... 11-9
Assembly of Gerotor Side .................................. 11-11
Construction ......................................................... 11-1
Disassembly ......................................................... 11-5

Disassembly of Control Side ................................ 11-6
Disassembly of Rotor Side ................................... 11-5
Flow Control Valve Assembly ............................ 11-13
Hydrostatic Steering
General Information .......................................... 11-1
Integral Orbit Roll .............................................. 11-3
Major Components ........................................... 11-2
Inspection ............................................................. 11-8
Major Components ............................................... 11-2
Troubleshooting ................................................. 11-15
4283359M1 11-19
Index
NOTES
11-20 4283359M1
Contents
Massey Ferguson ®
1533 / 1540
Compact Tractor

4283359M1
12 - Cab and Air Conditioning
CAB AND AIR CONDITIONER

Roof ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Door ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
Adjustment of Opening Angles of the Door ............................................................................................. 12-4
Door Lock ................................................................................................................................................ 12-5
Glass Bonding ......................................................................................................................................... 12-6
Ventilator ................................................................................................................................................. 12-6
Cabin Electrical Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 12-6
Air Conditioner Piping .............................................................................................................................. 12-9
Mirrors ..................................................................................................................................................... 12-9
Insulator Installing Points ...................................................................................................................... 12-11
Outline of product ........................................................................................................................................ 12-12
Outline ................................................................................................................................................... 12-12
Major components ....................................................................................................................................... 12-13
Specification .......................................................................................................................................... 12-13
Structure, Operation, and Control ................................................................................................................ 12-14
Structure ................................................................................................................................................ 12-14
Condenser ............................................................................................................................................. 12-15
Receiver Dryer ...................................................................................................................................... 12-16
Air Conditioner Unit ............................................................................................................................... 12-16
Expansion Valve .................................................................................................................................... 12-17
Pressure Switch .................................................................................................................................... 12-17
Thermostat ............................................................................................................................................ 12-18
Operation and control of air conditioner ....................................................................................................... 12-19
Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 12-19
Control ................................................................................................................................................... 12-19
Check and maintenance .............................................................................................................................. 12-20
Daily Check and Handling of Air Conditioner ........................................................................................ 12-21
Refrigerant Amount Check Table .......................................................................................................... 12-22
Air Conditioner Belt ............................................................................................................................... 12-23
Condenser ............................................................................................................................................. 12-24
Air Conditioner Hoses and Pipes .......................................................................................................... 12-24
Air Conditioner Filter .............................................................................................................................. 12-24
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 12-26
Compressor ........................................................................................................................................... 12-26
Condenser ............................................................................................................................................. 12-27
Receiver Dryer ...................................................................................................................................... 12-27
Air conditioner ....................................................................................................................................... 12-28
Control Cable ........................................................................................................................................ 12-28
Precautions for Assembling the Air Conditioner and Relative Components Works .............................. 12-31
Refrigerant Charging ............................................................................................................................. 12-33
Air Evacuation ....................................................................................................................................... 12-35
Refrigerant Charging ............................................................................................................................. 12-37
4283359M1 12-i
Contents
Troubleshooting with a Service Gauge Manifold ................................................................................... 12-41
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 12-45
12-ii 4283359M1
Cab and Air Conditioner
CAB AND AIR CONDITIONER
ROOF
FIG. 1: The roof can be opened at the front pivoting the
fulcrum on the rear windshield.
The insulator bonding the roof and the inner roof together
will be damaged once the roof is opened. The insulator
should be replaced with a new one.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to close the rear windshield
when you open the roof, or the roof or the rear
windshield might be damaged.
I-10386
FIG. 1
FIG. 2: Opened roof view.
(1) Insulator
(2) Blow-out duct (left-hand)
(3) Blow-out duct (right-hand) 2 1 3
(4) Air Conditioner
4
I-10387
FIG. 2
FIG. 3: Roof fixing screws (1) three on front end.
1
I-10388
FIG. 3
4283359M1 12-1
FIG. 4: Roof fixing screw (1) , one each both sides.
I-10389
FIG. 4
DOOR
FIG. 5: The door is installed in the cabin frame after it is
sub-assembled with following parts.
The parts, which should be sub-assembled on the door
beforehand, are:
• Outer Handle
• Lock Bracket
• Lock Assembly
• Door Hinge 1
• Door Frame
• Door Bracket
• Door Insulator etc.
NOTE: The door hinge having the switch mount must be
installed on the upper part.
The bolts and nuts that tighten the windshield and the
hinges must be tightened temporarily (1). The hinge pins
should be correctly centered later.
When the door is installed on the cabin frame, the door
bracket must be fit on the mount in the pillar while the door 1
is opened.
I-10390
FIG. 5
12-2 4283359M1
FIG. 6: Right-hand pillar shown.
(1) Air-conditioner Drain Hose
(2) Door Switch
(3) Hinge Monting Bolts
I-10391
FIG. 6
FIG. 7: Left-hand pillar shown.
(1) Air-conditioner Drain Hose
NOTE: When installing the door, take care not to allow
the hoses and wire harness to be caught in the 1
door.
When the hinges are fit on the mounts in the pillar, close
the door and fix the lock on the striker.
The bolts and nuts that have been tightened temporarily
make sure the nuts are tightened to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 39.2 to 49.1 Nm (28.91 to 36.21 lbf ft).
Four hinge bolts are temporarily tightened, and only two
uppermost bolts are tightened securely.
Adjust the door windshield to fit in the cabin frame.
Tighten all the hinge bolts securely after adjustment. The
striker must be shifted in position if required.
Adjust the door switch mounting plate so that the room
lamp works normally.
I-10392
FIG. 7
4283359M1 12-3
Adjustment of Opening Angles of the Door
The angles will be adjusted by shifting the position of the
door damper on the cabin frame. The unused holes are
capped.
FIG. 8: When shipped, the door is set to 1m in opening

width.
Damper setting position rear (1).
I-10393
FIG. 8
FIG. 9: After adjustment, the door opens about 65 cm in
width.
Damper setting position front (1).
I-10394
FIG. 9
12-4 4283359M1
Door Lock
FIG. 10: Install the lock assembly on the bracket with the
unlocking link inserted into the receptacle in the pawl of
the lock fork.
(1) Handle Insulator
2
(2) Outer Handle
1
(3) Lower Handle Insulator
1
I-10395
FIG. 10
FIG. 11: After tightening the lock assembly, confirm it
works smoothly when pushing in the lock button in the
outer handle slowly. When it interferes with something, 1
loosen the lock fork mounting screws and adjust to
remove interference. 2 3
(1) Lock Fork Comp.
(2) Inner Handle
(3) Outer Handle Door Lock
(4) Lock Assembly
(5) Lock Bracket 4
5
I-10396
FIG. 11
FIG. 12: Attach the door cover (1), and insert the grip (2)
onto the inner handle. Spread a synthetic rubber
adhesive (black) on the lever before inserting the grip. 2
1
I-10397
FIG. 12
4283359M1 12-5
Glass Bonding
Refer to the following glass bonding points for details.
Ventilator
AT (Small Type)
FIG. 13: The half lock mechanism (1) is installed on the
rear windshield for communication with people outside
the cabin.
• Rotate the lever by 90 degrees to release the lock.
1
• Notches are provided on the half lock stay in the fully
close and half close positions, so lock the stay in
respective positions securely.
• Return the handle to lock.
Large Type
• Use the corner windshield for ventilation and for
communication with people outside the cabin.
I-10398
FIG. 13
Cabin Electrical Equipment

FIG. 14: Room lamp
The room lamp (1) works in each switch position as
follows:
ON: It always turns on.
1
Neutral: it turns on when the door is opened and turns off
when the door closed. The timing to switch on/off the
lamp can be adjusted by bending the switch mounting
plate.
OFF: It always turns off.
I-10399
FIG. 14
12-6 4283359M1
FIG. 15: Wiper and Flood Light Switches
The wiper switch is provided on the left side of the mater
panel and the flood light switch is on the right side.
Left side panel shown. 1
(1) Front windshield wiper switch and front washer
switch.
(2) Rear windshield wiper switch and rear washer
switch.
2
I-10400
I 10400
FIG. 15
FIG. 16: Right side panel shown.
(1) Flood Lamp Switch
2
(2) Pilot Lamp
1
(3) Rear Flood Lamp Switch
I-10401
FIG. 16
FIG. 17: Air Conditioner Control Panel
The control panel is fixed on the right upper frame, the air
conditioner unit, and the inner roof.
It is fixed to the inner roof with screws and nuts in order of 1 2
the panel and the control panel.
(1) Air Conditioner Unit Mounting Point
(2) Fixing Point to Inner Roof
I-10402
FIG. 17
4283359M1 12-7
Air Conditioner Dual Pressure Switch
FIG. 18: The dual pressure switch (1) is installed on the
right side front of the roof.
Refer to the following explanation about the air conditioner
1
for the function and the structure.
I-10403
FIG. 18
Cabin Wire Harness

FIG. 19: The cabin wire harness is supplied from the
engine room running through the dash panel and under
the left fender via the underside of the step into the cabin.
Inside the cabin it runs from above the left fender and
through the pillar into both sides of the upper frame.
I-10404
FIG. 19
12-8 4283359M1
Air Conditioner Piping
Drain Hoses
Five drain hoses are connected to the air conditioner unit.
From the right side of the unit:
• in the front to the right front frame
• in the rear from the right upper frame to the right pillar
and
• underside of the right fender
From the left side of the unit:
• in the front to halfway of the front frame
• in the center to the left front frame
• in the rear from the left upper frame to the left pillar
and
• underside the left fender
Air Conditioner Hoses

FIG. 20: Both the upper and lower pressure hoses run
through the right upper frame, the right pillar, the right
fender, underside the step, the dash panel to the engine
room, that is, to the compressor and receiver dryer.
Heater Hose
Engine delivery side:
• from the left side of the engine room through the left
front of the step and left front frame to the water valve
Engine return side:
• from the air conditioner unit through the upper frame
front, right front frame, and right front of the step to I-10405
the right side of the engine room FIG. 20
Mirrors
Adjustment of Arm Assembly
The roll pin must be seated securely in the groove of the
stay.
Tighten the M12 nut 5 until it shows no play.
Confirm that the arm assembly swivels smoothly and lock
it with the double nuts.
Apply grease to the roll pin ahead of time.
Tighten the bolts and nuts to the torque specified in JIS
D101001.
4283359M1 12-9
6 7
5
3
4 2 8
I-10406
FIG. 21
FIG. 21: Before installing the cap, remove dust or water

from the place where to install the cap on, apply an
adhesive and leave it as it is about 5 minutes. Then past
the cap on.
The cap should be aligned with the roll pin.
Arm assembly should rotate smoothly after installation.
After having tightened screws, turn the mirror assembly
several times. Then retighten it again.
After installation, the screws should not make no noises.
(1) Mirror
(2) Arm Assembly
(3) Washer
(4) Pressure spring (22)
(5) Nut
(6) Nut
(7) Cap
(8) Cap
12-10 4283359M1
Insulator Installing Points
Target Parts
FIG. 22: Target parts shown.
Roof (1) and roof insulator (2).
Upper frame and front roof insulator. 1
Cabin frame and rear insulator (for sealing rear
windshield).
Cabin frame and side insulator (for corner wind shied).
Treatment of Sticking Surface

Wash dirt and dust, etc. from the sticking surface by using
2
the degreasing agent.
Apply primer coat to the surface. I-10407
Wash primer: Sumitomo 3M K-20 FIG. 22
Spread primer by using gauze etc. and let it dray.

NOTE: Do not touch the surface where primer is applied.
Preparation for Sticking

When the atmospheric temperature is 15 degrees C (59
degrees F) or less, parts to be stick and sticking surface
should be heated by a heating apparatus standard: 25 to
50 degrees C (77 to 122 degrees F).
After confirming where to tick, peel off the protective cover
of the double-faced tape and hold the part temporarily. Be
careful not to touch the adhesive surface of the tape.
NOTE: It is impossible to try and stick the tape for the
second time on the primer coat surface.
Sticking by Pressure
Press the upper part of the double-faced tape.
Adhesive power weakens when air is caught between the
adhesive tape and surface, so apply sufficient pressure.
Bonding strength increases to the double-faced tape with
the passage of time. Avoid washing the vehicle for 20
minutes after installation.
4283359M1 12-11
OUTLINE OF PRODUCT
Outline
3
4 1
I-10386
FIG. 23
FIG. 23: The outline of the genuine air conditioner for the (1) Condenser in front of Radiator
AT tractor will be explained. A scroll type compressor is
(2) Air Conditioner Unit
employed and installed on the upper part of the engine.
An air conditioner unit is installed under the roof. Hot air (3) Fresh Air Filter
blow and cool air blow can be switched by the lever to
provide comfortable cabin room through heating, cooling, (4) Compressor and Belt
and dehumidification. Control of hot and cool air blow can
be achieved by the control lever and fan switch, which
provides three-stages. The air delivery duct can be
selected by the changeover lever or by opening or closing
the grille. The above figure shows the positions of the
major components.
12-12 4283359M1
MAJOR COMPONENTS
Specification
Item Specification Remarks

Performance Air-Cooling 3.0 kW, Airflow 300 cu m/h (cu Compressor speed:
ft/h) 2800 rpm
Air-Heating 3.4 kW, Airflow 230 cu m/h Hot water circulation:
(cu ft/h) 6 l/min (1.6 gal/min)
Nominal Working Voltage 12V
Model SCSA06C
Compressor Delivery Volume 60 cu cm/rev (1.8 cu in/rev
Working Speed 950 to 3000 rpm
Lubricant ND-OIL8, 60 cm3
Model LC20 (Double Row)
Magnetic Clutch Drive Belt Type A, Single
Pulley Effective Diameter 120
Power Consumption 35W
Condenser Type Multi-Flow with Louver
Receiver Dryer Capacity 370 cu cm (22.6 cu in)
Dehumidification 32g (desiccant 290g) 60 degrees C (140
degrees F) 90 percent
in the air
Capacity
Evaporator Plate fins, fin-pitch 1.9mm
(0.07 in)
Air Conditioner Unit Heater Core Corrugated fins, fin-pitch 2.5
mm (0.10 in)
Blower Motor 60 ferrite magnet, Power
consumption 120W
High-Pressure Relief Relief Pressure:
3.4 to 4.14 mPa (493.13 to
600.46 psi)
Pressure Switch Valve Closing Pressure:
2.75 mPa (398.85 psi) and
over
High-Pressure ON 3.14 mPa (455.42 psi)
Low-Pressure OFF 0.196 mPa (28.43 psi)
Water-Tightness Indoor JISD0203-S2
Outdoor JISD0203-M2
Temperature Control Lever Type
Type of Air Conditioner Hot Water Reheating
Refrigerant to be Applied R134a
NOTE: These specifications might change without a

previous notice for the product improvement.
4283359M1 12-13
STRUCTURE, OPERATION, AND
CONTROL
Structure
Compressor Assembly
3
1
4
8
5
7
6 2 3
I-10408
FIG. 24
FIG. 24: The compressor pressurizes the gaseous

refrigerant that has evaporated depriving the indoor heat
in the evaporator and delivers it to the high-pressure
circuit again.
The scroll type compressor is composed of a fixed scroll
and a movable scroll. The movable scroll turns inside the
fixed scroll and the capacity of the space partitioned by
both scrolls changes, and therefore, refrigerant is inhaled
and compressed. The lubrication of the compressor is
done with the compressor oil contained in the gas
refrigerant. Therefore, a pressure switch is provided in the
circuit to shut off the magnetic clutch when refrigerant
decreases in order to protect the compressor from
seizure.
(1) Ball bearing
(2) Movable scroll
(3) Fixed scroll
(4) Delivery valve
(5) Delivery port
(6) Needle roller bearing
(7) Shaft
(8) Shaft seal
12-14 4283359M1
Magnetic Clutch
FIG. 25: The magnetic clutch (1) transmits or shuts off
the engine power to the compressor while the engine is
running while the air conditioner switch is on. It stops the 1
compressor when the indoor temperature has reached to
the specified level set by the control lever and restarts the
compressor when the temperature exceeds the specified
level.
I-10409
FIG. 25
Safety Relief Valve

The safety relief valve opens when pressure on a
high-pressure side of the refrigerating cycle rises
abnormally, and a part of the refrigerant is discharged.
Opening pressure: 3.43 to 4.17 MPa (497.50 to 604.80
psi)
Closing pressure: 2.75 MPa (398.85 PSI) or lower
Condenser
FIG. 26: The condenser plays the role to return liquid the
refrigerant gas of high pressure and high temperature.
Therefore, when the air-cooling efficiency of the 1
condenser is poor, it deteriorates performance of the air
conditioner.
(1) Intake Side
(2) Delivery Side
IMPORTANT: When the condenser cores are stopped
up, the air conditioner doesn't get cold at all and
the refrigerant gas is pressurized excessively,
2
which may lead to compressor seizure or belt
slippage. Advise users to check it everyday and I-10410
keep it clean.
FIG. 26
4283359M1 12-15
Receiver Dryer
Receiver Tank
FIG. 27: In the air conditioner system, the compressor
speed changes and required volume of the refrigerant 1
also changes as the engine speed change. This 2
fluctuation in the required volume of refrigerant is covered
by the receiver tank. When the cooling circuit does not
need much refrigerant, surplus is stored in the tank. When
more refrigerant is required, necessary volume is
supplied through the receiver tube to the circuit. Besides, 4
the tank serves to compensate the loss of refrigerant, 3
which dissipates osmosis through hoses.
(1) Refrigerant inlet 5 6
(2) Refrigerant outlet
I-10411
(3) Desiccant
FIG. 27
(4) Strainer
(5) Receiver tube
(6) Receiver tank
Dryer (Desiccant)
Moisture content in the cooling circuit will cause valve
troubles in the compressor. Deterioration of lubricant,
erosion of metal surfaces in the circuit, and stopped up
circuit caused by freezing in the expansion valve. In the air
conditioner system a synthetic zeolite is adopted as an
appropriate desiccant to eliminate moisture content from
the circuit. A frozen expansion valve shows that the
present desiccant has lost its capability to abort moisture
content, so it should be replaced with a fresh one.
IMPORTANT: When the cooling circuit is disassembled
and leave it as it is for a long time, the desiccant
will absorb moisture in the air and lose its
moisture absorbing capacity, which will result in
the exchange of the receiver dryer. When the
cooling circuit is disassembled, be sure to plug
up the openings without fail.
Air Conditioner Unit

FIG. 28: It is composed of the evaporator, the heater
cores, the expansion valve, the blower motor, and the
control system parts, etc. The fins are cooled by fogged
refrigerant of low pressure and low temperature sent from
the expansion valve and the evaporator deprives the heat
and moisture of the indoor air ventilated by the blower
motor. Moreover, the heater cores located in front of the
evaporator are heated by the hot water from the engine
and warms up the air, which will lead to dehumidification
of warm air assisted by the evaporator.
I-10412
FIG. 28
12-16 4283359M1
Expansion Valve
The expansion valve makes the liquid refrigerant of high
pressure and high temperature sent from the receiver
dryer fogged refrigerant of low pressure and low
temperature by choking. Moreover, this choking action
automatically controls the amount of the refrigerant in the
air conditioner cycle by changing the choking degree
according to the indoor heat load.
Pressure Switch
FIG. 29: The switch detects the high-pressure side
pressure of the cooling circuit, stops the compressor in
abnormal circumstances, and protects the equipment of
the cooling circuit from damage beforehand. It is
composed of two types of switch, that is, high pressure
and low-pressure switches.
I-10413
FIG. 29
4283359M1 12-17
Switch Function Operation Cause of Abnormal

Confirm Method Pressure
Generation
High When the pressure between Check continuity Insufficient heat
Pressure the compressor and the across the radiation of
expansion valve rises terminals. condenser because
abnormally, power supply to of condenser stopped
the compressor magnetic up.
clutch is shut off to protect the
circuit.
Low Power supply to compressor Check continuity Refrigerant leakage
Pressure magnetic clutch is shut off across the from some parts of
when the pressure between terminals. the circuit.
compressor and expansion
valve lowers abnormally
because of refrigerant
leakage, and the compressor
is thus protected from seizure
due to insufficient lubricant.
Thermostat
FIG. 30: Thermostat detects the temperature of the fins
and stops the compressor when the temperature
becomes excessively low to prevent the evaporator from
freezing. The temperature of the evaporator fins is
detected by the capillary tube filled with refrigerant. When
the temperature becomes lower than specified, the
pressure in the internal bellows lowers to break the
contact points. Thus the power supply to the compressor 1
switch is turned off.
(1) Evaporator fin temperature sensor
(2) Contacts
(3) Capillary Tube
(4) Bellows
2
3
4
I-10414
FIG. 30
Operation Checking Method Cause of Abnormal Generation
Check for the continuity between Defective contact points.
terminals.
Gas leakage by defective capillary

tube.
12-18 4283359M1
OPERATION AND CONTROL OF AIR
CONDITIONER
Operation
Start the engine.
Turn on the fan switch. The blower turns.
Turn on the air conditioner switch (A/C). The clutch is
energized.
Select the air outlet by the air outlet changeover lever.
Move the temperature-adjusting lever.
Chill wind blows out through the air outlet grille.
Turn off the air conditioner switch and move the
temperature-adjusting lever to the right, which leads to
heating.
Turn on the air conditioner switch and move the
temperature-adjusting lever to the left, which leads to
cooling and dehumidification.
Control
When the gas pressure exceeds 3.14 mPa (455.42 psi)
The magnetic clutch of the compressor is turned off by
the high-pressure switch.
When the gas pressure becomes 0.2 Mpa (29.01 PSI)
The magnetic clutch of the compressor is turned off by
the low-pressure switch, and the compressor is thus
protected.
4283359M1 12-19
CHECK AND MAINTENANCE
Advise the users to keep up with Daily check and
handling and Periodic check and maintenance in order to
use the air conditioner always in the best condition.
Inspection Points Inspection Items Daily Periodical Inspection Remarks

Check
Inspection Intervals
Every Every Every Every
Week Year 2 8
Years Years
Cooler Engine and Compressor Abnormal noise, oil
X
and Peripheral leakage
Relative Components
Parts Magnetic Abnormal noise.
X
Clutch
Compressor Damage, tension and Every 200
X
Belt aging. hours.
High/Low Damage and aging.
Pressure X
Hoses
Air Blower Rotation and
X
Conditioner Motor abnormal noise.
Unit
Air Filter Clear clogging. X
Condenser Fins Clear clogging. X
Receiver Replace.
Dryer X
Other Wire Damage and

Components Harness corrosion of X
connectors.
Refrigerant Gas leaks.
Piping X
Control Operation
System X
Sight Glass Charged amount of

X
refrigerant.
Heater Hot water hoses Damage and leakage. X
and
related Refrigerant Replace. X
parts
Water Valve Positive open or
close. X
Check and adjustment

Exchange
IMPORTANT: Advise users to check the star (H) -
marked items every day.
12-20 4283359M1
Daily Check and Handling of Air
Conditioner
Check of Level of Refrigerant
FIG. 31: The amount of the refrigerant is checked seeing
the flow of the bubble of the refrigerant through the sight
glass (1) of the receiver dryer.
1
Preparation:
• Start the engine and accelerate to the rated speed.
• Turn on the air-conditioner switch and shift the
airflow-adjusting knob to HI.
• Move the temperature-adjusting lever fully to COOL
(left) position.
NOTE: When the air conditioner has not bee used for a I-10415
long time, that is, two to three weeks, warm up
the engine sufficiently at idling speed. FIG. 31
4283359M1 12-21
Refrigerant Amount Check Table
State of Air Normal Abnormal

Conditioner
Temperature of high A high-pressure A high-pressure pipe Temperature There is a
and low-pressure pipe is hot and a is warm, and a difference is hardly temperature
pipes low-pressure pipe low-pressure pipe is felt on a difference though a
is cold. There is a little cold. There is high-pressure pipe high-pressure pipe is
clearly not so much and a low-pressure hot and a
temperature temperature pipe. low-pressure pipe is
difference. difference. a little warm.
Compressor
delivery side
temperature: 70
degrees C
Compressor intake
side temperature:
5 degrees C
What is seen through Almost transparent Bubbles are always Something misty is No bubbles are seen
sight glass. seen flowing. What is barely seen even when the fan
Though bubbles seen is almost flowing. returns in the
are seen, they transparent or milky maximum speed and
disappear when bubbles are the window is fully
the engine is sometimes seen. opened with the
accelerated or engine at idle.
decelerated.
Pipe joints Normal There is a part dirty There is a part Normal

with oil. extremely dirty with
oil.
Stat of air conditioner Refrigerant There might be some The refrigerant has The system is
amount is proper leakage somewhere. come to almost overcharged with the
and there is no empty. refrigerant.
abnormality.
IMPORTANT: 1. Note that the bubble might be seen

when the outside temperature is low even if the
amount of the refrigerant is filled properly.
2. Check for the temperature difference between
the high and low-pressure pipes, as the system
might be empty with the refrigerant, which of
course results in no cooling.
12-22 4283359M1
Air Conditioner Belt
Inspection
3
2
I-10420
FIG. 32
FIG. 32: Confirm that the belt is deflected by 10 to 15

mm (0.40 to 0.60 in) when the midway of the belt between
the pulleys is pushed by hand.
The air conditioner doesn't operate with a loose drive belt.
Please exchange it for the new one if it has some cracks,
peeling-off, or damage.
(1) Tension Pulley
(2) Bolt
(3) Alternator
(4) Push by Finger (Deflection 10 to 15 mm (0.40 to
0.60 in)
Adjustment
Loosen the tension pulley-tightening nut.
Move the tension pulley with the adjusting bolt so that the
belt deflects by 10 to 15 mm (0.40 to 0.60 in).
After adjustment, tighten the bolts and nuts securely.
Supplementation:
As there is an initial stretch with a new belt, be sure to
retighten it after operating the air conditioner idly for an
hour or so. Neglecting this adjustment will lead to poor air
conditioner operation soon.
Use a genuine belt and tighten it properly. Too tight belt or
a makeshift belt will result in belt breakage.
4283359M1 12-23
Condenser
FIG. 33: Mud and dust that adhere to the condenser are
washed in tap water detaching the mosquito net (1). 1
Correct collapsed fins with a flat screw driver.
I-10421
FIG. 33
Air Conditioner Hoses and Pipes

FIG. 34: Cooler piping (1) shown.
1
I-10422
FIG. 34
FIG. 35: Heater hose (1) shown.
Confirm that the air conditioner hoses and pipes have no
cracks in them. Any defective ones are replaced with new
ones at once.
I-10423
FIG. 35
Air Conditioner Filter

The air conditioner filter should be inspected and made
clean every month or so, which may depend on use
conditions.
When cleaning is neglected, deteriorated airflow rate and
trouble of the air conditioner unit will result.
12-24 4283359M1
FIG. 36: Remove four screws, and open the filter cover.
(1) Air Conditioner Filter
(2) Air Filter
1
(3) Four Screws
3 2
3
I-10424
FIG. 36
FIG. 37: Take out the air conditioner filter.
(1) Air Conditioner Filter
(2) Filter Cover
1
I-10425
FIG. 37
FIG. 38: Blow the filter with compressed air from the
opposite side, that is, the opposite direction of the wind,
which normally passes in the air conditioning operation
through the filter.
Install the filter.
I-10426
FIG. 38
4283359M1 12-25
MAINTENANCE
FIG. 39: Maintenance and detaching of air-conditioning
cycle parts. (1) Compressor
IMPORTANT: The refrigerant gas in the air conditioner 1
cycle should be collected with the refrigerant
recollecting equipment before air conditioner
cycle parts are detached.
After the engine is stopped, disconnect the minus
terminal of the battery.
Charge the system with specified amount of
refrigerant referring to 5. Refrigerant charging”
after having serviced the air conditioner.
I-10427
FIG. 39
Compressor
FIG. 40: Detach the V-belt by loosening the tension
pulley.
Disconnect the wire harness for the magnetic clutch.
Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure hoses
from the compressor. Each opening should be closely
1
plugged with a cap to prevent dust.
Detach the compressor from the bracket by removing
three bolts.
Reinstall the compressor (1) in reverse order of
detachment. Tighten the belt properly referring to
Inspection of 4.2.2. Air conditioner belt. I-10428
FIG. 40
12-26 4283359M1
Condenser
FIG. 41: Detach peripheral parts to remove the
condenser.
Extract the net upward.
Remove the air conditioner piping. Stop each piping hole
should be closely plugged with a cap or the like.
Remove the condenser by unscrewing four bolts.
Reinstall the condenser in reverse order of disassembly.
NOTE: When detaching or attaching the condenser, take
care not to damage the condenser fins.
Receiver Dryer
I-10429
FIG. 41
FIG. 42: Detach the air conditioner piping.
Plug each piping hole closely by installing a cap or the
like.
Detach the receiver dryer by removing two bolts.
Install the receiver dryer in reverse order of disassembly.
(1) Receiver Dryer
I-10430
FIG. 42
4283359M1 12-27
Air conditioner
FIG. 43: Drain engine coolant.
Remove the grilles of the top and side air ducts.
Remove six rivets.
(1) Delivery Duct Grille
(2) Rivets 1
I-10431
FIG. 43
FIG. 44: Open the rooftop by removing five screws.
Remove the wire harness. 1
Disconnect the cable from the air conditioner control
panel and detach the control panel (1).
Disconnect the heater hose(2). 2
Remove the air conditioner piping (3) and plug each pipe
hole closely with a cap or the like. 3
Detach the air conditioner unit by removing six bolts.
Detach five drain hoses from the bottom of the air
conditioner unit. I-10432
IMPORTANT: Before detaching the drain hoses and FIG. 44

heater hoses, be sure to place waste or the like
around the connecting holes of them as some
water remains inside. Also take care not to allow
engine coolant to enter your mouth or eyes.
Control Cable
FIG. 45: Adjustment of mode cable (1).
Insert the mode cable (longer one) into the setting hole of
the mode lever (2).
2
I-10433
FIG. 45
12-28 4283359M1
FIG. 46: Align the end of the outer cover of the cable with
the case rib and hold the cable in the clamp. Turn the
mode lever to the DEF position.
I-10434
FIG. 46
FIG. 47: Insert the terminal of the cable onto the pin of
the control panel lever. Hold the cable in the clamp while
pushing the control panel lever toward DEF side.
1
(1) Clamp
(2) Control Panel Lever
(3) Notice The Direction Of The Cable Is Installed
3
2
I-10435
FIG. 47
FIG. 48: Be sure the mode lever is surely shifted to DEF
or FACE positions respectively by moving the lever to
respective positions.
1
(1) DEF
(2) FACE
(3) Mode Lever 2
IMPORTANT: There is fear of the air leakage due to
defective door seal when the mode lever returns 3
greatly. In that case, return to stage c and reset
the cable.
I-10436
FIG. 48
FIG. 49: Adjustment of temperature control cable.
Insert a end of the temperature control cable (shorter
one) into the hole in the temperature control lever.
(1) Temperature Control Cable
(2) Temperature Control Lever 1
2
I-10437
FIG. 49
4283359M1 12-29
FIG. 50: Align the end face of the outer cover of the
cable with the case rib and hold the cable in the clamp. 1
Shift the control lever to MAXCOOL position.
(1) Outer Cable End
(2) Case Rib
(3) Clamp
(4) Temperature Control Lever 2
3
(5) MAXCOOL
5
I-10438
FIG. 50
FIG. 51: Insert the terminal of the cable onto the pin of
the control panel lever. 1
(1) Pull Outer Cover In This Way 2
(2) Clamp
(3) Control Panel Lever
(4) COOL Side
4
3
I-10439
FIG. 51
FIG. 52: Hold the cable in the clamp while pushing the
control panel lever toward COOL side and pulling the
outer cover in the direction of the arrow.
(1) Temperature Control Lever
1
I-10440
FIG. 52
12-30 4283359M1
FIG. 53: Move the temperature control lever toward
WARM side once and then move it toward MAXCOOL 1
until it stops. 2
The line A on the water valve lever should be located
toward SHUT SIDE more than the s-marked line B on the
water valve case.
(1) Water Valve lever
(2) Water valve Case
NOTE: When the line A is located toward OPEN side
more than the line B, insufficient chilling may
occur due to hot water leakage. Return to stage c
and reset the water valve lever.
I-10441
FIG. 53
Precautions for Assembling the Air

Conditioner and Relative Components
Works
Special Freezer Oil
Because special freezer oil ND-OIL8 is specified in this air
conditioner for new refrigerant R134a, oil other than
ND-OIL8 cannot be used. As ND-OIL8 absorbs moisture
easily, and erodes paint and resin, note the following
points:
• All the piping joints of a new compressor and installed
chilling circuit components should not be left open to
the open air. (The valves and caps the compressor
piping openings are removed immediately before
connecting the piping. When the piping connections
are detached for repair, plug the openings with a cap
or the like promptly.)
• Take care not to allow ND-OIL8 to adhere to paint
work and resin surfaces. When some oil adheres to
paint work or resin surfaces by any chance, wipe it off
promptly.
Connector Tube or Bolt Sizes Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (lbf ft)
Nut Type 8 Liquid Piping 11.8 to 14.7 8.7 to 10.84

D1/2 Discharge Piping 19.6 to 24.6 14.46 to 18.14
D5/8 Suction Piping 29.4 to 34.3 21.68 to 25.30
Block Joint Receiver M6 bolt (4T) 3.92 to 6.86 2.89 to 5.06
Other than above M6 7.85 to 11.8 5.79 to 8.70
Bolt (6T)
As some desiccant for moisture absorption in the circuit is

sealed inside the receiver, be sure to remove the valves
from the pipe joint openings immediately before being
connected to the piping.
Tightening Torque
Piping joints (Refer to above.):
4283359M1 12-31
When the joints of piping are connected, apply special oil
(ND-OIL8) to O-ring, and tighten the joints to the
tightening torque shown in the table using double
spanners.
Screws and bolts:
They should be tightened to the specified torque shown in
table.
Screw Sizes Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (lbf ft)

Screw M4 0.8 to 1.2 0.59 to 0.89
Screw M6 2.0 to 2.6 1.48 to 1.92
M6 9.8 to 11.8 7.23 to 8.70
M8 11.8 to 16.7 8.70 to 12.32
Oil Level in the Compressor

Oil of 60 cc is sealed inside the compressor SCSA06C.
When the oil level is lower than specified, it may be seized
at high speed. When oil level is higher than specified,
insufficient chilling may be resulted.
When the air conditioner is started once, oil is spread
among the related components. When parts shown in the
table are to be disassembled, replenish oil in respective
components as shown in the table.
Replaced Charged
Components Amount
Evaporator 20 cc 0.59 to 0.89 oz.
Condenser 20 cc 1.48 to 1.92 oz.
Receiver 10 cc 8.70 to 12.32 oz.
Compressor Extract from a new compressor the amount of
oil which is gained by subtracting what remains
in the old compressor from 60 cc.
Each work should be done with the engine stopped and

all power supplies related to the air conditioner shut off.
After operation, start the air conditioner and confirm every
trouble part work properly.
12-32 4283359M1
Refrigerant Charging
Safety Precautions when Charging Refrigerant
FIG. 54: Only the person who is appointed to engage in
this work full time and so has been educated should be
allow to charge refrigerant, because he has to handle
high pressure as, which is very dangerous.
I-10442
FIG. 54
FIG. 55: Wear safety goggles during operation.
You may lose your sight when the refrigerant (liquid) is
caught in your eyes because there is a danger of freezing
moisture in the eyeball. An eye shield should be worn
without fail for safety. Moreover, there is a danger of
getting frostbite when the refrigerant (liquid) is spilled over
to your hand etc., when detaching and attaching a
charging bottle or charging hoses.
I-10443
FIG. 55
FIG. 56: Do not operate near the face.
Attaching and detaching the charging bottle from the
charging bottle valve, or attaching and detaching the
charging hoses of the gauge manifold and the
compressor should never be done near the face. There is
a danger of injuring greatly when the refrigerant (liquid)
gushes out by any chance.
I-10444
FIG. 56
FIG. 57: Treatment when refrigerant is caught in your
eye.
Refrigerant caught eyes must never be rubbed with the
hand or a handkerchief, etc.
Wash the eyes for more than 15 minutes by clean running
water and visit an ophthalmologist promptly for treatment.
I-10445
FIG. 57
4283359M1 12-33
FIG. 58: Pay special attention when handling the
high-pressure valve.
Never try to open the high-pressure valve (Hi) of the
gauge manifold when charging the refrigerant while the
engine is running. There is a danger of the back flow of a
high-pressure gas to the charging bottle when a
high-pressure valve is opened by mistake, which may
result in explosion of the charging bottle.
I-10446
FIG. 58
FIG. 59: Overheating the charging bottle is prohibited.
When the bottle is directly heated or is put in the hot
water, internal pressure rises and the bottle explodes
resulting in injury.
In winter etc., only use warm water of 40 degrees C (104
degrees F) or lower.
Never put the bottle in the water that is heating.
Never place the bottle on a hot engine, etc.
(1) Overheating in Water
1 2
I-10447
(2) 40 degrees C (104 degrees F)
FIG. 59
FIG. 60: Never spill the refrigerant near a heating part or
open fire.
When refrigerant touches a heating part or open fire, toxic
substance will be generated.
Refrigerant charging should be done in a place where
ventilation is good.
It is prohibited strictly to return refrigerant to the charging
bottle again.
There is a danger of explosion when the refrigerant in the
cycle is returned to the bottle, which is very dangerous.
Never apply a pressure of 1 mPa (145.04 psi) or more to I-10448
the charging bottle. FIG. 60

Never shake the charging bottle excessively.
The charging bottle is likely to come off when the valve is
not installed properly on the bottle.
Following points should be noted when keeping and
handling charging bottles
Keep charging bottles in a place where children don't
reach.
Never place them in a place which is exposed to the direct
sunshine, located near open fire, or where the
temperature may rise.
Don't keep them where corrosion takes place easily. Pay
attention to humidity.
Never apply shock to them by dropping or striking them.
12-34 4283359M1
Air Evacuation
Airtight check
Start evacuating Leave it as it is Read gauges Check airtight by Charge
10 minutes for 5 minutes using refrigerant refrigerant
-0.1 mPa (-14.50
psi) or less
Check joints Charge refrigerant by
and correct 0.1 mPa (145 psi) in
them if state of gas
required.
Connection of Service Gauge Manifold

FIG. 61: Connect the charging hoses of high and low
pressure with the service gauge manifold.
(1) Red hose … High-pressure side (H mark)
(2) Blue hose … Low-pressure side (L mark)
2 1
Connect the charging hose (green) (3) at the center of the
service gauge manifold with the vacuum pump.
NOTE: Be sure to connect the high-pressure and
low-pressure side correctly without fail.
The service valve might be provided on the compressor 3
according to a vehicle type. I-10449
FIG. 61
Evacuation
FIG. 62: Open the high-pressure valve (Hi) (1) and
low-pressure valve (Lo) (2) of the gauge manifold 2
respectively.
1
Switch on the vacuum pump to evacuate the system. (Ten
minutes) 3
When the scale of the low-pressure gauge exceeds -0.1
mPa (-14.50 psi), close the high-pressure valve and the
low-pressure valve of the gauge manifold and turn off the
vacuum pump (3).
Point:
The air will enter the system when the vacuum pump is I-10450
stopped before the valves of the gauge manifold are FIG. 62

closed.
4283359M1 12-35
Airtight Check 1 (Confirmation of Indicator of
Gauge)
FIG. 63: Confirm that the gauge pointers don't return
after having closed the valves of the high-pressure and
low-pressure and leave them as they are for a while
(about five minutes).
Point:
When the gauge pointers (1) return, there is some
leaking. Check for loose joints, repair leakage, and
evacuate the system again. Then perform the airtight
check above. 1
I-10451
FIG. 63
Airtight Check 2 (Airtight Check by the

Refrigerant)
FIG. 64: Charge the system with a small amount of
refrigerants, and check air tightness with a gas leakage
detector.
Disconnect the charging hose (green) from the vacuum 3 1
pump and connect it with the charging bottle.
Evacuate the charging hose (green).
After having tighten the valve handle (1), open a hole in 2
the charging bottle (2), and then open the valve handle
again.
Push the worm valve of the gauge manifold, and the
refrigerant pressure exhausts air in the hose. Keep on I-10452
pushing the worm valve (3) until some refrigerant comes FIG. 64
out hissing.
NOTE: Both high-pressure and low-pressure valves of
the gauge manifold should be kept shut during
this operation.
Take care not to allow refrigerant spill over your
hands or so to avoid frostbite.
FIG. 65: Open the high-pressure valve (1) of the gauge
manifold and charge refrigerant until the low-pressure
gauge (2) indicates 0.1 mPa (14.50 psi).
When charging is completed, close the high-pressure 2
valve (1).
Check for a gas leakage with a gas leakage detector 1
carefully. If there is some gas leakage, repair it.
Point:
Use a detector exclusively for HFC134a (R134a).
I-10453
FIG. 65
12-36 4283359M1
Refrigerant Charging
Refrigerant charging
Evacuate system Check for Charge from Charge from low Check for Check for gas
airtightness high pressure pressure side charged volume leakage
side
Charging from High-Pressure Side

FIG. 66: A high-pressure valve and the service can valve
of the gauge manifold are opened with the engine stops,
and about one refrigerant is filled with the service can. 6
m
WARNING: During this operation, never 5
attempt to drive the compressor. Otherwise, 4
back flow of the refrigerant may take place,
which will lead to explosion of the charging
bottle and hoses, which is very dangerous.
1
IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the compressor 3
without refrigerant, or the compressor may be
burnt down.
2
I-10454
Never attempt to open the low-pressure valve of
FIG. 66
the gauge manifold, or the compressor may be
damaged.
Close the high-pressure valve of the gauge manifold and
the valve of the charging bottle.
(1) Low Pressure side (Service Valve)
(2) High Pressure side (Service Valve)
(3) Charging Bottle
(4) Open Valve
(5) Hi
(6) Lo
Filling from Low-Pressure Side (Replenishment)

FIG. 67: Confirm that the high-pressure valve of the
gauge manifold is closed.
Set the tractor in the following state.
The engine is started, and the door in the cabin is opened
completely.
Air-conditioning switch … ON
Temperature adjustment lever … MAXIMUM CHILLING
Fan motor switch … Hi
m
WARNING: Opening high-pressure valve
I-10455
will lead to explosion of a charging valve.
FIG. 67
4283359M1 12-37
FIG. 68: Engine rotational speed … Nearly rating. Open
the low-pressure valve of the gauge manifold and the
charging bottle valve, and charge to the specified level.
When refrigerant charging is completed, close the
low-pressure valve of the gauge manifold and the
charging bottle valve, and top the engine.
m
WARNING: Never attempt to open the
high-pressure valve (Hi) of the gauge
manifold. Because a high-pressure gas may
flow backward when the high-pressure
valve is opened, the charging bottle and the
charging hoses will explode, which is very I-10454
dangerous. FIG. 68
Never place the charging bottle upside
down, or liquid refrigerant may be inhaled
into the compressor, which is likely to lead
to the valve damage of the compressor.
Place the charging bottle upright, and
charge the refrigerant in the state of gas.
FIG. 69: Charging the outside temperature is low

When the outside temperature is low and the charging of
the refrigerant doesn't make progress, you may warm the 4 5
charging bottle in the warm water of 40 degrees C (104
degrees F) or less in order to improve pressure in the 6
bottle.
(1) Water of 40 degrees C (104 degrees F)
3
(2) High Pressure Side Service Valve
(3) Low Pressure Side Service Valve 1
2
(4) Low Pressure Valve I-10456
(5) High Pressure Valve FIG. 69

(6) Open Valve
m
WARNING: Never attempt to heat the
charging bottle in hot water or over an open
fire, or the bottle may explode leading to
serious injury.
The warm water of 40 degrees C (104
degrees F) or less should be used without
fail. (Confirm it with a thermometer.)
IMPORTANT: Do not immerse the charging bottle in hot

water when warming it up. Water might enter the
chilling system.
Charging when the outside temperature it high
You may cool the condenser with the fan when the
outside temperature is high.
12-38 4283359M1
Exchange of a Charging Bottle
FIG. 70: When the service bottle empties during
refrigerant charging, replace it with a new bottle in the 1
following order.
(1) Handle
5
(2) Needle
(3) Packing
2
(4) Charging Bottle
(5) Hose Joint 6 3
(6) Disk 4 I-10457
a. Close the high-pressure valve and the low-pressure
valve of the gauge manifold. FIG. 70
b. Lift up the needle and disc of the charging bottle

valve.
c. Remove the old bottle and install a new bottle on the
charging bottle valve.
d. Air in the charging hose should be evacuated
according to the following points.
After having tightened the handle of the charging bottle
valve once, open a hole in the bottle with the needle and
open the valve.
FIG. 71: Push the worm valve of the gauge manifold,
and the refrigerant pressure exhausts air in the hose.
Keep on pushing the worm valve until some refrigerant
comes out hissing.
NOTE: Both high-pressure and low-pressure valves of
the gauge manifold should be kept shut during
this operation.
Take care not to allow refrigerant spill over your
hands or so to avoid frostbite.
Keep on charging refrigerant.
I-10458
FIG. 71
4283359M1 12-39
Detaching of Gauge Manifold
FIG. 72: When the refrigerant charging work is
completed, stop the engine, and detach the charging
hoses in the following order.
Detach the low-pressure side charging hose (quick joint) 6 5
quickly from the service valve.
7 1
Wait until the high pressure gauge shows 1 MPa (145.04 8
psi) or less.
Detach the high-pressure side charging hose (red) in the 4
same way as the low-pressure side valve is detached. 9 2
(1) Open Valve 3
I-10454
(2) Charging Bottle
FIG. 72
(3) High Pressure Side Service Valve
(4) Low Pressure Side Service Valve
(5) Hi
(6) Low
(7) Red
(8) Blue
(9) Green
NOTE: This operation should be done as quickly as
possible in order to stop the amount of the
leakage of the refrigerant as small as possible.
Especially on the high pressure side, compressor
oil may gash out together with refrigerant, so wait
until the gauge shows 1 MPa (145.04 PSI) or
less and operate as quickly as possible, while
preventing oil from scattering using waste or the
like.
Take care not to allow the refrigerant spill over
your hand, or catch your eye. (Wear safety
goggles.)
12-40 4283359M1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting with a Service Gauge

Manifold
When Air Conditioner Operation is Normal
FIG. 73: Condition:
Confirm the following conditions after warming up the
engine.
Door: Opened completely
Engine rotational speed: Rating
Temperature of air conditioner intake: 30 to 35 degrees C
(86 to 95 degrees F)
Speed of blower: Hi
Temperature control: Maximum chilling
I-10459
When the operation is normal, gauge instruction
pressures are: FIG. 73
Low-Pressure Side Pressure 0.15 to 0.25 mPa

(21.76 to 36.26 to psi)
High-Pressure Side Pressure 1.56 to 1.76 mPa
(226.26 to 255.27 psi)
FIG. 74: Insufficient refrigerant charging.
Phenomenon Cause Check and

Treatment
Points
Both pressures The amount of the Check and
of the refrigerant is repair of gas
high-pressure scarce. leakage.
side and the
low-pressure Gas leakage. Replenishme
side are low. nt of
refrigerant.
In the sight I-10459
glass, bubble When gauge
passes indication FIG. 74
continuously. pressure is
nearly 0 just
Blowing out air after gauge is
isn’t cool. connected,
find leaks,
repair them,
and evacuate
system.
4283359M1 12-41
FIG. 75: Refrigerant is not circulating blocking in the
system).

Treatment
Points
Low-Pressure Blocking at chilling Check such
side gauge cycle. as receiver,
shows negative expansion
pressure at once valve, and so
when system is on.
completely
blocked. Temperature I-10460
difference is
The shown FIG. 75
Low-Pressure between IN
side gradually and OUT of a
shows negative troubled part.
pressure when
system is not After repair is
completely completed,
blocked. evacuate
system
properly.
12-42 4283359M1
FIG. 76: Moisture is caught in the chilling cycle.

Treatment
Points
Negative Frozen expansion Check the
pressure is valve due to expansion
shown on the moisture. valve or so.
low-pressure
side after the Exchange of a
system operates receiver dryer.
normally for a After repair I-10461
while. operation,
evacuate FIG. 76
system
properly.
FIG. 77: Insufficient compression of the compressor.

Treatment
Points
Low-Pressure Defective Check
side pressure is compressor. compressor.
high while
high-pressure When
side low. compressor is
defective,
Both compressor
high-pressure body is not I-10462
side and hot.
low-pressure FIG. 77
side show the
same value
immediately
after the air
conditioner is
turned off.
FIG. 78: Excessive refrigerant and insufficient chilling

efficiency of the compressor.

Treatment
Points
Both Refrigerant is Charge
low-pressure excessive in amount of
side and system. refrigerant
high-pressure should be
side show high Defective cooling adjusted
pressure. efficiency of properly.
compressor. I-10463
Even of engine Check
rotational speed compressor FIG. 78
is decreased, fins and
bubbles are not correct them.
seen through
sight glass at all. Check
vehicle-
Poor cooling cooling
efficiency. system
(electric fan,
fluid coupling,
and radiator,
etc.)
4283359M1 12-43
FIG. 79: Air is trapped inside the system.

Treatment
Points
Both Trapped air. Replacement
low-pressure of refrigerant.
and
high-pressure After
sides show high operation is
pressure. completed,
evacuate
Low-pressure system I-10464
piping is not securely.
cold. FIG. 79
Bubbles pass
the sight glass.
FIG. 80: Excessively opened expansion valve.

Treatment
Points
Both Defective Check
low-pressure expansion valve. expansion
and valve.
high-pressure
sides show high Check
pressure. capillary tube
for I-10465
Frost (or dew) installation.
adheres to FIG. 80
low-pressure Excessive
side piping. opening of the
expansive
valve often
takes place
after having
replaced the
expansion
valve.
12-44 4283359M1
Index
INDEX
Air Conditioner Belt ............................................ 12-23

Air Conditioner Piping .......................................... 12-9
Air Conditioner Unit ............................................ 12-16
Cab
Cab and Air Conditioner ....................................... 12-1
Cabin Electrical Equipment .................................. 12-6
Compressor ....................................................... 12-26
Condenser ......................................................... 12-27
Control Cable ..................................................... 12-28
Expansion Valve ................................................ 12-17
Insulator Installing Points ................................... 12-11
Operation and control of air conditioner ............. 12-19
Precautions for Assembling the

Air Conditioner and Relative
Components Works ........................................... 12-31
Pressure Switch ................................................. 12-17
Receiver Dryer ................................................... 12-27

Refrigerant Charging .......................................... 12-33
Roof ..................................................................... 12-1
Thermostat ......................................................... 12-18
Ventilator .............................................................. 12-6
4283359M1 12-45
Index
NOTES
12-46 4283359M1

MF 1533-1540

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

MF 1533-1540

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MF 1533-1540

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

General

0-0II ~ (2J•••••_ •••••_ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••_ •••••_...................... Ill7lI om (121 ~

2WD .••_ ••.••_ ••.••...••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.••_...................... 1120 mm (44..1 ~

-- 4Cl11ol 1 _ ~ .•.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.••...••.••.•••.••.•••.••. mn 11311'" 1271 om ~lIilU ~

_ _...••.•••.••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••.•••.••.••_ ••.•••.••_ ••.••.••.•••.••.••_ 2100 mm \II h)

FIG. 8: CabTractor General Dimensions.

WORKSHOP SERVICE MANUAL

INDEX .......................................................................................................................................................... 02B-13

FIG. 1: Cooling system is filled at factory with anti-freeze

FIG. 4: To adjust belt tension, loosen alternator pivot bolt

FIG. 6: Radiator Components

FIG. 7: Reserve Tank Components

FIG. 11: Fuel Pump Components

• Fill fuel tank (1) until full.

FIG. 15: Fuel System

ENGINE AIR CLEANER

Cooling System .................................................. 02b-1

Engine Air Cleaner ........................................... 02b-11

Fan Belt .............................................................. 02b-2

Reserve Tank System ........................................ 02b-4

Thermostat ......................................................... 02b-2

REMOVAL OF FRONT AXLE

SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE FROM THE FRONT TRANSMISSION HOUSING

SEPARATION OF BELL HOUSING FROM THE FRONT TRANSMISSION HOUSING-HST ONLY

SEPARATION OF FRONT TRANSMISSION CASE FROM REAR TRANSMISSION CASE

REMOVAL OF LIFT CYLINDER CASE

SEPARATION OF REAR AXLE FROM REAR TRANSMISSION CASE

79028571 A Rev. 03-i

INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................... 03-101

03-ii 79028571 A Rev.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF

79028571 A Rev. 03-1

03-2 79028571 A Rev.

Opening/Closing Hood/Side Covers

Removing/Installing Side Covers

79028571 A Rev. 03-3

03-4 79028571 A Rev.

REMOVAL OF FRONT AXLE

79028571 A Rev. 03-5

03-6 79028571 A Rev.

79028571 A Rev. 03-7

03-8 79028571 A Rev.

SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE FROM THE

79028571 A Rev. 03-9

03-10 79028571 A Rev.

79028571 A Rev. 03-11

03-12 79028571 A Rev.

79028571 A Rev. 03-13

03-14 79028571 A Rev.

79028571 A Rev. 03-15

03-16 79028571 A Rev.

SEPARATION OF THE BELL HOUSING

79028571 A Rev. 03-17

03-18 79028571 A Rev.

Install a new seal on the trunnion shaft if required. FIG. 37

79028571 A Rev. 03-19

03-20 79028571 A Rev.

SEPARATION OF FRONT TRANSMISSION

79028571 A Rev. 03-21